'THE CATHOLIC UNIVERSITY OF AMERICA

The Department of Modern Languages and Literatures!

THE CONCEPT OF MIND IN EARLY BUDDHISM

I~

A DISSERTATION
Submitted to the Faculty of TIle
Grad.uate School of Arts and Sciences
Of The Catholic .. Vniversi ty of Ail1erica
In Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements
For the Degree
Doctor of Philosophy

by
DICfulELA PIYANA~~A

Washington, D~ Co
1974
 Dedicated
. to
Patrick de Silva Kularatne, Esq.,
B. A ... B.Se., LL. B
J...Great Pioneer in Buddhist Education in Sri Lanka,
as a token of gratitude
for his· continuous encouragement, guidance and help
to this author.
 :- .
..... .
,
.'

c
Copyright ,
Dickwela Piyananda
1974

'-,

l-\

ii

-
F

This dissertation was approved

~. :J. • "-
'~r~o:--J· ...-\ - as director

and by and

as readers.

(~

'--I

iii

-
£

Wi11.iam Cenkner, o. P., for their useful instructions, ·sugges-

tionss and corrections.

A great part of' the research for ·the present work was pUr-

sued at the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C. Dr. Hazel

Marie Griffin, Head of the South Asian Languages Section, Des-

criptive Cataloging Division, acquainted the author with and

made easi1y accessib1e to him the treasures of the library. : .. -

She also edited the manuscript. The author extends his thanks
to her for a11 her help. Three members of her staff, Mrs. Mya.
Thanda Poe, Sirikanya Schaeffer, and Murin Subasinghe a1so de-
serve a word of gratitude as do Messrs. Theodore W. Schaeffer,
L10yd Gedra, and Senarat Basnayake. FinaIlcia1 assitance was
".J •

readi1y avai.lable from Mrs. G1adys Bridewe1l, Hr. Do Dinh Loc,

.Dr. E. K. Notingham. Dr. and Hrs. U Tun Wai, and from Mrs~

Anu1a Her~t and her group of Ceylonese friends from Edina and

St.Pau1, Minnesota. To them, also$ the author extends his

. thanks.

h
&

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

Preface iv
Table of Conten.ts viii
List of Tables ix
List of Abbreviations x

INTRObuCTION 1

Chapter I. .The Two Aspects of Activ~ Consciousness: 18

Ci tta' arid Mano_
.",-
Cl:{A.P TER I I • The Five Aggregates! Rupa, Vedana., Sanna, 76
SaDkhara, and Vinna~Q
CHAPTER III. The Dependent Origination: Pa~iccasamu­ 124
ppada

CONCLUS'ION 175
BIBLIOGRAPHY 1.86
~

-----\
L

viii

-
.....----------------------------

LIST OF TABLES

Page
Tablel. The Meanings o~ the Root Cit 20
Table 2. The Meanings of the Root Man 21.

Table 3. Translations of Citta in the Dhammapada 72-

Table 4. Translations of Mano ~n the Dhammapada 72
Table 5. Translations of Citta in the Suttanipata 73
I

Tabie 6. Translations of }lano ~n the Suttanipata 73

Table 7. Translations of Rupa 83
Table 8. Translations of Vedana 84
Table 9~ Translations of Sa5na 85

Table 10. Translat:ions of Sar1khara 86

'Table 11. Translations of VihIiana
e
87

Table 12. Foods Producing Animate Being 120

'----table 13. Aspects of }lind 122

Table 14. Paticcasamuppada: Translations of Its

Twel.ve Factors
Table 15. The Thirty-one Planes of Existence 158

Table l6 e Dependent Origination:Paticcasam~ppada 173

:LX
£

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Note: Although titles for full citations ap-

pear i~n underlined form, for purposes of con-
venience abbreviations that appear in the .
text and footnotes will. not be underl.iried.

Abbreviation Ti tle of 1{ork

A. AItguttaranikaya

A. Tr. Transl.ation of the Anguttaranikaya

AA. Budd.h,aghosa, Hanorathapura!).1 Nama

Anguttaranikavatthakatha

Abhs. Anuruddha, Aphidhammatthasangaha

'j
Ai.' Up. \ .
Aitareyopani~ad

Bhe Gi'ta. Bhagavadgi'ta

Brhadara~yakopani~ad

Bud. Ind. Rhys Davids, Buddhist India

Btid'. Psy. Rhys Davids, Buddhist Psychologv
CapPa Diet. Cappeller, A Sanskrit-English
, Dictionary
. Cha__ ,Up.
(U_ _ •
Cone. Real. Na~ananda, Concept and Realltv

Compendium of Philosonhv
D.

D. A. Buddhaghosa, Sumangalavilasin1
D. Tr. Translation of the D1ehanikaya
Dhp. Dhamrnapada
Dhs. Dhammasangin'i
x

-
&

Abbreviation Ti tl.e of lvork

ERE. Encyclopaedia of Reli~ion and Ethics

Grass. Diet. Grassmann, Worterbuch zum Rig-Veda

Hist. Bud. Th. Thomas,: History of' Buddhist Thought

m..B. Rhys Davids, Historv and Literature

of Buddhism

Itiv. Itivuttaka

Itiv. Tr. Translation of the Itivuttaka

Ja. Jataka

Kath • Up. Ka~hopani~ad

•
Kaua Up. Kaus~tak1brahmanopanisad
c v' . ~

Khp. .
Khuddakapatha
(~

Khp. Tr. Translation of the Khuddakapa!ha

Kvu. Kathavatthu

Lal., Vista Lalita Vistara

M~ Majjhimanikaya
, -
H. ~~A. Buddhaghosa, Papaficasudan~

M. Tr. Translation of' the rlaj jhirnanikaya

Hac. Diet. l-lacdone11, A Pract; cal Sanskri t Dictionary

Mai. Up. Haitrayan'I"yopani~ad

.
Man. Up. Ha1)dukyopani.c;ad
Hhvu. Hahavastu Avadanam
~ihvu. Tr. Translation of' the Hahavastu Avadana!n
Hon.-liil. Bud. Monier-Williams, Buddhism
Hon .. -lolil.. Diet. Honier-1lil.liams, A Sanskri t - Enp'lish
Dictionary

xi
a

Abbreviation Title of' Hork

Mun • Up. Mtll}~akopanifjad

•
Nd. Maha Niddesa

Nett. Nettj,pakara.~a

Pra~. Up.· Pra~nopani 'lad

Ps. Patisambhidamagg.a
,

PTS. Diet. Pa1i Text Society, Pali-English Dictionary

Radh. Prine Up. Radhakrishnan, The Principal Upani~ad~

RV .. ~gved~

S. Samyuttanikaya
hi - _
·S. A. Buddhaghosa, Papancasudan1
Iv

s •. Cey. Ed. Samyuttanikayo

S. Tr. Translation of the Samyuttanikaya

Sadhpund. .Saddharmapul}<;lar'ika

Srl.. Suttanipata
. /

'')
Sri. - Tr. Translation of the Suttanipata
, / -" .
Sve. Up~.
'
Svetasvataropan1sad • 4

Ther. G. TI1era-Therl-G5tha

Ud. Udana
Ud. Tr. Translation of the Udana
Vbh.

Vine Virtayapitaka
Vism. Buddhaghosa, Visuddhimagga
lfui t. Roots. Whitney, The Roots, Verb-forms and Primary
Derivatives 01~ the Sanskr; t Lan;::uage

xii

-
·..
--------~------~--~----~~

Abbreviation Ti t1e of Work

Wint. Ind. Lit. Winternitz, A Historv of 'Indian Literature

Wr. 'Ir. Writer's Trans1ation

. I

·'S

xiii
£

PREFACE

The early Buddhist concept of mind 15 a subject that has

not yet been satisfactorily studied by any modern scholar.

The present Hork of the writer is an attempt to fulfill that"

need. His interest is to find satisfactory answers to his

quest on the two questions. 'what is mind.' and 'what are its

exl'?-austive functions" according to the teachings of the Bud-

dha. The word of the Buddha is generaliy regarded to have been

collected in the thirty-two volumes of the Tipitaka. But the

Pali scholars of the West"aswell as of the East have been

able to see t!lat all. those texts were not composed in one and

""~he sam.e period. According to those scholars, there is subject

matter,to be regarded as older than the" others. The criterion~

1S based on the"repetition of the Buddha·s teachings not OnlY'

in one text, but also in several others~ The translations of

the canonical pa:ssages, in which crucial key words pertaining

to mind and to its constituent factors occur, moreover, are

often found inco~patible or inchoate. Thus any investigation

15 to be seriously considered.

The scope of the present investigation 1S limited to the

iv
 words which are directly to be translated as 'mind', i t is

al50 limited to the terms which are used to express the con-

stituent parts of-mind. Such words are to be collected and

examined.. The texts that are to be examined for such words

and their indications must also have strict chronological

limitations. Earlier texts of Buddhism to be selected for in-

vestigation have to be decided; the relevant works·of pre-

Buddhistic Indian literature also have to be consulted.

The method followed here is ba:sed primarily on grammati-

·cal, philological, linguistic, and semantic investigation, on-

·ly to a lesser extent on philosophical. and psychological con-

sid~rations. The derivations of the selected crucial and in-
dispensable key w~rds have_to be examined radically. The

meanings are to be decid·ed according to their contexts. The

contexts in which those words are used are to be studied crit-

ically on a comparative basis. When the current translations

fail to supply an exhaustive denotation of a key word, new

·s inte~retations with more appropriate and accurate meanings
have' to be determined. It also should be done in such a way

that the current dictionaries and at least one or two transla-

tors could not object. Tables of l~ea1ring:s of' the key words
and of their roots. as they have been given in the dictiona-

ries and in the translations, are to be supplied for the pur-

pose of easy comparison and contrast .. The authenticity of the

quoted passages as of' the ear1ier works of Buddhism have to

be proved~

v
s

in re£"erring to citations f'rom the ~gveda,the first (Ro-

man) number de~otesma1}gala (book), the second . (Arabic),. ~uk­
!!: (hymn), and the third (Arabic), the ~loka (verse). (i.e.,
x. 103. 12). In the Upanisads, . the :first number refers. to the

section, and the second to the passage or verse. In thePil.i

texts and translations, the first (Roman) number refers to

the volume and the second (Arabic) to the page.

'!'he words Sri Lanka and Ceylon are used interchangeably.

throughout the work.
The writer has found the Pali Text Society editions of'
tJ'te. original Pali texts and their translations useful and r,e-
I
liabl:.e. In case of dubious points, however, the texts printed
in'Sinhalese and Burmese scripts also were consulted and cmn-

pared. The research of eminent Vedic and Sanskrit scholars on

, .
the sacred books of' the Hindus was also of much assistance.
Among them are Bloomfield, Griffith, Hume, and Max Mueller.

Grati tude is also due to a group of notable scholars on !-1aha-

'Syana BUddhism: Kasawara, Nishio, Takakusu, and Suzuki. Other
writings, exa.'Tlined for purposes of comparison, were those pub-

'lished by &~erican~ British, Ceylonese, French, German, and

Swed~sh scholars. Their contributions to Buddhism pertinent
to this inquiry appear in the appended bibliography.

~e writer expresses his thanks to the director of the

thesis, Professor Siegfried A. Schulz, Department of Modern

Languages and Literatures, The Cathol.ic University of America,

and to the readers.. Professor Robert To Heyer and the Rev. Dr.

vi
...
------------------~~------

INTRODUCTION

In the present investigation on the concept of mind in

early Buddhism. i t has been found that the only words that
hav~ been translated as mind in all dictionaries andtransla-
tions are cilia 'and ~~\. The meanings of each word as they
.~ \ ~/ 1;

appear in authoritative dictionaries and English translations

are collected and compared. In order to decide the primary

meanings of the roots from which the two words are derived,

ea~h of the roots, as given in Whitney's The Roots, Ve::r:~-

Forms and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Language, and

"Sa11 meanings of each root, as given in dictior..aries, have

been eollected and presented,in tabular :form in order to make

comparison and contrasl; easier. The meaning determined by the

wri ter as primary was the ',most sui table oneil and the one on

which all scholars could agree~ The usage of each word in the

§gyeda (the oldest literar? work in Indian literature), and

the earlier Upani~ads (the earliest Indian philosophical

works) were examined together with the earlier texts of the

Pall.' Tip~~aka
" ( the threefold collection of the canonical

1.
5

texts of Theravada Buddhism). The English translations of the

Dhammapada and Suttanipata_(two popular texts of the Tipita-

~) were examined exhaustively, and the various interpreta-

tions of citta and mana made by the translators of the two

works were collected and tabulated. These inquiries were, of

much as,sistance in deciding not only the pl,"imary meanings of

the two words but also their secondary and general meanings •

. The enquiry conducted :1.n order to determine the Pal~

'J)
words that refer directly and ~xhaustively to the constituent
---------- ------.-~--,

factors of mind has shown clearly that there are only four

such words in the earlier Buddhist texts. They are ved,ana'l

s~a, sankhara, and vi~arya, as found in the context of \
, .~
,.J'
Pancakkh2ndh~
(
the Five Aggregates). ~e Sanskr~ofills of

these words are found in the Ngveda, earlier Upani~ads, and

later works of Sanskrit literature. It is significant that

not a single word out of the four is used to desi~late what

.. \~~.
J1S
. .
meant :1.n Buddh:1.st terms. In order to ascertain the accur-

ate meanings ot: these t:our crucial words, the Pali passages

in which they have been used in the earlier canonical texts

were " collec ted, 'and their interpretations in current transla-

tions were critic;a11y studied. The various meanings of each

Word as given by thirry leading translators have also been

presented in tabular fOrIDp with one table for each word. Re-

1evant passages, other than the formula of Pa~cakkhandha,

have been examined and quoted along with their translations,

each in its proper place. w~en the translation of a quoted

3

passage seemed to be complicated or incompatible, a precise

and more Ii tera1 translation of-the author, introduced as

.eVr. Tr. e follows. Among current translations, not a single

interpretation of the formula of Paicakkhandha w~ found

complete1y free from error or reliable. However, those part-

ieu2ar'translations have not thus far been critically stu-

died by any scholar.

The twelve termso~~he complei~e formula ot the Pa'ticca-

samuppada (Dependent Origination) t~ome under investigation

and form the contents of a separate chapter of the present

work by reason of the fact that the four mental aggregates

of' thePancakkhandha also occur in the f'ormer wi th the very

same meanings. As in th~ ca~e of the Pancakkhandha, the Paii-

cca-SCL'!'IUP1:,ada has been erroneously interpreted by the trans-

--
lators. The current trans1ations of the latter have been so

__ complicated, incompatib1.e,and misleading that some .."riters

have criticized the doctrine as something meaningless. For

•
instance, E. J. Thonas has written:

"It makes superf'1uous the attempts cd' '''estern scholars

to find in It a rational contribution to philosophic
- thought. "1

And A. La Basham remarks:

'"'!his very simple doctrine [of Buddhism] was developed

~n various rather pedantic forms, most important of

1 Edward Joseph Thomas, :r'J.!.e Historv of Buddhist Thought.

2d ed. (Ne',.. York: Barnes & Noble, 1951), p. 58, note 1 (here-
ai'ter cited as Hist. Bud. Th.) .

h
£

4
which was the -Chain of Dependent Origination- (Pa~icca­
samuppada). a series oft-..el.veterms, repe_a~ec!,_irr__m~_~~
'/ than one--pC!ss~gELCti_t.h~_ ~al._i_ ~_s_,a~iptl,lres, commented on
again and again by ancient and modern scho1ars, and pro-
bably not fully,understood by anybody • .,2

And on thei'ollowing page of his work. -Basham stated, "The

,.

mechanics of this doctrine are indeed obs~~l:'e • • i'

.

TIle new interpretation of the doctrine proposed by the

present writer not only explains this obscure passage, so
; .
called by Basham, but it also oonfirms its accuracy and mean-
- ingful.ness.
'nle Pali texts selected as the representative works of
I

v early Buddhism are from the Nikaya l.iterature of the Sutta-

pitaka (the collection of discourses and other utterances)

of the Tipi taka. The ternl 'nikaya has two ' implications. When

it-is used directl.y. i t means only four textst the Angutta-

,~/
ranikaya, Dighanikava, Hajjhirnanikava, and Sarnyuttanikaya •

. -5 In a general. s,ense , i t means, the other :fifteen minor texts_

that are coll.ective1y call.ed the Khuddakanikava.

The thirty-two works of the Pali Tipitaka, ip their pre-

sent state, are indisput~bly the compositions of the Thera-

vadins. The provenience ~f these works is North India, in

spi te of .the tradi tion that they were committed to wri ting

in Ceylon 1n the first century B. C. Scholars are agreed

2Arthur Llewellyn Basham, The Wonder That Was India: A

Survey ot' th~ CuI tUre of the Indian Sub-Con-r:inent Before 1;he
Corning OI' t-h", \~"sli1':l- Evergreen ed. lNew York: Grove Press,
1959}. p. 2~9:·~·
,-
L-",.

.
Ibid •• p. 270.
 5
that they are the oldest Buddhist records available. The pur-

pose behind the composition of the works.o£ the Tipitak~ is

repeatedly mentioned in those works, as well as in the Pilli

commentaries: to preserve the Buddha's sayings and his doc-
trine in their pristine purity. The authenticity of' the Bud-
f(~"f:' "",_'i J~-

dha-worq, as it appeared in the collections of individual

direct-disciple monks, is said to have been examined in the
First Council, which was held in Rajagaha (present Rajgir),

the capital of ancient Magadha, two months after the demise

.- .. ------~
..
of' the Buddha in I~~: ~j However, the subject matter,
style, and sometimes the form of language of' a few texts have

revealed that they are of' later origin. The latest, most
doubtful work, the Parivara of the Vinayapitaka (the coll~c-

tion on discipline) is generally accepted to be no later than

the ~~~_~_entury B. C\.

j Rhy!! Davids, referring to the chronology and the nature
"df, the contents of the Buddhist scriptures, suggested that
the books olthe pa1.i Ti pi
. taka
,

"~ere cQmposed at differe-nt·-ti-me.s_.b,gtween 500 and 250

B. C. but they undoubtedly contain a-"gr-e~i-F-a:e'ar'of'much
older matter. ~~d Gautama Buddha did not leave behind
him a m.1.rnbE~:r of deeply simple sayings, from which his
fOllowers subsequently built up a system or systems of
their C'Hn. He :had himself thoroughly elaborated his '\
~octrine, partly as to details~ after, but in its fun-I
damental points even before9 !'lis mission began~ During!
his lon~ career as teacher, he had amole time to reneat
the principles and details of the sys~em over and o~er
again to his disciples and to test their knowledge of
it. And further, his leading disciples were. like him-
self, accustomed to the subtlest metaphysical distinc-
·..
----------------~
6
tioris. and trained to that wonderful command of memory
which Indian ascetics then possessed."J
Rhys Davids shed further light on Buddhist chronology
and historiography in a list of Pali lforks which existed be-
tween the time of the Buddha and the time ·of A£oka, or from
528 to 247 B. C. His priorities for proving or disproving
the authenticity of' the Buddha's teachings were arranged as

f'o110ws:
"1.. The simple statements of Buddhist doctrine now found,
in identical words, in paragraphs or verses re-
cUrring in all the boo).:s. .

2. Episodes found, in identica1 words, in two or more of

the existing Qooks.
,. The SIlas, the Paraya~a, the Octades, thePatimokkha.
4. The Digha, Majjhima,Aftguttara, and Samyutta Nikayas.
5. The Suttanipata,the Thera and Theri-Gathas. the Uda-
nas and the Khuddakapafha.
6. The Sutta Vibhanga and the Khandhakas (i.e. Vinaya).
7. The Jatakas and the Dhammapadas.

8. The Itivuttaka, Niddesa, .

and, the Patisambhida •

9. The Peta and Vimana-Vatthus, the Apadanas, the Cari-

ya-pi ~aka, and the Buddhaval.tlsa.
10. The Abhidha~ma books; the last of which is the Katha-
vatthu, and the earliest probably the Puggala-
paffilatti • .,4 .

( 'Thomas Willic.In R.l,ys Davids, Buddhism, Beine: a ~ketch of'

_the
_ .L';
. . fp
.., ~ 'T' .... •
=n~. . . 03.Ci.1.n~S
. 0 f"" +-
\]2.u"a:n3.~
. '--
\::[:2 -~ -..
~~.l.1f1Gna.
':
,·,e'y . - rev ..
ana
ed. (London: Society' for Promo~1n~ ~hrist1an Knowledge,
190:3 }, p. 86 •

4Thomas William Pillys Davids, Buddhist India. 1st Indian

ad. (Ca~cutta: Susi1. Gupta (India), 19.50), pp. 121-22 (here-
after c1ted as Bud. Ind.)
p

7
Any study on the earliest teachings of the BUddha shou1d

thus emphasize the statements found in the passages of the

Pancakkhandha and the Paticcasamuppada, which are inc1.uded in

Rhys Dayids' first priori ty.~ If' in the present study less re-

liance has been p1.aced on later works, such as the books of'
the Abhid~ammapitaka.5 the Peta and Vimanavat±hus, the Apa-

danas and·the like, the reason lies in the unreliabi1.ity of'

the evidence contained therein. For the f'urther one travels

in point of' time away £rom the date of'the Buddha's birth,

tbe more hazardous the route becomes. Fo1.k1.ore and embellish-

! -,. 0- I
ments. emerge,." and often legend is substituted for fact. A1so
'.J

the use of Pali commentaries, particu1arly those of' ~ddha-

ghosa and PhammapaJ.a, is problematic, for those now in -exist-

ence are based on Sirh~alese translations from the Pali ori-
.
gJ.nals" 6 Although such sources often are helpful, part1cular-
.

lY,in clarifying minor inconsistencies, they must be used

-- .
...\ .

Spar1ng1.y, for they represent the interpretations of scholars

who flourished some centuries after the birth of the Buddha.

5In the Abhidh2.1-n:na, the psycho1.ogical side of' the Bud-

~a'~ doctrine is emphasized. According to Buddhaghosa, 'Abh-
1dhamma' refers to the expansion and exposition of the Dham-
mae Thomas Yillia~ Rhys Davids, The Historv and Literature of
fuddh}S~. 4th ed. (Calcutta: SusIl Gupta (India), 1952), pp.
J, 4~. -
6 E • V ... Adikaram, 8arlv H-i~tf')r.,. of' B1!f1dhi~'iI in Ceylon; or,
~te of Ehlddhism in Ceylon as K.::!~eale<i bv th~·-pali CO;;J.:r.enta-
r1.es oi' -ch~ 5,-:; Cent"rv A. u. i:--1igcda, Ceylon: D. S. ?uswel-
la~ 1946), pp. 2, 4-5;-Buddhag~nsa, Samant~u~sidik~; Buddha-
ghosa's Commentary on the Vin~va Pitaka. Ed. J. Takakusu and
1.; .aga1. ~a_1~e~~ ~oc1e~y C ~b 1c~t1onsJ, volSe 96, 102,
19 9r 110, .126. 7 vols. (London ~ Oxford Universi ty Press,
2~-27), 1:113. . .
p

8
Detai1ed'descriptionso£the contents of the Buddhist ca-

non appear in standard works on Buddhism and its literature,

but a brief' explanation of' the texts in regard to the Bud-

dha·s teaching on mind ~i.l.lbe he.lpf'ul. in understanding the

substance and aims ,of this study. Texts, editions, and trans-

.lations a~e .lis,ted in the ,appended bibliography.

1. Angu~taranikaya

# ' .-
The Ailguttaran1kava"the 1argest and most comprehensive

work in Nikaya literature, is a collection of discourses ar-

.ranged in ascending numerica1 order. Rhys Davids once des-

eribed i t C\S all-encompassing, f'or it in,eluded "most of" the

-
psychology a~d ethics of' Buddhism. tt7 , Winterni tz ac~nowledges
, .
at 1east 2,308 suttas, or parts of the co1lection, but avers
that, because of difficulty in separating them exact1y, the

7Thomas William Rhys Davids, The History and Literature

gf" Buddh';sm, p. 42; The ATIguttara Nikava. Lpt. 1: Ekakanipa-
'S ta, Dukanioata, and Tikanipata, ed. i{ichq.rd Morris; pt. 2:
'Catukka Nipata, ed. Richard'Horris; pt. ), Partcaka-Nipata
and Phakka-Nipata, ed. E. Hardy; pt. 4: Sattaka-Nipata, A~~
thaka-Nipata, and Navaka-Nipata, ed. E. Hardy; pt. 5: Dasa-
ka-Nip~ta and Ek~dasaka-Nip~ta, ed. E. Hardy; pt. 6: Indexes,
by Mabel Hunt, rev. and ed. C. A. F. Rhys DavidS]. Pali Text
SOciety [Publicat;ions], vols. 10, 20, 35,44, 46, 66. 6 vols.
(1885-1910; reprint ed., London: Luzac & Co., 1956-67), 5:
371-81 (hereafter cited as A.). The literal meaning of 'An-
guttaranikaya' is: the yet-another-limb-collection.·
j

~.,. 'I'"'
s

9
number may be increased to 2.363. 8 The suttas vary in length;

the shortest consist of two lines, while the.iongest run into

pages. The five vol.ume edition published 'Text

Society at London fills 1,840 pages.

2. Di'ghanikaya
The nYghanikava 9 1~ a collection of thirty-four long ser-

mons attributed to the Buddha. 10 Each deals with one aspect

or another of the Buddhist concept of mind. It can be regar-

ded as an independent work. l l The three volume edition of the

Pali Text Society contains 904 pages.

3. Majjhimanikava
The 152 medium l.ength discourses, or sermons of the Maj-

8 Moriz Winternitz, A Histo~v of Indian Literature. , [Tran~

from the original German by S. Ketkar and Helen KahnJ. 2vols.
(Calcuttas University of Calcutta, 1959), 2:60, note l.. (here-
after cited as Wint. Ind. Lit5). According to Buddhaghosa,
however, the Di~hanik~va contains 34 suttas, the Ma.i~himanik­
aya, 152, the--Sa:lvu'C;:3.!1.ikava, 7762t and the Arw;uttaranikava,
''59557. See The Khudda:";:a-hi-rha,. TOf':'ether with .LtsCor::mentarv
Paramatthaio~ik~~ 2a. Helmer Smith from a collation by Mabel
Hunt •. ·Pa.li Text Society [Publications], vol. 77 (1915; re-
print ed., London: Luzac & Co., 1959), p. 12 (hereafter cited
.as Khp.)

9~Dlgha-Nikava [Vo1s. 1-2 ed. T. \llo Rhys Davids and J.

Estlin C~rpent::er; VG.l~ Jed. J. Est1in Ca.rpenter]. Pali Text
Society LPublicationsl, vol.so 22, 52, 67. J vo1s. (1889-1910:
reprint ed., London: iuzac & Co., 1960-67)0 (Hereafter cited
a:, D~) For a list of translations of the work, see Wint. Ind.
L1t., 2~J5, note 2.
].OBasha.rn, p. 267.

llWint. Ind. Lit., 2:35.

b
p

10
jhimanikava12 differ.from those of' the D'ighanikaya onl.Y,in

length. Each sutta~ however, treats of' a ~omplete theme. The

collection discusses a wide range of sUbjects: the Four Noble

Truths, the vanity of desires, k~ma .. ·the Buddha'.!! objections

to a belief in the soul, various types of meditation, and nib,..

.
bina. l ' The three vo1ume edition of' the Pa1i Text Society con-

tains 1092 pages.

4. Samyuttanikava
The samyuttanikava,14 or collection of' Kindred Sayings,

consists of f'ifty-s~x groups (samyutta) of' suttas, each of'·

I
which deals with specific points of Buddhist doctrine. This
is also an extensive work; the Pali Text Society edition of
f'ive volumes contains 1686 pages.
The remainder of the texts have been selected f'rom the

l2Th.e Majjhima-Nika"va. [Vol. led. V. Trenckner; vols. 2-

3, Robert Chalmers; vol. 4, Index, ed. Mrs. Rhys Davids]. Pa-
.,~i"~ext Society [Pub1.icationsJ, vols. 17, 39, 45, 47, 51, 99.
\ vols. (1888-1925; re~rint ed., Londonz Luzac & Co., 1960-
,64). (Hereafter cited ~s M.). For a list of trans1ati~ns ~f
the work, see Wint. Ind. Lit., 2:46, note 1.

lJWint. Ind. Lit., 2:46.

14The Sam~utta-~ikava'of the Sutta Pitaka. [Pt. It Sagat-
ha-Vagga, ed.' Leon ;:"eer: ~t: 2: Nidana-Vagga, ed. Leon Feer;
pt. 3~ Khandha-Vagga.ed. L~on Feer; pt •. 4. Sal,ayatana-Vagga,
ed. Leon Feer; pt. 5: Mah~-Vagga, ed'. L~on Feer; pt. 6: In-
dexes, by !-lrs. Rhys Davids I. Pali Text Society [publications],
vOls. 8, 19, 25, Jl~ 42, 54. 6 vo1s. (1884-1904; reprint ed.,
London: Lu-z:ac & Co., 1960-70). (Hereafter cited as g,,); The
Book of the K-i~ed Saving'S (Samvutta-i-;i!-cava). [Vols. l.-2
trans. :-irs. l{hys Dav·ids assisted by Stiriyagoda Sumangala The-
ra; ~Ols. 3-5 transo F. L. Woodward]. Pali Text Society Tran-
slat:on Series, vols. 7, 10, 13, 14, 16. 5 vo1s. (l.917-30;
repr1nt ed., London: Luzac & Co., 1956-71). (Hereafter cited
~s S'. Tr.}. For other' translations of the work, see Wint.
nd. Lit., 2:54, note 1. .

bl
5

11

co11ection oC fifteen works of the Khuddakanikaya, which is

sometimes considered "the fiCth Nikaya of the Suttapitaka.

but ••• [is] also c1assed with the Abhidhammapitaka. n1 5 The

whole refeTs to a collection of "small pieces."

3. Khuddakapatha
'nle Khuddakapath~,16 a collection of short recitals, 13

the shortest work 1n the Tipitaka, for it contains only nine

pages of tnxt. According to Winternitz, i t is "a composition

of nine short texts which the novices must know before all

others, and which are used in the Buddhist cult as a kind of

mantras or prayers. ft17 It must remain an open question wheth-

er the collection was intended as a little hand-book for no-

vices or as a pr~yer-book.

15Wint. Ind. Lit •• 2:70. The Buddha claimed that the

Khuddakanikava, with the exception of the four other Nikayas,
inc1uded all the texts of the Tipi~aka.

'5" .I 16Khp • For other translations of the 'Buddhist Layman's

Prayer Book,' see W2nt. Ind. Lit., 2:78, note 2.

17~int. Ind. Lit., 2:78. The three paritta (protective)

suttas, the ;-lah~'!!'1anqala, Ratana, and Karaniv3.metta are inc~u­
ded in thi s text '. They are s t i l l chanted by monks on each
cere~onial occasion and as blessing.

b
£

12
6. Dhammapada
'the Dhammapada,18 or religious verses,1.9 is the most com-

l8 The following editions and transla'tions of' the Dhammapada

were consulted: The Dhammanada. With pruface, Pali text and
English translation byE. ~{. Adikaram. (Colombo: M. D. Gunasena
& Co., 1954); The Dhan-,..'11apada. With introductory essays, Pali
text, English translation and notes, by S~ Radhakrishnan. (Lon-
donI Oxford University Press, 1950); The Dhammanada: A Collec-
tion of Vers~s, Bein~ One of the Canonical BbOksof the Bud-
'd'hlsts. Trans. from -erie Pali by F. :-fax Huller. The Sacred Books
of' the East, vol. lO~ pt. 1. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1881.);
Dham~apada. Pali text and translation with stories in brief and
notes by l"arada Thera. (Colombo: Vajirarama, 1963) i Dharnmanadam:
An Antholo.o;y of Savings of the Buddhc;_ Ed. and trans. A. P. Bud-
dhadatta 1-iahathera. lColombo: Apothec'aries Co., n.d.); The Bud-
dha' s Path of Virtue. A translation (~f the Dhammapada by F. L.
Woodward. wi th a foreword by Ponnamba.laDlArunacha~am. (Hadras:
.Theosophical Publishing House, 1929); The Dha~mapada: Being a
Collection of Moral Vprses in P~li. Ed. a second time wi~h a
literal Latin transla~ion ••• for the use of Paii students by V.
Fausbpll. (London: Luzac &: Co., 1900); The Buddha' s ~;ay of':~­
.!u~.' A tra.'1.s1ation of the Pharnmapada .... by w. D. C. ;"'agi'swara
and K. J. Saunders. The Wisdom of the East Series.. (London ~ John
Murray, 1912);lDharr~anada: the Wav o~ Life According to the Bud-
~a. Ed. Walagedera Somaloka~issa. 2d ed. (Colombo: H. D. Guna-
sena, 1969); The Dha~r.anada.'1'rans. from the Pali by P. Lai •
. New Yo~k: Ferrar, S~raus & Giroux, 1967); Hymns of the Faith
Dhammanada) ~ BeinF'" an Ancient Antholo_ .". Trans. l~rom the Pa-
Ii bY,Albert J. S~~untls. tChicago: Open Court Publishing Compa-
nYJ London: K. Paul, Trench, TrUbner &: Co.,. 1902)"
'C~tations are from the Fausb¢ll edition (hereafter cited as
Dhp.) anp fro:n The I'~inor Antnolog-ies of the Pali Canon. pt. 1:
Dhammapada: Verses on .L.;hamma and Khuddakapa"t:ha, the text of the
minor sayi~gs. Ed. and trans. C. A. F. Rhys" Davids. Sacred Books
of the Buddhists, vol. 7. (London: Humphrt.~y Hilford, Oxford Un-
iversity Press, 19J1).

t 19p.b amMapada (dha!:1:na .... nada) has been variouslY transla ted
as Footsteps of Religion,' 'Path of Religion,' 'Path of Vir-
tue,' 'Sentences or Religion, ~ t\{orte der 'w'ahrhei t. = See Rober.t
Caesar 'Childers, A Dictiorcarv of the Pali La:1~la~. (London:
K~ga'i1 Paul, Trench, L--:ibner d: Co., 1909), p. 117; Pali Text So-
~1e~y, London, P21i-?!C,,:,lish Diction:!.!,,:,::_ Ed. Thomas William Rhys
laV1ds and W~lliam Stede •. 2 volse (Lor.~on: Pali Tex~ ~ocietY,
9~9), s~v. 'dharr~apada.m (Hereafter c1ted as PTS D1C~.) A more
~~1tablechoice of Bnglish equivalents would include °Collec-
l:o~ of Words or Verses on Re1igion,@ 'Dhamma Words,' or, tRe_
1910us Sentences.' See also Wint. Ind. LitG, 2:80, note 2.
, I
s

1,
moruy known work l.n Buddhist canonical. literature. AS,Winter-

nitz has stated, it' has been

"repeatedly translated into European languages, it is
much quoted in all works on Buddhism, and has always
been held in high esteem 0l6ng to -i ts profound moral
value ••• It is an anthology of ,sayings which chiefl.Y
refer-to the ethical doctrines of' Buddhism. Of the 423
verses (in 26 vaggas or sections), every 10-20 are
formed into a section (vagga), as they deal with the'
same subject, or as a simile (i.e. of the flowers in
vagga 4, the 'flower section'), or sometimes a refrain
runs through the verses of each section ... 20 :hJ~~ 'j !1,.:
" C J; t - J ;-,',J (r

7. Uaana
The Udana,21 or ·pithy sayings,· consists of verses and

narratives. The work is di;vided into ten vaggas, or sections,

each·of which contai.ns ten suttas. The standard phrase which

introduced the udana was generally rendered in verse rather

than prose, :'Now when the Lord had gained knowledge of this

matter, he uttered the following pithy saying on this occa-

sion." The literal meaning of udana is 'breathi~g out,' or

120~.
~/'
t
l'Il.n. I'd
n. - L·~
~ .... , 2:84
21.Ud~narp .. Ed. Panl Steinthal. Pali Text Society [Pub1ica-
tions], vol. 12 (1885; reprint ed.~ London: H. Frowde, 1948).
(Herea.fter cited as U.); ·~le ="~inor . ';":l·cholo~ie5 of tht~ Pali
.f~non .. Pt. 2: l7dana: Verses of l:pli:ft, and .Ltivuttaka, As i t
Was Said. Trans. F. L. Woodward, with an introduction by C ..
A. F. Rhys Davids. Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vol. 8.
(1935; reprint ed., London: Geoffrey Cu.'11ber1ege, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1948). (Hereafter cited as U. Tro); ~e Udana;
or, The Solpmn Titter3TIC C S of 'the Bnddha. Trans. from the Pa-
Ii by D. r.l .. Strong. "London f Luzac ~ Co., 1902); Edana. Das
Buch der Feier1ichen Worte des Erhabenen. eine kanonische
Schrift des Pali-Buddhismus, in Erstmaliger Deutscher Geber-
setzung aus dem Urtext von Karl SeidenstUcker. (Augsburg: T.
Lampart, 1920); B. C. Hazumdar, "Udanam," Journal of the Ro-
1?-1 Asiat~c Society (January 1911) :197-200: E. \{indisch, -
Notes on the edition of the Udana," Journal of the Pali
~~xt Society 24 (1890), 91-108; Wint. ~nde Lit •• 2:84, note
p

1.4
-exhalation.- The majority of' these utterances, inspired by
e~tation, serve to glorify the Buddhist ideal of' life, the

deep, blissful repose of' mind of' the saint (arhat) that has

torn himself away from all. earthly things, and the eternal
peace of' nibb~rya.22

8. Iti~ttaka

1be Itivuttaka,2j another collection of 112 short pieces

of' prose and verse, may best be described as "Thus spake the

Buddha" sayings. The most notable feature of the work is the

expression of a particular doctrine first in prose, and then

in verse. The Chinese translation of Hsii:an-Tsang (c. 605-664

A. D.) lacks several of the final. passages
, that are included

in the original Pali text. 24

22Wint • InJ. Lit., 2184.

2'Iti-Vu~,;taka. Ed. Ernst Windisch .. Pali Text Society

[PuplicationsJ, vol. 26. (1889; reprint ed., London: Geoffrey
. Culnl:}er.lege, Oxford Universi ty Press, 1948). (Hereafter ci ted
as~:rtiv.);Savin~s of Buddha: the Iti-Vuttaka. A Pali Work of
the Buddhist C~non. ~~ans. wi~h an introduc~ion and notes bv
JustIn Hartley }:oo'!:"e. Columbia Lniversi tv Indo-Iranian Ser-'
.ies, vol. 5. (2";-eH York: Colmnbia University Press, 1908).
(Hereafter cited as Itiv. Tr.). For other translations, see
Wint. Ind. Lit., 2:88, note 3:
24 The Chinesf~ version has 137 suttas as compared to 112
in the P~li text~ ~intQ Ind. Lit., 2:910

6
5

1.5
9. suttanipata
The Suttanioata,25 or "Section of' Discourses,n26 is a col-

lection of' poetical suttas in five parts. The f'irst four, ~-

gavagga, Culavagga, Mahavagga, and A~~hakavagga~ contain f'if'-.

ty-f'our short poems, whereas thef~fth, Parayar;a, is a long,

independent poem consisting of' sixteen shorter parts. Parts'
f'our and five are. quoted in other works of' the Pali canon and

in Sanskrit Buddhist texts. 27

The Buddha's teachings on mind are contained in the nine
works described .above, but ,since each of' the nine~_~en terms V ...
,~ which he coined in reference to the attributes and functions

25Sutt~-~-li'Oata. New ed.' by Dines Anderson and Helmer

Smith. Pa1i Text Society [Publ.icationsJ, vol. 72. (London: Lu-
zac &; Co., 1965). (Hereafter cited as Sn.); The Sutta-Nioata:
A Collect;on of Discourses. Bein~ O~e of the Canonical 300ks
·of the 3uddhi si;s. Irans. from Pa1i by Michael Viggo .Fausb,,1.1..
The Sacred Boo~s of' the East, vol.. lO~ pt. 2. (Oxford: Claren-
don Press, 1881). (Hereafter cited as Sn. Tr.). Other trans-
lat.ions of the Suttanioata include: Buddha's Teachings, BeinE:'
~h! ~utta-~io~ta. or Discours~-Colle~tion. Ed. iri the original
Pali text wi th an Bng-1ish version :r'acing it, by Lord Chalmers,
Harvar& Oriental Series. vol~ 37. (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard
University Press; Lo~don: H~~Dhrev ~filford, Oxford University
Press, 1932); 'foven Cadences ~I' t:'~rlv Buddhists {Sut"'taninal:a).
Trans. Edward Niles :-rare. The Sacred Books oi' the Buddhists.
vol. 15. (London: Geoffrey Cumber1ege, Oxfbrd University
Press,~ 1947). '.

26Ninata is a short section of a.large collection. The

nipatas or the An~ttaranikava is an example. See Wint. Ind.
Lit., '2:92, note 2.

. 27A~thcugh the ~,.;o texts appear in the Chinese Tipitaka,

the ent1re Suttaninata has not been translated into Chinese.
S:e M. Anesaki, "Sutta-Ninata in Chinese," Journal of the Pa-
~1 Text Soc~ety 60 (1906-i907): 50-~lt A. F. Rudolf Hoern1.e,
The Sutta Nioata in a Sfu~skrit Version from Eastern Turkes~
ta
7 On9-32.'
,tt !:!.,ourna.l- of the Roval Asiatic Society (October 1.916):
. .. ......
 16
o£ the mind appear in Pali, Engl.ish equivalents had to be

selected from approximately two hundred definitions which

appear in standard dictionaries of the English language. 28

The Buddha's concept of mind fall into g~neral. secon~-

ary, and pri.mar-y:_ meanings. The first, or g~Il.eral meaning, Q

arose from a total picture of man as an animate 'being who

possessed states of active and passive conscious1:less. Man'

was ei the I:' alive or dead, awake or asleep. At the secondary Ii)
1evel, thE' Buddha drew sharp distinctions between the two

types of c~onsciousness, and weighed the relationship of one

t~the other. And at the primary level,. he designated the~)

meaning of' mind as i t related to the heart and brain of the

individual, or to the mental sense organs and sense faculties.

Once the primary meaning of mind has been established,
the Buddha cculd proceed to th'2 fine distinctions between the

_~o aspects of active consciousness, perception and concep-

!
,_J'-~-

tion. Here, also, his only guide was his personal experience
1n a world of men coming from different backgrounds and walks

of lifec Once having finalized his theory

,
of the
I
mind as pure
intellect as opposed to pure intellect infused with feeling,

28 The Randm:1 House Dictionary of the EnRlish Laney.age.

3ess Stein: editor in chief; Laurence Urdang: managing editor.
Unabridged ed. (New York: ni~~om House, 1967), s.v. ~~indQ;
~epster!s __ '~~:;'.f Intp.l~"0.tional Dict~C)::oa.rv OI~
the E'!.3'lis!1.~"'1..&­
uage .. Willia.-n Alla.rt ::eil,son, edi tor in 'Thomas A~ Knott,
chieI~;
general edi tor; Paul. 1v. Carhart, managing edi tor. A Merriam-
Webster Publication. 2d ed .. , unabridged .. (Springfield, Hass.t
G. & C. Merriam CQmpany, 19J9), s.v. "mind .. H
,
17
or sensory experience. he was ready to focus upon the s~eci­

fie aspects of the mind in re~ation to the past, present, and

future existences of a ~iving being.

Thus the terms, 'active cOJ:'lsciousness,' with its subdivi-
siona, 'perception' and 'conception,' and 'passive conscious-
ness.' along witb its role in the cyc~e of ~econcep~ion, will
~

provide the frame of reference for later chapters. The use of

these equivalents, in turn, will facil.itate the placement of

their. subdivisions into logical categories. Thought, intel-

l.ect and comprehension thus align themselves with-conception;

appr.ehension, emotion and wisdom find their equation in per-

ception. Knowledge, however, falls into both categories, ac-

_cording .to i tskind or type. Memory i"S also unclassifiable,

for by nature i t encompasses the total mind of man. The

equiv-alents described above conform to the principles of Bud-

dhist logic.
p

CHAPTER I"

THE TWO ASPECTS OF ACTIVE CONSCIOUSNESS: CITTA AND ~~NO

The Pa~i citta primarily pertains to the sensori~y per-

ceptual. and emotional functions of the active consciousness

of mind; manol.,. on the oth~r hand, encompasses the concep~
'.' tua1'and intel.~ectua.l functions of active consciousness. The
i
words al.so are used secondari~y as synonyms of each other,
'and, in their general sense-, they are equal.l.y used to mean

'mind' either as active consciousness or as passive,subl.imi-

na.l consciousness, or to mean both types of consciousness.
Both citta and mano have distinctivel.y different mean-
'J-
ings: primary, secondary, and general •
•
Primary meanings of citta and ~no l.ie in the essential
meanings of the roots from which the two words are derived.

The Vedic, Sanskrit, and Pali lexicographers Grassmann 2 (Ve-

fpa.li mano, Vedic and Sanskrit "manas.

2Hermann Gunther Grassmann, l{orterbuch '7um ~i~-Veda. J
4nveranderte Aufl. (~{iesbaden: O. Harrassm.;itz, 197J-r;--pp.
47, 990. Hereafter cited as Grass. Dict.

18

h1<,;" '
p
19

dic}, Cappe11er,3 Honier-Wi11iams,4 Hacdone11 5 (Sanskrit),

. . .

Rhys Davids and Stede 6 (Pa1i) accept the root-form as cit

for citta, and ~ for mano, but upon occasion the above men-

tioned lexicographers have differed as to their meanings.

'Whitney, in his book on Sanskrit roots, while accepting the

root-forms ci t and !!@!!' gives the meanings 'perceive, appear \

(in mind), and know' for the root cit, and the meaning

-think' f'or the root ~.7 The above mentioned lexicographers

had to give long lists of meanings for each of the roots, and

thus i t has become more difficult to decide the primary mean-

ings of the two roots. But all dictionaries include the mean-

ings that were given by Whitney. The meanings on which three

!

or more lexicographers agree are collected and given below in

the following tables.. The meanings marked in the columns of'

3 Carl Cappeller, A Sanskrit-Enp,'lish Dictionary. Ba.sed up-

on the St. Petersburg Lexicon. (London: Luzac & Co., 1891),
pp. 172, J94. Hereafter cited as Cappo Diet.

4Honier Honier-lyi1liams, A Sanc::kri t-EnO"lish Dictionarv.

Etymologically and phirologic~lly arrqnged \'lith special re-
fererlce to ••• cognate Indo-European languages. :~ew ed. (Ox-
!ord: Clarendon Press, 1960), pp. 395, 783. Hereafter cited
as Hon.-Wil. Diet.

5Arthur Anthony ~1acdone11, A Practical Sanskrit Diction-

ary~ ;iith transliteration, accentuation, and etymological an-
alYsis throughout. Reprint. (London: Oxford University Press,
1971), pp. 94, 216. Hereafter cited as }lac. Diet.
6pT"'"
:::; D':Lct., pp.

.7u-1 -
1'I::l l::lam -
rJi'np,'ht \'hitney, The Roots z Verb-Forms and Pri-
mary
h'
Deriva+ives of the Sanskrit Lan~u~7e.
.
.0-
A suoplement to
-
::lS Sanskrit Grammar. I1eprint ed. (Delhi: Hoti1al Banarsi-
dass, 1963), pp. 47, 118. Hereafter cited as \{hit& Roots.
•.-----------------
~
20
. . 8
Grassmann are the writer's transl.ations from the German •.

TABLE 1

TdE MEANINGS OF THE ROOT CIT

Grass- tcappel- Honier- Hac- "Rhys t lfui t-

I

mann l.er Wil.- donel.l Davids) ·ney

Meaning I ~iams and
Stede !
Appear (in x x .x x x x
mind)

Be conscious x "X x. x x
of
,.p;

Comprehend x x x
Intend x x x
Know x x x x x x

Perceive x x x x x x
.
Ref'l.ect x x x x

Think x x x
Understand I x x I x
-

.8The German words (in Grass. Diet.) corresponding to the

English meanings of Tables land 2 are:
Table l: (cit): scheinen (appear); erkennen (be con-
scious of); verstehen (comprehe;"ct); beabsichtigen (intend);
wissen (knoH); wahrne~'nen (perceive); verstehen (under-
stand), p. 447.
Table 2: (Gan): meinen (to be of opinion); gedenken (re-
member); Hahrnehm~n (perceive); meinen (suppose); denken
( thiT'_~), p. 990.
p

21

TABLE 2

THE HEANINGS OF TH:E ROOT MAN

I Grass- i Rhys Whit-

Meaning
I mann
Cappel; Honier- . Hac-
ler ,Wil-
'Iiams
donell Davids
and
ney

I Stede

Be of' opinion x x x

Believe x x x
Consider x x x
imagine x x x x

Know x x x x
Perceive x x x x
Remember x x x x
Suppose x x x
Think x x x x x x
Understand x x x x

In these lists there are altogether fifteen meanings, all

of which could be classified under three headings: percep-

~ion, 'conception, and knowledge. These headings are important

~not only in deciding the primary meanings of each root of cit

and ~I but also in distinguishing the meanings of each

class from those of the others. In order to avoid confusion,

the meanings of the headings are to be taken as they appear

1n the intr~duction to this work. 9

The classes of meanings under the three headings are:

9 See p • .17.

b
 p
22

(1) Perception: appear (in mind; perceiv~

(2) Conception: be of opinion; believe; consider; ima-

gine; intend; reflect; remember; suppose; think
(3) Knowled~e: be conscious of; comprehend; know; under-
stand

The meanings 'appear (in mind)' and ·perceive' are equal

in their import. Thinking and conceiving are also similar in

sense. Each pair stands for one of the two different func-

tions of active consciousness. The meaning 'know' is not on-

l.y inhereni; in perception and conception, but also points

more to thH end (knowledge) than to its means (mind). Per-

ception and conception could be taken both as the means to

knowledge and as its end, according to the context in which

the word is used. Furthermore.," a word derived from the root

~a (to know) -- except in the compound noun virt~a~a, which

is usually translated as 'consciousness· and very rarely as

'mind g ' -- i~ never translated as 'mind' just as citta and

mano are never to be understood as 'knowledge.' Thus, a

close analysis of the meanings given in the above tables

'~hows that the lexicographers cited here are in agreement

erai meanin~ of cit,lO and 'conceive' or 'think' to be that

. -~-------~-

, 10 Th e root- f orm clnt,

-. - f·lX, means t t 0
wlth the nasal ln
think' and is never used to mean 'perceiveo' The noun-stems
derived from cint are cinta and cintana and never the form
ci tta. The co-;;;-;;;-nd "h'ordcin-caI:wha means 'deluded in
thoughts,· and' cintanaravasa means tburied or absorbed in
t?Ough.tsa t The root cint is in every way similar in meaning
w~th man and not with cit" Another modified secondary root-
form ~ch is equal in--;;eaning . ..;ith cit, is cet. The· noun-""
stem derived from cet is the Pali ceto (Vedic and Sanskrit
.s..etas) . , - - - "

t,

h tl '4 c<"
$

23
of the root man. Only when translators of ancient texts apply
--------~-..... .,

the appropriate meanings with precision can we expect a

faithful and proper translation. Once the primary meaning of

a root is fixed. then all the other mE:anings given -in the

dictionaries for that particular root are secondary, in ~ost

,cases fi tting special passages. Primary meaning is the same

as that which Bloomfield calls 'normal' or 'central' meaning.

Secondary meaning is equal to his 'marginal' or 'metaphoric'

or 'transferred' meaning. I1 The subdivision 'general meaning'

applies only to secondary meanings. 1~nen a word which primar-

ily denotes a part of a whole or a member of a class, is used

to mean not the part or member, but the whole ~r class, that
I.

meaning ~s
'general.' General.ization of meaning is the seman-
"
tic change that takes place in widening the meaning of a word

~n its marginal usage. 12 Two words cannot stand as synonyms

in their primary meanings, but can so stand when both are

taken in the same secondary or general se:nse. When one word

ii used in its primary sense and the other refers to the same
\ .
,mean1ng secondarily, synonyms also occur. The following pas-
e

I~Leonard Bloomfield, Lan~~age. Reprint. (London: George

Allen & Unwin, 1962), p. 149.
1,2Ibido, p. 426.
p

·24

sage,s from theIJgveda, earlier Upani~adslJ and earlier Pali

texts of the Suttapitaka (Discourses of the Tipitaka) show

how citta ~nd mano are used 1nthe three types of meanings

explained above.

Citta in' the ~gveda .

In the 1017 hymns of the ?gveda, cittam occurs only sev-

en times in seven hymns,14 whereas other words derived from

ci t, such as verbs, adverbs, and participles occur 202 .times

in 197 verses. 15 The translations immediately following the

lJ"The Upani~ads are t1he first recorded attempts of the

Hindus of systematic philosophizing. I, The Thirteen Principal
Upanl~ads. Trans. from the Sanskrit with an outline of the
philosophy of the Upani~ads and annotated bibliography, by
Robert Ernest Hume. 2d ed.; rev., with a list of recurrent
and parallel passages by George C. O. Haas. (London: Humphrey
Milford, Oxford University Press, 1931), p. 2. Radhakrishnan
defined the Upani~ads as "communications of the knowledge of
ancient Indian seers on the problems of the deepest concern
to fit pupils 'sitting down near.,n Tr.e Pri~cipa1 Vpani9ads .•
Ed. with introduction, tpxt, translation and notes by Sarva-
pa11i Radhakrishnan. Rev. ed. (New York: Humanities Press,
1969), p. 19. Hereafter cited as Radh. Prine. Up.

l~OnlY three collections (samhi tas) of the ~J~'Veda are. ex-

(tant: (1) The ~"r.T,ns o1~ the ?ie:veda., in the PacIa Text. H.ep.
from th.e '::d.i ti 0 .:-riClC ens, bv ;:". :'.2.:;': :',;..111 '2 I ' • (Lor-don: TrlJbner
~ & Co., 1897); (2) Ri~- ~reda- Samhi ta: the Sacred HYmns of the
?r~hmans. Together with the co~~entary of 3ayanacarya. ~d.
F. Max haIler. 1st ed. 4'~ols. (London: H. Frowde, Oxford
University Press, 18~.0-92); 2d ed. (Varanasi: ThE: Chowkhamba
Sanskrit Series Office, 1966); (J)Bg-veda-Samhita. with the
commentary of S~y~n~ch~rya. Ed. S. N. Sontakka and others. 5
vo1~. (Poona: Vedic Research Institute, 1933-51). For pur-
poses of convenience these works are hereafter cited as RV.
See RV. I. 163. 11; 170. 1; v. 7. 9; X. 103. 12; 128. 6;
166. 4; 191. .. 3.

15RV. (Varanasi ed.), 5:214-15, 217.

"
>
25
verses from'the ~gveda are taken from Griffith.16

In hymn lOJof the tenth ma1}qala, a hymn addressed to

Agni, cittam is used in its primary sense, to mean 'emotion-

a1 sensory-perception':

l·Amr~amci ttam pratilobhayantl: g;-harianganyapve parehi

Abhi prehi nirdaha hFt~u sokairandhenamitrastamasa sac-
antam. tI
(RV. X. 10J. 12)
"Bewildering the senses of our foemen, seize thou
their bodies and depart, 0 Apv~.
Attack them, set thpir hearts on fire and burn
them: so let our foes abide in utter darkness. tI
(Griffith II. 545)

In this passage, Griffith interprets cittam as 'senses,'

thus using the word in its primary sens~. Sayana, the four-

teenth cen'tury commentator' on the g~vetia,l7makes no comment,

possibly because the primary meaning of cittam, in this con-

text, is cle&r. The poet invokes Agni to bewilder the t emo-

tional sensory-perceptive feelings' of his enemles.

In the next to last stanza of the last hymn of the ngve-

da (hymn
•
no. 1017), citta~ and manahr are used side by side
(

_'!Wi th their primary meanings:

1
.
"Samano mantraJ:1 samitiJ:1 samani samanam manah saha cittam-
-'
e!?am.
Sam~nam mantramabhi mantraye va!; samanena vo havisa ju-
homi. tt
( RV • X. 1. 91. J)

,l6 The Hvmns o!~ the 3<:;veda. Trans. wi th a ponular commen-

tary by Ral~h 1'. h. Grlf'fitFl: 2d ed. (Benares~: E. J. Lazarus
and Co., 1896). Hereafter cited as Griffith.

l7SayanaCs commentary follows each passage of the text 1n

the MGll er edition.
>
26

, ··The place is common, common the as'~embly, common

the mind,' so· be' their thought uni ted.
A -'common purpose do I lay before you, and worship
with your general oblation."
(Griffith II. 610)

Vi thout any obvious reason, Griff:'~ th here' translates £i,!-

. ,

tam as 'thought,' taking it in its secondary meaning, and

manal} as 'mind,' taking i t in its general 'sense, whereas both

could be taken in their distinc'tive primary meanings. Saya-

, ,

na's confusing eXplanation of' cittam here is citt~m vicarajam

j~anam, which means • ci tta is the l<:nowledge produced b~~ vica-

~.' According to Monier-Williams, vicara can mean any 'of the

following: 'pondering, deliberation, c6nsideration, ref'lec-

tion~ examination, investigation,' all of' which are primarily

.
related ~o manaQ and not to citta. Sayana explains manaQ as

. .
manana-sadhanam antahkaranam, or 'the inner action that pro-
duces thi~~ing.t Thus, according to his explanation, manaQ

means 'thought,' its primary meaning. Sayana seems to be in-

terested in showing 'the difference between citta and Manas by

(
-. .
using two expressions as an introduction
.
to the words. The

present writer is inclined toward another translation of' this

"[ ~ ,

verse, that is, a more literal translation, using the primary

~,

meanings of' citta and manas:

"Of these (who are gathered here), the sacrificial

formula is the same, the religious audience is
the same" the thoughts together wi th fee.lings
are the same. '
(As there is no conflict or disagreement in these),
I chant a common formula to you; I perform the

he Q
,
~ ..
--------------------~--.-­

27

.. ~ -- .~sacrifice for you with co~~on obla-

tion.··
(Writer's Translation)18

In the last verse of the Bgveda, h~dayaniis used in the

primary sense of citta, and manalj. 1S likewise used, side by

side:
"Saman1 va akutih~ samana hrdayani va M
Q~
•
Samanamastu vo mano yatha val]. susahasati."
(RV. X. 191. 4)

"One and the same by your resolve, and be your.minds

of one accord.
United be the thoughts of all that all may happil~r
agree."
(Griffith II. 610)

A more precise and lit~ral translation is:

"(0 ~tvijs and Yajamanas), your intention 1S the

same. Your feelings are the same.
Let your thoughts be equal sO that you all may have
the highest happiness and agreement."
(Wr. Tr.)

-Griffith translates hrdayani as 'mind,' and mana5 as

'thought.' As hfdaya is more related to citta, and manas to

the brain~ h~dayani would be better translated as 'emotional

feel~ngs,' which 1S cittats primary meaning. In the foregoing

) . .
[ -verse, hidaya 15 taken in its psychic sense and used as a

synonym of citta.

In hymn l 70, which 1S addressed to Indra and the Haruts

(the storm gods), cittam appears to have been used in its

primary sense:

18Hereafter cited as lir. Tr.

p

28

, UNa . .
nunamasti no ~vah kastadeva yadadbhutam;'
. ' .

Anyasya cittamabhi sartcaregyamutadhTtam vi naS'yati."

(RV. I. 170. 1)

"Naught is today, tomorrow naught. ,Who comprehends

the mystery? ,
We must address ourselves unto another's thought,
and lost i~ :then the hope we formed."
(Griffith I. 2J5)

In this instance, Griffith takes cittam in its secondary

sense, 'thought.' Sayana records it as cittam manasa.!n. The

literal meaning of manasam is 'something pertaining tomind.'

Sensory-peTception and intellectual conception: both pertain

to mind, as they are the two component parts of active con-

sciousness. It is difficult to determine, therefore, whether

Sayana intended manasam to mean 'perceptive skill' or 'con-

ceptive skill.' 'In this context the w:r:iter prefers the pri-

mary meaning, 'perceptive skill,' for citta~. rather than

'thought,' which is the primary meaning of manas. Wherever

the context Goes not raise a question, it is proper to give

precedence to the primary meaning.

Cetantl, the participle derived from the root cit ('to

~ perceive t ) J used as the nomina t.i ve feminine agent noun, and

sumatina.m, a derivative of the root ~ ('to think'), occur

side by side in hymn J, addressed to the river-deity Saras-

vat~, of the first maV~ala:

"Codayi tri' st.tnrtana.:n cetan tJ:' suma:tTnam yajri.affi dadhe Sar-

asvati. u
(RV. I. J. 11)

"Inciter of all pleasant songs, inspirer of all gra-

cious thought,
Sarasvatl accept our rite:"
(Griffith I. 5)
>
29

Here Griffith translates cetanti as 'inspirer,' a remote

secondary meaning not known to Sanskrit or Pali lexicograph-

ers. A-literal translation of the verse ~s more acceptable:

"Intoner of pleasant songs, perceiver of great.

thoughts,
o SarasvatT, accept the sacrificial offering."
(Wr. Tr.)
CetantT, a gu~a form of cit, also appears in RV. VII. 95. 2

and expresses the primary meaning of the root cit.

Cetanam, a derivative of the root cit ('to perceive'),

1S used 1n its primary sense, in the following .§loka ad-

dressed to Agni:

"Ava srja vanaspate deva devebhyo havi9 pra daturastu

cetanam."
(RV. I • 13 • 11)
"God, [Sovereign] of the Wood, present this our ob-
lation to the Gods,
And let the giver be renowned."
(Griffith I. 16)

A precise literal translation of the verse should read as

follows:

nO-God, Lord of the Wood, presen1'; the oblation to. the

Gods.
Hay sense-pleasure be to the giver."
(Wr. Tr.)

"The present tense, third person sin~llar verb cetati oc-

curs twelve times in the gg-\Teda and in almost all cases seems

to be used in the primary meaning, even though the transla-

tors often interpret the form with a secondary meaning. 19 The

19RV~ I. 10. 2; 128. 4; III. 11. 3; VIe 12. J; VII. 16.

3; 42. 2; VIII. 12. 1; 13. 20; 32. 28; IX. 62. 10; 106. 2; x.
176. 3.
p

30

eleventh hymn addres~ed to Agni, of mavsIalaJ,·runs:

ItAgnirdhiya sa cetati keturyajfi'asya purvyal;J artham hya-

.. sya tara1}i. n
(RV. III. 11.J)

"Ensign of sacrifice from of old, Agni well knoweth

, t
with his thought
To prosper this man's aim and hope." .
- . -. ~ (Griffi th I. JJl)

By·translating cetati as 'knoweth,' Griffith again uses a

secondary meaning of the root cit. By using its primary: mean-

ing. the literal translation assumes this form:

"That Agni, the old banner of sacrifice,. perceives.

through wisdom.
His benevolence lis, indeed, prosperity.1t
. . . . (Wr. Tr.)
The Kau§ika Sutra of _the Atharvaveda 2_O uses ci tta,. manas,

and hEd side by side, and distinguishes one from the other

in their appropriate primary meanings:

"Yad vratam atipede ci tya manasa hrda adi tya rudras tam- ._-
.~

mayi samincLl-J.a tam. ,,21

"0 Adityas, 0 Rudras, in whatever act of devo~

tion I have transgressed, either by perce1v1ngo~
thinking or feeling, may ye forgive me."
(Wr. Tr.)
In the tenth ma~gala~ the 128th hymn, addressed to the

20 The Atharvaveda is the last of the four Vedas. It con-

tains magic charrr:s r;;r the purpose bf fulfilling secular
needs_ The Pali canonical texts mention only the three older
Vedas, and pro~ that ~he Atharvaveda was not accented as a
sacred Veda until a later-date. Ath~rvan means a ~agica1
charm.

21 The Kau§ika ~1.!tra of the A tharvaved;'~· ~H th extracts

from the commentaries of Darila and Ke~ava. Ed. Maurice
Bloomfield. (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1890), p. 117.

b
p

31
,,' 'J'~F' .
Visvedevas (al.l. gods or a cl.ass of dei ties). ". runs:

"Agne manyum pratinudanpare~amadabdho gopa9 pari pahi

nastvam.
Pratyartco yantu niguta~ punaste mai~am cittam prabudham
vi ne~at."
(RV. X. 128. 6)

"Baff1.ing the wrath of our opponents, Agni, guard us

as our infallible protector.
Let these thy foes turn back and seek their houses,
and let their thought who watch at home be
ruined."
(Griffith II. 574)

In the above context, Griffith takes cittam as 'thought'

in its secondary sense. Sayana, on the other hand~ commertts:

cittam j~~nasadhanam manary, or, 'citta is manas that produces

knowl.edge.' As perception and thought bo'th produce knowl.edge,

i t is difficult to discern what Sayana'means by manas. If he

equates manas with manindriva, 'the mental sense-faculty or

its percepticns,' he interprets citta in its primary sense.

If he takes manas as 'thought,' citta also means 'thought.'

which ~s a secondary meaning. Cittam, in the verse above, al-

sp coul.d be interpreted as tmind,' or ·whol.e a~tive conscious-

.
ttess. 'T.l.n ~h'
.... ~s case, cittam is taken in its general. meaning.

Citta in the Earlier Unani~ads

At present there are more than two hundred Sanskrit works

knO"i"l'l1 under the title Upani$ad. According to those who com-

mented upon the Uoanisads frbm the ti~e

/ .
of Sankara, of the

ninth century, up to Radhakrishnan, of most recent times, the

number of earlier and principal Vpani~ads varies between ten

and eighteen. Certain works, even among these, are not accep-
p
j2

ted by some scholars as having pre-Buddhist origins or as

having been contempo~'ary with early Buddhism. 22

Since Max Hu1ler, Deussen, Rawson, Hume, Keith, and Radh-

akrishnan agree on the number thirteen as comprising the

principal Upani§ads (namely, Brhadara~yaka, Chandogya,· Tait-

. I
tir"iya, Ai tareya, Kau~1tak1' Kena, Katha, I Isa,
__ Hundaka, Pra-
z". . _

~na, :r-rar;t9.ukya, SvetaS'vatara, and Hai trayal)1ya), these major

works were examined as to the extent to which citta and mano

were used. Six works. the Brhadaranyaka,

v •. . •
Taittir'iya,
.
Aitar-

eya, Kena, Katha, and I£a Upani~ads do not contain any d.ire(~t
~ . ---. ~--~~----

f'orm of' ci tta. 'In the Ka thlopanisad, 23 cetas is used once (II.
--~--~----.'--- .

2. 1)24 in the sense of' perception. Cetana oc~urs twice in

.11. 2. 13, in the sense of" 'perceiver.' H,rdaya is used three

times (II. ,. 9; 14; 15), once to mean 'feeling~ artd twice tor

.22"Modern cri ticism is generall.y agreed that the ancient

prose Uparti~ads, Aitareya, Kausitak3, Chandogya, Kena, Tait-
tir'iya, and Brhadarat:lyaka, together with Is§.. and Kaj:ha belong
to the eighth and se~enth centuries B. C." Radh. Prine Up.',
p. 22. Aceordin!?; to Hmne, f'The actual date .. that is thus as-
signed to the Upanisads is ~round 600 B. c., just prior to
the rise of Buddhi 311':.. H The Thirtl?en Princi nal l~n;::;'ni saris, tJ.
. "[ 21. "The Sa tapa (;}labrahma1).a, o.r" h'hi en the dFhadara!}yaKa lJpa;"i-
. ~ad forms the conclusion~ is believed to contain material
that"comes down to 300 B •. C." lac. cit.
23The Kathopani~ad belongs to the Taittiriya school of
the Yajurveda. S8e h:::tdh. Prine Up., p. 593.
24References given to the verses of the ~pani~ads are ac-
cording to the texts as they appear in Radh. Prine Up. In a
three number se~uence, the fir~~ refers to the 6hapter, the
second to the Brahma1)a f and the thi rd to the verse. In a biO
number sequence, as in the Kenopani~ad, the first refers to
the ~ection; and the second to the verse. One number, as in
the Isopani~ad, refers directly to the verse.
 mean the 'physical heart.' The Aitareyopani)?ad uses h;daya

once (I. 2) in the sense of citta in its primary meaning.

. ..
In the Hundakonanisad,25-cetas
~ -' andcitta are used in the

same verse with a primary meaning:

"E~o'nur atma cetasa veditavyo yasmin pra~ah pa~cadha

samvivesa,
Pra~ais cittam sarvam ota~ prajanam~ yasmin vi~uddhe
vibhavaty e~a atma."
(Mun. Up_ III. 1. 9)
•
"The subtle self is to be known by thought in
which the senses J.n rive different forms have cen-
tHred. The whole of men's thought is pervaded by
the senses. When i t (thought) is purified the self
shine s forth.!'
(Radh. Prine. Up.~ p. 688)

In this place Radhakrishnan interprets both citta and ce-

- I

tas as 'thought' and prar;ta as ·senses.,' -If one knot... s atman

merely by thin1;:ing, i t is only indirect knowledge ba.sed on

belief. If one perceives through the mental sense organ (~­

indriya), ~nly then does i t become direct knowledge. Pr~9a

is 'life-breath,' the life-supplier to all the senses, thus

i t cannot mean 'senses' either primarily or secondarily. A

~ precise literal translation of this verse is as follows:

ttThis fine and subtle self is to be kno;.tn by

mental perception on which the life-breath has en-
--------------------------
25The HU1)qakopani!?ad belongs to the Atharvaveda. See
Radh. Princ. "Up. 1 P 609. (hereafter ci ted as f-1UI~,1. ·Up.)
to
p

tered in five forms. 26 The whole of man's perception

is pervaded by the five kinds of life-breath. When .
perception is purified,27 the self' shines forth."
(Wr. Tr.)

Sound sensory~perception,of course~functions well in a

body in which the five kinds of vi tal air function smoothly.'

and well. When one's understanding of a concept through the

,process of scientific intellectual thinking becomes perfect,

i t is a percept of realization and not a concept.

In Sanathku.."Dara's instruction to Narada on citta, the

:following passage from the Cha.ndogyopani~ad28 uses citta in

the sense of perception; contrasting i t with mano· (concep-

-tion), he demonstrates how perception expands and becomes

thought:

"Ci ttam va va sarukalpad bhuyah. Yada vai cetayati • tha

. . samkalpayati; atha manasyati; atha vacam l':rayati; Him u
.
namn1 'rayati; narnni mantra ekam bhavanti; mantresu kar-
mani."
(Ch. Up. VII. 5. 1)

26 The life-breath, or the vital air, is fivefold: Ana, or

pra~a, the in-going air to purify the blood; ~pana, the out-
going.air; edana, ~he upward moving air in the body; ~~mana,
the air which has i~s seat in the stomach and entrails; and
.~ V-};ana, t:;~e air diffusing in -ehe body_ Hadh. Princ. Up., pp •
. ~41-~J; see also V., Sec. 19-2J of the Ch~ndogyopanisad (here-
after cited as Ch. Up.) and III. 4-7 of the PraSnoDan1.~ad
(her~after cited as Pra~. Up.)

27The purificatio"l':. of citt.::t from d.efilement (that is,

from lust, hatred, and ignorance) 1S a post~lation for Hindu-
ism a's well as for Budc1.,hi s·m.

28The Chando~yopanisad is regarded as a part of the Sama-

veda. It b;-longs to "the Chandogyabrahr:tarya, \ihich has ten chap-
ters. The last eight chapters of r.he Brahmana constitute the
~nandogyopani7ad. Rad. Princ. Up_, p. JJ5e
> ...
~~,

.- :.~

35
"Thought, assured~y, is more than will. Verily
when one thinks, then he wills, then he reflects,
then he utters i t in name. The sacred hymns become
one (are included) ~n name and sacred works in the
sacred hymns."
(Radh. Prine. Up., p. 473)

In this instance Radhakrishtlan translated cittam as

'thought,' and cetavati as 'thinks,' depending upon a secon-

dary meaning of tne root cit. In the same passage he inter-

prets manasvati as 'reflects,' thus using the pr~mary mean-

ing of the root man. It is obvious that cetayati and manas-

yati, as they are used in the context above, should have dif-

ferent meanings. l{hen the words are translated according to

I
their primary meanings, the translation not only becomes pre-

cise and literal, but also differe~tiates between the radical

meanings of the three words, making the passage more intelli-

gibJ_e:

"Perception, assu~~edly, ~s more than will. Veri··

ly when one perceives (with senses) then he wills,
then he thi~~s, then he utters speech and he utters
i t in name. Tne sacred hvrnns become one in name and
sacred works in the sacr~d hymns. ,,29
(Wr. 7r.)
Proceeding with the KausTtak~br~hmanopani~ad,30 we find

a passage in ,.;hieh ci tta, and mano are used in their primary

meanings:

~9The same misapprehension concerning citta occurs ~n

Radh. Prine. cp., p. 473, and eh. Up. VII. 5. 2.

JO The Kausltaklbr2.hmanoDani~ad (or KausI"taki UDani~ad)

belongs to th~ B~veda. Although'tBr~hmaoa~ is a part o~ its
name, i t does not form a part of the Ka;l~:rtaklbrahmar;ae The
work lS hereafter cited as Kau. Up_
 "Yatraitat 1Juru~a arto maris:vanabalyam etya sammoham eti,
tam ahur udakramit cittam,na £F~oti, na pasyati, na va-
ca vadati, na dhyayati, athasmin pra~aJI evaikadha bhav-
ati, tad enam vak sarvai~ namabhi~ sahapyeti, cak~u~
sarvaih rupaih sahapyeti ~rotram sarvaih ~abdaih s~~a-
• # • . ,.

pyeti, manah sarvaih dhyanaih sahapyeti."

• • • (Kau. Up. III. 3)

"When a sick person about to die gets to such

weakness as to fall into a stupor they say of him,
his tho~ght has departed, he does not hear, he does
not see, he does not speak with speech, he does not
think. He becomes one in that breathing spirit alone.
Then speech together with all thoughts goes to it.
And when he departs from this body, he departs to-
gether with all these."
(Radh. Princ. Up., p. 777)

Here again, citta is erroneously translated as 'thought.'

In a few lines above the quotation cited, Radhakrishnan,more-

over, translated manal). as 'mind'., In thl.s case, however, ci t-

tarn primarily means ·perceptive skill,' and manas means 'con-

ceptive or thin.l<:ing skill.' With these primary meanings ~n

mind, 'a more comprehensive and literal translation of the a-

bove passage is as follOws:

"wl1ere a sick person about to die has come to

such weakness and falls into a stupor, they say that
his sensory-ryerceptive ability has departed: he does
not hear, he does not see, he does not speak with
words, h'e does not think [root dhye, Wto~ think']. At
that tirn'8 only the life-breath is in him. Then the
speech goes together with all names to it, the eye
with all foy:cis to it, the ear \-lith all sounds to it,
the thinJ.cing Eacul ty ..-Ii th all thoughts to it. It

(Wr. Tr.)

3lpraya, which means primarily tlife-breath' or 'vital-

air,' seen~s in this nassage to refer not to mere breathing
but to passive subliminal consciousness in a secondary sense.
As long as subconsciousness prevails in the body, the indivi-
dual will breathe.

b
 )7

In Pippa1ada's rep1y'to Kau~a1ya on the 1i£e of a person

in the I
Prasnopanl.~a,
• d 32 .Cl.. tt a re tal.ns
· .
more of' :1.. ts genera1

meaning ('mind'), or its secondary meaning ('passive con-

. sciousness'), than another secondary J11eaning (' thinking' ),

the choice of' Dr. Radhakrishnan:

"Yat cittas tenai~a pra~am ayati, pra~as tejasa yukt~

sahatm,ana ya tha samkalpitam l.6kam paya ti ."
;,ct / , : '. , (Pras. Up. III. l.0)

"Whatever is one's th.inking, therewith one en-

ters-into life. His life combined with fire al.ong
with the sel.f l.eads to wha.tever worl.d has been fash-
ioned (in thought)." .
(Radh. Prine. Up., p. 660)
Citta, therefore, should mean 'passive consciousness' in
a secondary way, or retain its general. sense, 'mind,' for 1n
the conception of a being, the parental embryo starts to'
grow only when the 'passive mental. continuum' of a dead being
....
is absorbed into it. It is not l.ife-breath but subl.iminal
'consciousness that works as the life force until. the being

starts breathing. Prana, moreover, as it occurs in this pas-

~age~ shoul.d mean 'l.ife-force,· rather than 'lif~-breath.'

)
"( -Thinking can begin only when the perceiving sense-organs are

ful~y grown. A better translation of Pra~. Vp. III. 10,

therefore, is:

, 3 2 The quota tions w~ich follow are from the PraS'nopani ~ad,
the· Nunrj·:l.kol:) ani :::ad,
'the ~;and·~'.k",~onani ~ad, all of ;.;rncn belong
to the'l~harvavedaf ~he ~veta~vatarocanisad, of the Taittiri-
ya School of' the Yajurveda, and the ;'lai trayani'yopanisad, of
the Black Yajurveda.
,- These texts are -hei-eai'ter ci ted as -Hun.
Up., }-~a1} • Up., Sve. Vp_, and Hai. Up_
p
38
.. "Because this passive consciousness comes to
1ife together with that (heat), the life-force com-
bined with heat, and together with the self, leads
(the being) to the world that has already been
fashioned."
(Vir. Tr.)
In the same Upani~ad there is a passage which gives a

list of objects and their actions that find their rest in

dreamless sleep. Citta and manas appear in the last part of

the list as follows:

" ••• padau ca gantavyam ca, manas ca mantaVyaID ca, bud-

cihi~ ca, bOddhayyam ca, ahamkaral ca'hamkartavyam ca,
cittam ca cetayitavyam ca, tejas ca vidyotayitavyam ca,
praI}as ca vidharayitavyam ca."
I (Pras. Up_ IV. 8)

" ••• the feet and what can be walked, the mind
and what can be perceived. the intellect and what
can be conceived, the self-sense and what can be
connected with the self, thought and what can be
thought, radiance and what can be illumined, life-
breath and what can be supported by it."
(Radh. Princ. Up., p. 663)

Here Radhakrishnan interprets ~as ca mantavyam as 'the

mind and what can be perceived,' using the root man in its

general sense, and cittam ca cetaV"J'am ca as 'thought· and what

c'an be thought, f taking the root cit in its secondary sense.

1
Where primary meanings of words go well in a certain context,

there is no reason to prefer their secondary or general rnean-

~ngs.Another
-
error is the translation of pranah as 'life-
.,
breath". e In this particular case, one would have to say that

a person 1n deep sleep is already dead. Taken in proper con-

text. the meaning is clear; the active consciousness, togeth-

er with its functions, finds rest during deep sleep. Hence

p

'9
the passage should be translated as follows:

" ••• the feet and their movements~ the thinking

and its thoughts, the intellect and its understand-
ings, the self-sense and its feelings, the perceiv-
ing and its percepts, the (mental) radiance and its
illuminations, the active life-force and its ~c­
tions [a11 take rest during sleep]."
(Wr. Tr.).

·The descending order of the words of the passage suggests

that 'sense-perception' (citta) precedes 'thinking' (manas)

and '-understanding' (buddhi).

In the HU!l9akopanisad~ two expressions occur, one with

citta~ one with cetas: ora~~ntacitt~va (I. 1.lJ), or 'he

whose emotional state of mind is tranquil,' and bhagavatena

~-

cetasa (II. 2. J), or 'he who has a feeling towards the Dei-

ty,' that is, any dei ty~ such as K~~~a. and Vi~Ifu, relating to·

or coming from Bhagavat. J3

In the Mandiikyooanisad, the only word-form of the root
_ _.1..- ... ,-

cit that is mentioned is cetomukha1:l (Han. Up_ III. 5). Accord-

ing to eapeller (po 175) and Honier-Williams (p. J98), it re-

fers to 'one whose mouth is intelligence.' Radhakrishnan, on
)
the other hand, translates i t as 'whose face is thou~ht.·

(Radh. Prine. Up.~ p. 696). In both meanings, the root cit as-

sumes secondary meanings. In the Mary¢~kyopani~ad the state of

active
(
consciousness, both perceptive and conceptive, is

- called jag-arita-sthana (III. J), or 'waking state. f The state

J3Although Dr. Radhakrishnan translates bh~gavatena as

'Brahman,' (Radh. Prine. Upe t p. 68J), ~lonier-;hlliams demon-
. strates the pr-oper meaning of the word in this context. See
Mone-Wi~. Diet.; p. 751.
 p
40
of passive subliminal consciousness ~s introduced by the term

susunta-sthana (III. 5), or a 'state of deep sleep.' The ~n-_

termediate state in which one dreams 1S called svapna-sthana

(III. 4), or 'the dr-earning state.' A .fourth transcendental

cosmic consciousness is introduced by the two synonyms, cat-

urtha and turiya, which ~n their literal sense, mean 'the

fourth.' (III. 12)

In the sveta~vatarooani~ad, belonging to the Taittiriya

School of the Yajurveda, the Supreme (Brahman) is intr0duced

as sva-citta-stham (Sve. Up. VI. 5). 1Yhile Radhakrishnan pre-

fers to use a secondary meaning, and translates i t as 'one

who abides 1n one's own thoughts,' in the primary sense of

citta, the phrase means 'who abides in one's own feelings,'

and in its general sense, 'who abides in one's own mind.'

Ceta (VI. 11) is translated by Radhakrishnan as 'the knower,'

(Radh. Prine. Up., p. 746), a second~ry meaning, whereaspri-

marily i t means 'the seer or perceiver.' A second express10n

which refers to Brahman is cetanas cetananam

- - (
Sve.
I
Up. VI •

. '13). By translating the express10n as • the intelligent among

the intelligences,' Radhakrishnan favors the use of a secon-

dary meaning. (Rad. Prine. Up., p. 747)~ In its primary

sense, however, the expression means 'the seer of seers.'

Concluding with the Maitr~yan~yopani~adJ we see that cet-

an~ is used ten times, cetamatra and cetas, thrice each, and

citta ten times. Radhakrishnan's translations of th~se ex-

pressions vary between primary, secondary, and general mean-

I
h
p

41
ings, the primary meaning being the l.east used. One verse of·

this text (Mai. Up. VI. J4) uses citta in the sense of 'pas-

sive consciousness':
,
"Cittam eva hi samsaram, tat prayatnena. sodhayet
yac cittas tan-mayo bhavati. guhyam ~tat sanatanam."

"Onets own thought, indeed is samsara; let a man

cleanse i t by effort. "(</hat a man thinl<s, that he be-
comes, this is the eternal mystery."
(Radh. Prine. Up., p. 845)

Here thought means 'that which gets stored 1n the passive

consciousness.'

Citta in the Earlier Suttapitaka Texts

I

As in the ?gveda and the Upani~ads, the canonical works

of the Pali TipitakaJ4 also use citta according to context,

in primary. secondary, or general meanings.

In the Dhammanada,J5 citta is used twenty-seven times.

Radhakr-ishnan translates one as 'heart' (primary sense), thir-

teen as 'mind' (general sense), and thirteen as 'thought' (a

secondary meaning), while Narada Thera and Hrs. RhysDavid~

prefer 'thought' for one and 'mind' for the remaining twenty-

Jl.lThe thirty-two Pali' canonical Harks of Theravi:"ida Bud-

dhism are collectively called the Tinitaka. 'These ,,,,arks are
divided into three coilections~ or ·baskets': the Vinavanit-
aka (the collection of' six books on discinline); the S~ltta­
pi ta}~a (the collection of' nineteen books ~f discourses); and
th-e---::uJhidhar.,l:;aci ta}·:a (the coilection of seven books on spe-
cia1 or deeper doctrine).
 42
six. Table .3 illustrates how these and other scholars have

translated citta as used in the Dhammapada.

Citta is mentioned thirty-three times in the Suttanipli-

E. 36 Chalmers' choice in nine cases of the thirty-three is

-'mind' and in seventeen instances uses 'heart,' while Hare

translates eighteen as 'mind,' eleven (di:rectly or indirect-

ly) as 'heart,' and one as ·thought.' Fausb~ll, finally,

t:ranslates twenty-six as 'mind,' four indirectly as 'heart,'

and three cLS 'thought.' Table 5 presents a complete -list of

the translations of citta in the Suttaninata.

In the first ten discourses (each of which is no longer

than five lines) of the Anguttaranikava,'J7 citta 1.S used

twice in each discourse, apparently in'the sense of 'sensory

emotional feeling,' a primary meaning. Woodward J8 has trans-

lated all twenty as ~heart' in its psych6logical meanirig,39

using the pri::nary meaning of ci tta as w.ell. In his Pali com-

mentary on the Al~guttaranikava, Buddhaghosa presentscatubhu-

makakusalacittam to explain citta in this context, employing
-'the Abhidhamma te-rminoloE:;-Y to mean 'profitable active con-
--------------------------
3 6 Sn • (Anderson and Smith ed.)
37A. , ", 1 : 1- 2.

3 8 A. Tr.

39In the first ten discourses of the first chapter, first

book, of the A~~lttaranik~vap Woodward has translated all
twenty instances of citta as 'heart' in its psychological
meaning. See also PTS Diet., pp. 266-67_
p

sciousness comrnon to four planes. ,40 This meaning ~s too

wide, for i t can include even the consciousness of an Ara-

hant, whose lust is said to have been eradicated. Buddha-

ch~t~&
ghosa, however, does not object to the primary meaning of

citta:

"N~harp bhikkhave ai\.fialtl ekarnpam pJ. samanupass~i yaIp,

ev~ purisassa citta~ pariy~d~ya titthati yathayid~
bhikkhave itthiriinam.
. "
Itthi~p~ bhikkhave purisassa cittam pariy~d~ya tif-
•
thati ti.«
• (A. I, p. l)
"Monks, I know of no oi;her single form by which
a man's heart is so enslaved as 1~ is by that of a
woman. Monks, a woman's form obsesses a man 1 s heart.rt
(A. Tr. I, p. 1)
The four discourses i that follow 4l are similar in wording

except for the following changes: 1n the place of rfioa in the

first, sadda (sound) is used in the second; gandha (smell) in

the third; rasa (taste of the rongue) in the fourth; and

photthabba
• I·
(touch) in the fifth. The next five discourses of

the first chapter demonstrate how a man's form, sound, smell,

" ,
~astef and touch obsess a woman's emotional feelings.

The third, fourth, and ninth discourses of the second

40Buddhaghosa, ~r2~ora thanu:::-anI 7-Jai:1a An~ ttaranikava ttha-

katha. Ed. Ratmalane Sri' lJharmarama .':';aval-caThera. 2d rev. ed.
Lp~li in Sinhalese Script]. (Colombo: Granthaprakasa Press,
1922), p. 12. Hereafter cited as AA.

b
 44
chapter use citta and cetas side -by side as synonyms.42

In the thirty discourses of the third, fourth, and fifth

. chapters, citta is used twice in each in its primarymean~

ing. 43 In the first five discourses of the sixth chapter.

simi~arly, it is used twice in each discourse in its primary.

sense. 44
Moving on to the third discourse of the sixth chapter of

the Anguttaranikava, we :find that the term mettam cittarn is

used t~ mean the heartfelt and friendly feeling toward all
beings without discrimination and expectat;ion of return.Wocld-

ward transl~tes "the term as 'thoughto:f gOOdwil~.·45 To think,

speak, or act in a friendly manner ~s, of course, far easier

than' to f~el gem"~inely frie~dly toward all beings wi thout dis-

~rimination and expectation of rewa~d. It is the real feeling

'of world-brotherhood as taught and stipulated in all great
religiQns:
ItAcchar.1-sanghftta-matf:am pi ce bhikkhave bhikkhu met-
tacittam ~sevati ayaIJl vuccati bhikkhave bhikkhu. Aritt,aj-

42A'. I •.. J ."'r,

~~, I, 9 , p p . J -4. Th· e '
pa~rs men t"~one d ar e ce t -
asol-r!1att&~ ('torpidity C?f the perceiving faculty of mind~
and l!na-citta~ ('in him ~ho is torpid in perception'), A. I.
l..~. J; cetaso a,-f1nas3.r:1a (. non- tranquili ty in perception t) and
avuoasanta-ci ttassa (! in him .."hose perception is not tran-
.qu~"I') , ..•
.l J.._.
TT 1 . '+,
I a..:..So
, ce +-...,3.50 '\:1.'::00..5:1:::10
- (
\ f t ranqul.l~
"t y 'l.n
perception') and vUnasanta-cittassa ('his '\-lhose perception is
tranquil'), A. II. i. 9.
4JA • III. iv. 5,·pp. 5-1.0.
44A. I. vi. 1-5, pp. 10-1.1..

45A" Tr. I. v~. 3-4, p • 8.

.'
 ov£dapatikaro amogha~
A ~,
Ko pana vado ye na~ bahul~karont1

(A. I. vi. 3, p. 10)

"M'onks, if' for just the las'ting~of a finger-snap
a monk indul.ges a thought of goodwill, such an one is
to be called a monk. Not empty of result is his mus-
ing. He abides doing the Master's biddin~. He is one
who takes good advice, and he eats the country's alms-
food to some purpose. \fua t then. should I say of those
who make much of such a thought?" ...
(A. Tr. I. 8)
A lJlore :li teral translation, using the primary meaning of

citta, is as follows:

"Monks, if for just the length of time involved

in a snap of the fingers, a monk experiences a friend-
ly feeling towards all beings, such a one is to be
called a monk who has attained full mental develop-
ment. He abides by the dispensation of the Teacher
(the Buddha); he makes use of the Teacher's advice,
and he eats the countryls food; offered and dispensed
as 'alms, not without purpose. What then is there to
tell about those who develop and constantly display
such friendly feeling?"
(Wr. Tr.)
The first and second discourses of the sixth chapter of

the Ekakanipata (Book of the Ones) of 'the ~guttaranikaya

use citta to mean active consciousness 1n the general sense,

~assive conSC10usness in the secondary sense, or mind in the

widest sense. The first explains the nature of citta of the

ordinary individual who 1S usually a generator of cankers,

while the second describes that of the Arahant who has eradi-

cated cankers or d.efilement.The first discourse runs:

46 Eleven good results of mette-citta are listed in the

!i.ettani s?. . ;i;s2.s~: tta of the Anoe11 t taranik;lya. See A. V. xvi e 1-
Z,p. J42. Fer the value o:f metta, see AA. V. vii. 1-10, pp.
150-72; s. II. xx. 5, p. 265; Itiv., p. 19.
" 46

"Pabhassaram idatp bhikkhav~ cittalll tanca kho ~gantu­

'kehi upakkilesehi upakkilittham. Tarp assutavaputhujjano
yath~bh~tam nappajanati. Tasm~ assutavato puthujjanassa
•
ci tta-bha,.ranS rita ttht ti vad'!3.mt ti."
(A. I. vi. 1, p. 10)
"This mind, monks, is luminous, but i t is defiled
by taints that come from without. But this the unedu-
cated manyfolk understands not as i t really is. Where-
fore for the uneducated manyfolk there is no cult~va­
tion of the mind, I declare."
(A. Tr. I, p. 8)
The se"cond discou~se reads:

. .
"Pabhassaram idam bhikkhavE~ cittam ta~ ca kho ~gantu-
kehi upakkilesehi
. . .
vippamuttam. Tam sutava ariyas~vako
yathftbhutatp paj~I1~ti. Tasmt1 su1:avato ariyasilvakassa ci tta-
bha.van'~ attht ti vadfunt ti."
(A. I. vi. 2, p. 10)
"That mind, monks, is luminous, but it is cleans~d
of taints that come from wi thout. "This the educated
Ariyan disciple understands as i t really is. 1-lherefore
for the educated disciple there is cUltivation of the
mind, I declare."
(A. Tr. I, p. 8)
Mind 1S defiled or purified only in its active stage,
that is, during the stage of perception and conception. Con-
~epts arise from percepts and often become sankharas or men-

(tal kamma forces. Sankharas consist only of concepts when the

,..--'

latte~ are tainted or defiled by taQhi, a 'craving' or 'sel-

fish needy feeling.' Active consciousness (as perceptions and

conceptions) in its pure or impure state, when stored in the

'subliminal consciousn~ss' and rendered inactive, is called

'passive consciousness.' An individual begins his life-span

irt a state of passive consciousness~ As a foetus he rests in

his m~thert~ womb in a state of passivity, seeing nothing,

, !.
p

knowing nothing, Yet one cannot maintain that the mind of the

foetus is luminous (pabhassara) simply because-it knows noth-

ing of the world and its temptations. As the- foetus grows,

·its emergence from the parkness of the -womb becomes inevita-
hIe. At that state its mind i s naturally liable to taint or
1

defilement .• Once the individual is born, he immediately as-

sumes a waking state, or ~ state of active consciousness, but

in the ·background passive consciousness 1.S always there. The

same individual ends his life-span when passive consciousnes:s

leaves the body to enter another embryo, and the process .of

rebirth is fulfilled. The qnly exception rests with the.Ara-

hant, the one who has totally purified his mind from defile-

ments and attained pabhassara citta or nibbava. Upon his

death, the continuum of the passive consciousness terminates.

Thus citta, taken in context with the two discourses men-

tioned above, can mean only 'active consciousness,' or 'pas-
sive consciousness,' or both. ·Passiv~ consciousness 1.S direc-
t.1y introduced in the Fali texts by the words viIt1a1}a',47 and

bha va,48 l and indirectly by citta 49 and mana.50 The Pa1i com-

mentaries and the Abhiclhamma, on the other hand, stress bhav-

47See Sn. 1073; also Chapter II,. p. 107.

48A .. II, pp. 45, 79.
if
49A. IV, pp •. 402, 404.
-.
50 A • I~I, p. 443.

b'
p - l:.

48
anga SI and bhavangasota along with vin~aQa and bhava, but use

citta and marto indirectly~S-2 In his commentary on the Angutta-

ranikava, Buddhaghosa uses bhavan~a cittam to explain citta.

(AA., pp. J7-J8).

In the discourse of the Anguttaranikava that deals with

perversions'(vipallasa), we find that citta is used in its

primary sense (A. II. ix. 49, p. 52), but since i t is used 1n

conjunction with sa~~~ and vedan~, i t will be discussed in

Chapter II. Passing on to the Bharadva)asutta (Discourse on

Bharadvaja)5J of the Sa~vuttanikava54 we discover several pri-

C_.; mary uses of ci tta.

" Upon a visi t to the Elder Pir.H;iola' B1;1aradvaja (a disciple

of the Buddha)., Udena, the king of Kosala, asked ",hy young

5 l Mrs. Rhys Davids mentions a bare expression of bhavafi~a

tha t occurs in the Anou ttarani kava (II. -79). See AnurUd.dha,
Co~pendium of Philosonhv. Being a translation now made for the
first time from the original Pali of the Abhidhammattha-Sang-
aha, with introductory essay and notes by Shwe Zan Aung. :lev.
and ed. Mrs. Rhys Davids. Pali Text Society Translation Series,
vol. 2. (London: H. Frowde, 1910), pp."9 (note 2), 265-67.
Hereafter
I @
cited as cpa~

52"Pakati mane hi bhavan~acittar.::, tam annadutthar.,," AA.,

p. 37; "Cittanti ekacce t~va~cariy~ bhava~iaciti~~ ti vadan-
ti," A.<\., p. 36.

5JPiQ~ola-BhEradv~ja was the son of the chaplain of King

Udena of Kosaobi. He learned the Vedas and, became a successful
teache~. Later he became a monk and a disciple of the Buddha
and attained arahantshio. G. P. Malalasekera, Dictionarv of
P~li Proner ~arnAs. Indian Texts Series. 2 volse (London: John
Mu~ray, 19J7-JQ), 2:202.

54 S • (Feer ed.).

b
r
monks', mere lads with black hair, and bl.essed wi th happy

youth, had not found enjoyment in lustful passions (anukIli-

tavino kane=u), but practised the righteous celibate life in

its ful.lness and perfection and l.ivedtheir span of lif~ to

the full. Bharadvaja replied:

"VuttaIp kho etam Haharaja tena Bhagavata janata pas-

sata arahata sa~masambuddhena. Etha tumhe bhikkhave matu-
m~ttisumatucittam upatthapetha bhagini"matt1su bhaginIcit-
tam upatthapetha dhi'tumatti"su dhi"tucittam upatthapethati.
Ayam pi kho ~!aha.raja hetu ayarn paccayo yenime dahara
bhikkhu ••• yavajivarn paripuI}-!mrn parisuddham brahmacari-
yam caranti addhananca apadentI ti."
• (S. IV. xxxv. 127. 4, p. 110)
"It has been said, maharajah, by that Exalted one
who knoweth, who seeth, by that Arahant who is a Ful-
ly Enlightened One: ·Come ye, brethren; in the case
of those who are just mothers, sisters and daughters,
do ye call up th~ mother-mind, the sister-mind, the
daughter-mind.' That is the condition, maharajah,
that is the cause whereby these young brethren, who
are mere lads with jet-black hair ••• live out their
span of life to the full."
(s. IV, p. 68)
A2though Woodward has used citta in its general sense in

translating this passage, a more literal translation is de-

~ived from its primary meanin~:

"It has been said, 0 Great King, by that Exalted

One, who knoHs. who sees, the Arahant who is the Ful-
ly Enlightened One: 'Come yet monks, those of you who
are like mothers call up the ~other-feeling toward
them, those like sisters call up the sister-feeling
toward them, and those like dau~hters, the daughter-
feeling for them.' This is also, 0 King, a condition,
a reason why thes~ youn~ monks ••• practise the
righteous celibate life in its fullness and perfec-
tion and live their span of life to the fullo n
(Wr. Tr.)
In this discourse~ citta is used eight times and in all

cases Bistinctly refers to feeling rather than to the intel-

b
>
50

~ect. Its compound forms, matucitta, bhaginlcitta, and dhitu-

citta clearly indicate true inner feeling, that is, the emo-

tiona1. aspect of perception which the Buddhist is expected to

, cu1.tivate.

In the Vitakkasanthanasutta'(Discourse on the Forms of

Thought, No. 20) of the Ma,;jhimanikava,55 ci tta and cetas ap-

pear together as synonyms. The meaning is secondary:

IfTassa ce bhikkhave bhikkhuno tesam-pi vitakkanam

vitakkasankhar3.santhana.n manasikaroto uppajjant' eva pa-
paka akusala vitakka ch.pi d. pi me pi [i. e. chandupa-
samhitapi, dosupasamhitapi, mohupasamhitapi] tena bhik-
khave bhikkhuna dante~i danta-m-adhaya jivhaya talum ah-
acca cetasa cittam abhinigga~hitabbam abhinipP1!etabbam
·abhisantapetabbarit. tt56 .
(M. I. ii. 1.0, pp,. 120-21)

"Monks, if whi1.e the monk is attending to the

thought :function and form of those thoughts, there
still arise evil unskilled thoughts associated with
desire and associated with aversion and associated
with con:fusion, monks, that monk, his teeth
clenched, his tongue pressed against his palate,
should by his mind subdue, restrain and dominate the
mind."
(M. Tr. I, p~ 155)
In the :foregoing translition, Miss Horner also treats ce-

~ and citta as synonyms according to their general meaning.

A translation accorcing to the secondary meaning of ,the root

.£it, hOHever, is more adequate:

55H.; see also The Collection o:f ~!idd18 T,eno;th Savin'Ss

( "\.,
• 1'_~ . .1,l~ tr - -,:
- '-'",_,,::l,lA,' ~a
..; . h.• ..;~,",'
1',..... ':'t \)
. . . . . . . . ~~"l
1" +- h e D -. 1";
v,,_ .~~.1. oy... I • ' ),
,
-t-,.... ......... r ... ....,.
",OrLLer
;.1,...."
c"). • .f a 1 1.
T)

Text Society Translation Series, nos. 29-Jl. J vols. 1954-59.

Reprint. (London: Luzac & Co., 1970).
5 6 In the PTS Diet. (po 267), khittacit~a is introduced as
fa heart unbalanced. t ilhile the psychic 'heart' al,,,ays refers
to ~i tta,' thought and intellect refer to mano.
 p
.51.

·"Monks, if in the case of that monk who fixes the

mind intently upon examining the form and function of
thoughts, there are still evil thoughts that never
produce good results, thoughts associated either with
lust or with ill-wiIl, or with in:fatuation, monks,
that monk, with his teeth clenched, tongue pressed
against his palate, should completely subdue_ oppress,
and torment such thoughts by his thinking. 1f
(Wr. Tr.)
On the discourse on asceticism, th(~ Udumbarikasihanadasu-

tta 5 7 of the Di~hanikaya,58 the Buddha uses citta and cetas

side by side in their primary meaning. When the Buddha once

visi ted Nii?;rodha, the wanderir..g ascetic, at Udumbarika Park,

the latter asked the Buddha to explain to him how austerity

attains· the highest rank for man and reaches the pith. The

Buddha answered, in part:

•
..... So abhijjhaT loke pahaya vigatabhijjhena cetasa
viharati, abhijjhaya citta~ parisodheti; vyapada-dosa~
pahaya avyapanna-citto viharati, sabba-pa~abhuta-hitanuk­
amp~ vyapada-padosa citta!J1 parisodheti; thina middhrup pa-
haya viga ca-th"ina-middho vihara ti, ·aloka-saMT sa 1.:0 sarn-
.pajano thina-middha cittarr; parisodheti; uddhacca-kukkuc-
caIF pahaya anuddhato viharati, ajjhatta'gl vupasanta-citto
uddhacca-kukkucca citt~ parisodheti; vicikicchaT' pahaya
tiI}I].a-vicikiccho viharati f akathaIjl-kathi' kusalesu dhamme-
su vicikicchiiya ci ttarp parisodheti.
'So ime paKca nivararye pah~ya cetaso upakkilese pa~­
~aya dubbal~-kara~e metta-sahagatena cetasa eka~ disam
pharitva viharati, tatha dutiyap1, tatha tatiyaTt tatha
catuttha!J1. Iti uddham adho tiriyalf} sabbadhi sabbattataya
. .
sabb~vantam lokam metta-sahaga~ena cetas~ vipulena mahag-
gatena appamaIJena averena a,'yapajjhena phari tva viharati
It
•••
(D. 111. 16-17. ppo 49-50)

57A literal translation of the title of the sutta J..S "The

Discourse on the Lion's Roar in Uduwbarika Park." The park
was named after Queen Udlli~barika.
Ill·
58Del D. Tr. (F~ys Davids and Carpenter edse)

&,
 52
Putting away the hankering after the 'world,
It • • •

he abides with unhankering heart, and purifies his

mind of covetousness. ?utting away the can-t{er of ill-
will, he abides , ... i th heart free from enmi ty, benevo-
lent and compassionate towards every living thing,
and purifies his mind of maie''folence. Putting away
sloth and torpor, he abides clear of' both: conscious
of l.ight, mindfui and self-possessed, he purifies his
mind of sloth and torpor. Putting away flurry and
worry, he abides free from excitement; with heart se-
rene within, he purifies his mind of flurry and wor-
ry. Putting away doubt, he abides as one who has
passed beyond perplexity; no longer in suspense as to
what is good, he purifies his mind of doubt.
He, having put away th€!se Five Hindrances, and to
weaken by insight the strength of the things that de-
file the heart, abides leti;ing his mind, fraught wi th
love, pervade one quarter of the world, and so, too,
the second quarter, and so the third, and so the
fourth. And thus the whole wide world, above, below,
around and everywhere, and altogether does he contin-
ue to pervade with love-burdened thought, abounding,
sublime, and beyond measure, free from hatred and
il.l-will .....
(De Tr. III, pp. 44-45)
Here citta and cetas appear with all meanings of the root

£i!, sometimes as 'heart,' sometimes as 'thought,' and some-

times as 'mind.' No distortion would occur in the message

that the passage conveys, however, if the translator had used

the primary meaning of cit in his work.

In the Khuddakapatha,.59 ci tta is ment:ioned twice in its

general sense, 'mind t or 'active consciousness,' and manas

three times, one generally, as 'mind,t and the others as a

59Khp.; see al so The }linor Readii1.£s (Khuddal<apa tha ): the

. Fiu-rst Book ()f --;~~,:: ":::~01~ (;·'")11 ~~c: c"; on (:::-l11d.(_i~JJ"c2...;ii~:.:..~\.."LJ.). l.r. !.'""ro:n
the Pali by Bhikkhu ~ana~oli.Pali ~ext Society Translation
Series, no. 8. (London: Luzac & Co., 1960), (hereafter cited
as Khp. Tr.)
p

53
secondary meaning of' the root ~,or synonym of·citta. 60

Moving onto the tenth sutta of the first chapter of the

Udana,61 we find that cetas is used ~n its. general sense,

. 'mind,' and later in the sutta, 1n its primary meaning, .•' 'per-

ception' ;
" ••• Atha kho B~iyassa D~ruciriyassa evavt cetaso par-
ivitakko udap~di: ye nu kho keci loke arahanto va arahat-
tamaggarp vasamg,panns' ahap tesarv anIlataro 'tie Atha kho
Bahiyassa Daruc'iriyassa purapasalohitadevat~ anukampikl3.
atthakam~ B&hiyassa D~ruc~riyassa cetas~ cetoparivitakkam
artr{!ya yena B~hiyo IJaructri y~ ten' upasartkami, upasaIlkam-
itva B~hiyaT Dartic'l.riya9 etad avoca: neva kho tVa1J1 Bahiya
arah~ n~pi arahattamagga~ va samapanno, s~ pite pa~ipad~
n'atthi, y~ya tvam a~aH~va assa arahattamaggam va sama-
• #

panno 'ti."
(Ud.I. 10, pp. 6-7)
n • • • Now consideration arose in the mind of Bahi-
ya of' the Bark Garment thus: I wonder ;.,hether I am
one of those who in the world are arahants or have at-
tained the ar~~ant path.
Then a devata [deity] who was formerly a blood-re-
lation of Bahiya of the Bark Garment, out of compas-
sion and de.sire for his . ."relfare. knowing with his' o\<Tn
mind the consideration of his mind, came to where he
was and said this to Bahiya of the Bark Garment: 'Bah-
iya, neither are you arahant nor have you reached .the
(
arahantst path. Yours is not that course by which you
) could be arahant or reach the arahants' path.I "
(Ud. Tr., pp. 8-9)

Here we see that Woodward has used the general sense of

cetasa, translating i t as ·with his own mind,c whereas 'with
his own perception' ~s more specific. The translator has also'

taken ceto~ in cetonarivitakka, in the general sense, but a

_60qitta: Khp., pp. 3.5; manas: Khpap pp. 4.8.

61Ud. (Steinthal ed.); Ud. Tr. (Woodward ed.)
~
p
I 54

more precise interpretation would be 'the consideration that

occurred in his thought.' In these cases, cetasa takes on a

primary, and ceto (in cetooarivitakka) a secondary meaning.

In another section of the Ud~na, cetas~ is used more pre-

ciselyas 'feeling' or 'heart,' both primary meanings. In the

presence of the Buddha, Bhaddiya praises the solitude of~is

forest life:

" • I' e- Pubbe me bhante ag~rikabhtitassa rajjasukha~ kar-

ontassa anto pi antepure rakkh;1 susaIl1vihita ahosi bahi pi
antepu::-e rakkha susarpvihi ti ahosi. Anto pi nagare rakkhi
sus~v:LhitS ahosi bahi pi nagare rakkh-a susaTJ1vihitg ahosi.
Anto pi janapade rakkha susaIJ1vihit~ ahosi bahi pi janapa-
de rakkha susa~vihit~ ahosi. So kho ,ahap bhante evap rak-
khi to gopi to santo bh~to ubbig'80 ussank~ utrasto vih~siIJ1
etarahi kho pan' ~ha~'bhante ara~agato pi rukkhamulagato
p1• sunnagaragato
...,...;'" '" p1. e k ako ab h A1to anu b b1gg0
. .!.l,A
anussar~1 anu-
• A ~
trasto apposukko pannalomo paradavutto m1gabhutena cetasa
viharami.,,62
(Ud. II. 10, p. 19)
"Formerly, sir, when I enjoyed the bliss of royal-
ty as a householder, within my palace guards were set
and outside my palace guards were set. So also in the
district and outside. Thus, sir, though guarded and
protected, I dwelt fearful, anxious, trernblin~ and
afraid. But now, sir, as I resort to forest-dwelling,
to the root of trees, to lonely spotSt though alone,
I am fea.rless, assured, confident and unafraid. I
live at ease, unstartled. lightsome, with heart like
that cfsome 1.. ild creature."
(Ud. Tr., p. 24)
A~ though ci tta 1S mentioned t •.;ice in its general sense to

mean tactive consciousness' in the seventh sufta of the first

chapter of the Iti~2ttakaf Woodward translates the word 1n

62The phrase mi:'!:abhutena cetasa can also be translated as

~ewith feeling like that of a deer.'
>
55

SabbaII1 bhikkhave anabhijanap apar1Janal!1 tattha

n •••

citt~~ avirajaya~ appajah~ abhabbodukkhakkhayaya. Sabba~­

ca kho bhikkhave abhijana~ parijana~ tattha citta~ vira-
jayaIp pajaha!p bhabbo dukkhakkhayaya-ti."
( I ti v • I. i. 7, p.; 3)

"Monks, the man who does not understand and com-

prehend the all, who has not detached his mind there-
from, who has not abandoned the all, can make no
growth in extin~ishing Ill. But, monks, he who ·does
understand and comprehend the all, who has detached
his mind therefrom, who has abandoned the all, he
makes growth in extinguishing Ill."
(Itiv. Tr., p. 118)

A final example in which citta occurs both in its primary

and secondary meanings, both in its perceptive and conceptive

aspects is to be found in the AndhabhITta Jataka, the story 6f

the chaplain who was blind in lust. Here the term nanacitta 64

means 'different feelings and thoughts.'

An examination of passages from the Egveda, Dpani~ads, and

Tipitaka will. demonstrate that mano, like citta, has assumed

three t'ypes of meanings: primary, secondary, and general.

~anas in the Egveda

Two examples from the ~gveda attest the use of manas iIi

its primary meaning, 'thought.' The verses are composed in an

ancient metre called Gavatrl (Song of Three Feet) and are di-

63 1 tlV.
.
Tr., p. . 11 8 •
" 64 Th
,e J- 1
ata(a,. ~
log-e t her .,nth
. .
1tS CommentarY, B '
~ elns:;- T a 1 es 0f
the Anterior Births 01- C·otaT:1a Buddha. L'd. V. l'ausb¢ll and Di-
nes Anderson. Pali Text Society LPublications]. 7 vols. 1877.
Reprint. (London: Luzac & Co., 1962-64). (Hereafter cited as
Ja.
,. with the number of: the Jataka attached)

b
 56·

rected to Agniand IJbhus: 65

ttGhr:tap~~tha manoyujo ye tva vahanti vahuya1;t a: devantsom-

.ap~taye."
(RV. I • 14. 6 )

"Let the swift steeds who carry thee, thought-yoked

and dropping holy oi1~
Bring the Gods to the Soma draught."
(Griffith I. 12)

.
"Ya Indraya vacoyuja tataksurmanasa har1 sam~bhiryaj~ama-
~ata."
(RV. I • 20. 2 )

"They who for Indra, wi th their mind, formed horsE:s

harnessed by a word~'
Attained by works to sacrifice."
(Griffi th I. ~!J)
I
In his translation of the second verse, Griffith inter-

prets manasa as 'with their mind,' whereas a more specific

rendering may be attained by using its primary meaning,

• thought' :

"Eat the sacrificial clarified butter from the ves-

sel, 0 ?bhus,
Who prepared horses for Indra by thought and yoked
them by word. ft ,
(Wr. Tr.)
!-1analJ occurs seventy-five times in the 1i}gveda; amo.ng oth-

er case forms, manamsi occurs 6 times; manasa, 1.14; manase, 4;

rnanasa~, 22; manasasya, L(V. 44, 10); and manasi, .1 (X. 10.

J). Among the verb-forms or the root E.!.§-.!!. ('to think') manava-

.!i occurs once (1.1.33. 4); manisye, 1 (VI. 90 6); manayata1;t,

65~bhu is a collective name lor three semi-divine beings,

:gbhu, Vaja, and Vibhan. They are celebrated for their skills
as artists and spoken of as supporters of the sky. John Dow-
son, A Classical Dictionarv of Hindu ~!vthologv and Religion.
,7th ed. <-London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1950), p.
267.
r
i
!
::.--:. - - .-
57

manau, j (VIII. 72.

--·'2'~, :i~\~:''''6j~·'·''8;-·6.5. 16); and manamahe, 19. Nearly all the forms

contained in these 250 eitations are translated ~ccording to

'. :,the primary radical meaning of ~,' • to think. f Translations

o'f the noun-forms are divided between primary, secondary, and

'general meanings, 'thought,' 'heart,' 'and 'mind,' respectiv'e-
1y.

Manas in the Upani9ads

.
The thirteen Upanisads to which this study is confined

contain frequent references to words derived from ~, and re-

present a1l types of meanings. When used,in a general sense,

it may m~an 'mind' in its ,totality, active consciousness, and

I. ' _

passive consciousness.

The following quotation from the Brhadaranyakopanisad 66

H .... l

-demonstrates how the root ~ is used in its primary s~nse:

"Janakam ha Vaideham rajI\avalkyo Jagama.

Sa mene: • na vadi sya' i ti. If

trYaj~avalkya came to Janaka (king) of' Videha. He

thought (to himself) "I will not talk. ttt
l,>, (Radh. Prine. Up., p. 254)
"
In the following verse of the same work, Sakal.ya speaks

to Yajrlavalkya ahout the eternal Brahman, using manas in its

secondary sense, rather than citta:

fI}1anasai vanudras tavyam, naiha nanas ti kim cana:

••
M:rtyo~ sa m'ityum apnoti ya iha naneva pa~yati."
(Br.
b
Upe IV. 4. 19)

66Hereafter ci ted as BI). Up •.

>
58

"On1y by·the mind is i t to be perceived. In i t

there is no diversity. He goes from death to death,
who sees in it, as i t were diversity."
(Radh. Princ. Up., p. 277)

In this context, manasa, which Radhakrishnan translates

as 'by the mind,'refers to the faculty of mental perception

(manindriva), which pertains directly tocitta, but only in-

directly to manas.

In the passage given below, hfdaya. an equivalent of cit-

~, is used in. the same manner as manas in the above citation.

Sakalya asks Yajf'lavalkya, "On what is truth supported?" yaj!la-

valkya t s response and Sakalya t s confirmation of' its truth run~

..... H~daya i t i hovaca, hrdayena hi satyam janati hrdaye

fiavalkya~n
.
hy eva sat yam pratisthitam bhavat1ti. Evam evaitat, Yaj-
"

(Br. Up. III. 9. 23)

the heart,' he (Yajnavalkya) said, 'for
IItOn
through the heart one knows truth, therefore i t is
on the heart that the truth is supported."
"Even so, yajnavalkya."
(Radh. Princ. Up., p. 242)

The author of the Maitra.yaniyopanisad,

- '-
however, uses man-

. as in its prireary sense, or as 'thought':

~
" ••• }~ana eva ma.."1usyanam karanam bandha-mok!2aY0J:l.
Eandhaya vi!?ayasangim mok§o nirvii'ayam sm;;-tam."
(M~i. Up. VI. 34)

ltHind, in truth, is the cause of bondage and

liberation for mankind; for bondage if i t is bound
to objects; freedom from objects, that is called
l i bera tion .. I t ,
(Radha Prine. Up., pp. 845-46)

In this passage~ Radhakrishnan transl~ted mana~ according

to its gen'eral meaningt 'mind,' of which thought is a part,

and lists the verses Hhich relate to this subject under the
p

59

heading: 'control of thought J..S liberation~' The correct mean-

ing of manas in this context J..S its primary one, or 'thought.'

Yajrtavall-<::ya t s explanation of the nature of self to U~asta

C-akrayaI}a is an excellent example of the use of nouns and

verb-forms of the root ~ in i t-s primary sense:

"Na df~ter d!'!?taram pa§yeb-, na S'ruter S'rotaram S'FnuYal),·

na mater mantaram manvitary, na vijnater vijnataram vij-
M"iyal] , e~a ta atrna sarvantaral}, ato' nvad artam •• II"
(Br-. Up. III. 5. 2)

"You cannot see the seer of seeing, you cannot

hear the hearer of hearing, you cannot think the
thinker of thi~~ing, you cannot understand the un-
derstander of understanding. He is your self which
is in ·all things.) Everything else is of evil."
- (Radh. Princ. Up., p. 220)

Here the nominal forms of drztr and ~rotr are used in the

sense of perceiving, mant~ in the sense of conceiving, and

. . . N_
~J..Jnatf in the sense of knowing, which is the result of per-

, ception and conception.

In another passage, yaj~avalkya explains to King Janaka

of Videha the state of self (passive con~ciousness) in deep

sileep, usin~ the root ~ in its primary meaning, t think' :

"Yad vai tan na manute, manvano vai tan na minute, na hi

mantur mater viparilopo vidyate, avinasitvat; na tu tad
dviti"yam asti, tato tnyad vibhaktam yan manvita. u
(BrIO Up_ VI. J. 28)

"Verily, '..;hen there (in the state of deep sleep)

he does not think, he is, verily, thinking, though
he does not thin~, for there is no cessation of the
thinking of a thinker, because of the imperishabili-
ty (of the thinker). 'There is not, however, a second.
nothing else separate from him of which he could
think."
(Radh .Princ .. Up ~ 1 p. 265)

Here the expressJ..ons the 1S thinking' and 'no cessation

p
60

of the thinking' refe~ to the continuing nature of man's pas-

sive consciousness.

Throughout the Upani~ads we find references to the con-

. ,"

cept of aman, which is analogous to the Buddhist cont:ept of

vi~a~a. While the former usually appears as 'self' or 'soul,'

.... literally means 'passive consciousness~' or 'sublimi-

viMana

nal "consciousness.' It is expressed in Pali canonical litera-

ture as pa:risandhi-vin~a~a (continuum-consciousness at the

moment ~f birth or relinking consciousness), bha~anga-vin'n'aIJ.a

(continuum-.consciousness during the life-span of an individu-

. ' ,.,rAJ-
a I) , an d cutJ..-vJ..nnaI;la (continuum-consci~usness at the moment

of death).

According to the Upanisads, atman' is imperishable, 67 eter-

_ t

~al, has the shape of a manikin living in the heart,6S and is

67Cf. Kathonani~ad, 1. 2. 18-19 (hereafter cited as Kath.

Up.); RV. IX. 86. 44; see also Chapter II, verses 17-20 of The
Bhagavadg~ tao "Iii th an introductory essay, Sanskri t text, Eng-
lish translation and notes, by S. Rad..~akrishnan. 2d ed. (Lon-
don: George Allen and Unwin, 1949), pp. 106-107. (Hereafter
- 9i ted as Bh. Gi taL) •
68 cf • "Aii.g\1~?l;ha-matralJ puru~o'ntaratma
sada jananam hrd-

Hrda manvlso
..
aye sannivistah .
manasabhiklpto ya etad vidur amt;'tas
o • -
"f;e bhavanti.1t
r "
(Sve. Up. III. 13)
.tA person of the measure of a thumb is the
inner self, ever dwelling in the heart of men.
He is the lord of the knowledge fra~ed by the
heart and the mind. They I-rho know that, be-
come immortal."
(Radh. Prine. Up.~ p. 728)
/
See also ~r. Up_ 1. 5. 23; Kath. Up_ II~ 1. 12-13; Sve. Up~
V. 8; Hai. 'Up e VI. 38.

b
>

the perceiver, conceiver, and knower. 69 In Budd..~ist thought,

vi~a~a is passive, perishable, evanescent, formless, neither

a perceiver, conceiver, nor a knower, and functions only as a

'passive force of the life-continuum, the major part of mind

which continues throughout life here and hereafter. When the

six senses grow, the individual's active consciousness be-

comes more sensitive and refined, and he functions through

his senses and thought processes. In Pali, the expressions

• d
l.n ' . -J"/_
r1ya-vlnna!)a - t h'
or V1 . "'" -
1-V1nnaoa rl~present th e ac t 1ve
' ·~on-

sciousness of perception and.thinking.

Words that are related to the root man are used several

times in this and other passages of the Chandogyopani~ad. An

instance of- the prioary use of the word occurs when Nirada

says to Sana tkl.L-rnara :

.-
"Yada vai manute, atha vijanati, namatva vijanati, mat-
vaiva vijanati~ rnatis tv eva vijijnasitavyeti: matim,
bhagavah, vijiji'iasa iti. n
• (Ch. Up_ VII. 18. 1)
"Verily, when one thinks, then he understands,
one who does not think does not understand. Only he
who thinks understands. Sut one ~ust desire to under-
stand thinIcinG'. Venerable Sir, I desire to under-
stand thinking."
(Radh. Prine. Up_, p. 484)

Moving on to the AitareyoDani~adf70 we find the use of

manas both l.n its general sense, 'mind,' and in its secondary

sense, tthe mental faculty of perception V (manindriva). Dr.

70Hereafter cited as Ai. Up_

p

Radhakrishnan, -however. pre"fers" to translate manas only in

its general sense:

""Tanmanasa jigh:rkl?at. tan nasaknon manasagrahi'tumJSa.

.
yad hainan manasagrahaisyad dhyatva hai"annam"" a t:r.ap s-
. . '

yat."
(Ai. Up. J.. 3. 8)

"(The person) sought to seize i t by the mind. He

was not able to take hold of it by the mind. "If, in-
deed, he had taken hold of i t .by the mind. even with
the mind (i.e. by thinking of food), one would have
had the satisfaction of food."
. (Radh. Prine. Up., pp. 5l.8:"'19)
lIn the same Upani~ad, manas also is used in the sense or
maninpriya. in a~dition to ratiQ and mani§a. Both forms are

lj derived from man in its primary meaning. t thought.' We also

find .here a classification "of the various mental. "functj.,onsof

active consciousness, intuition, feel.ing, and will.:

"Yad etad hfdayam mana§ c~itat, samjRanam ajffanam vij~an­

am praji1.anam medha dr~~i::r' dhFtir l1latir mani'~a jutiJ:l smf-
ti~ samkalpa~ kratur asu~ kamo va~a iti sarva~y evaitani
oN_ -
praJnanasya nama-dheyanl.· bhavanti. tt
0

(Ai. Up. III. 1. 2)

"That which is ;heart, this mind. that is con-
sciousness. nerce9tion. discrimination, intelli~ence,
wisdom, insight, steadfastness, thought, thoughtful-
ness, impulse, memory, conception. purpose, life, de-
sire, control, a~l these, indeed, are names of intel-
l.igence. u
(Radh. PrinCe Up., p. 523)
It is clear, also, from the HUI!-9akopani~ad, that its auth-

or,considered re~nvamana "equivalent to 'thinking':

"Avidyayam antare vartamanah svayam dhi'ra~ pa1}9itam many-

amanah
•
, ) (
p
. .' ,'~

janghanya.'!lanal}. pariyanti muq.haJ:.1, andhe.naiva.ri.iyamana·

. Yathandhal} ... 71
(Hun. Up. I. 2. 8)
"Abiding· in the midst of ignorance, wise in
their o~'n esteem, thinking themselves to be learned,
foo.15, afflicted:withtroubles,·go about like blind
men l.ed by one who is himself blind." .
. (Radh. Prine. Up., p. 677)
The following verse of the Sveta~vataropani~ad gives the

impression that puru~a (the eternal soul), which dwells in

the heart is to be perceived by citta, and conceived by man-

!!;.:! :

"'Na scundF~·e ti~~hati rupam asya, na cak~usa pa~yati ka~

canainam.
Hfda hFdistham manasa ya enam, evam vidur amrtas te bha-
",anti ... 72 / .
. (Sve. Up. IV. 20)
."His form is not to be seenJ no one sees Him
with the eye. Those who through heart and mind know
him as abiding in the heart become immortal.. u
(Radh. Princ. Up., p. 737)

The meanings of hrda and manasa, however, could be made

more specific by rearranging the translation as follo,~s:

.tHis (purusa1s) form is not to be seen. No one

: "
) sees hil':1 with the physical eye. Those who, through
percel'Jtion and conception, know him as abiding in
the heart. become immortal."
(Wr. 'fr.)

Hanas in the Earlier Suttaoitaka

-' 2
Texts

An examinatio~ of the earl.ier works of the Pali canon

sh9WS that in the Sa;n~anaSadan1VasUtta (the Discourse on the

71See also Kafh. Up. 1. 2. 5; Hai. Up. VII .. 9; HUI). Up.

I. 2. 7. 9-10 •

. ), 72Cf • Kath. Up. VI. 9; ~ve. Up. III. 13; IV. 17.
p
. 64

Exce1lencesof' the Buddha, no. 28) of the~;D1ghanikava,. mana

is repeated time after time in its primary sense:

"Aparaln pana bhante etad anuttariya~, yatha Bhagava

dhammruv d(~seti adesana-vidhasu. Ca tasso ima bhante adesa-
na-vidha. Idha bhante ekacconi~ittena ad1sati -- Evam pi
·te mano, ittham pi te mano, iti ~i te cittan ti.,,7J
(D. III. 28. 6, p. I03)
........

"Moreov.er, lord, this too is unsurpassable, the

wayn:amely'in which the Exal.ted One· teaches the Norm
'concerning the modes of revealing [the mind of anoth-
er]: -- that there are four modes, thus: -- One re- .
vea.1.s by a visible sign, saying Thou art thinking
thus, thou hast so and so in thy mind, thy thought is
thu.s. II
(n. Tr. III, p. 99)
T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids translate the first occur-
rence of ~!!2 1n this passage as 'thinking,' the second as

-mind,' and citta as 'thought.' A better translation, hOWEV-

er, is derived by us~ng the primary meaning of' the roots man

·and cit:

"Moreover, Lord, this too 1S unsurpassable, i.e.

the way in which the Exalted One teaches Norm concern-
ing the modes of revealing. Lord, there are four mod~
of revealing: here, Lord, one ,reveals by a visible
sign, saying: -- thus was your thought, this way your
thbught acted, and thus was your feeling."
(Wr. Tr.)
The primary meaning of mano as 'thought' occurs also in such

expressions as manas~ duccarita~ caritv~ (D. III. 27. 27), or,

'who has led a bad life in thought,' (D. Tr. III, p. 92);
~anasa suca~itam caritva (D. III. 27. 28), 'who has led a

good life· in thought,' (D. Tr. III, p. 92); manasa samvuto (D.

7JSee also A. Ie 3. 60. 5, pp. 170ff.

p

65
III. 27. 30), • who is self~restrained in.thought,· (D. Tr.
III, p. 9J); mano-~oceyyam (D. III. 33.10), 'purityof'
thought,' (D. Tr., p. 21J); and manb-samphassaja vectana (D.
III. 33. 2). 'the feeling that is excited when we think.' (D.
Tr. III. p. 231)~

An excellent translation of amaXl{issarrt (the active aorist

first person singular of ~) in its ;oadical primary meaning

has been rendered by I. B. Horner in her edition of the Upali-

sutta (the Di scourse on U'pali,7 4 no. 56) of the Haj jhimanika--

"Purimen' evaham
J\ •
bhante opammena Bhagavato attamano
abhiraddho. Api caham. imani Bhagavato vicitrani parthapat-
i~hanani sotukamo ev~ham Bhagavantam paccanikatabbam
-JflJ. • II
amann;J.ssam.
(M. I, p. 378)

"I, revered sir, was pleased and satisfied with

the Lord's first illustration. But because I wanted
to hear the Lord's diversified ways of putting ques-
tions, I judged that I must make myself his adversa-
ry."
(M. Tr. II, p. 44)

Turning to the general meaning of ~}2, we find in the

I

Mah~vedallasutta (the Greater Discourse of the Miscellany, no.

4J) of the Hajjhimanikiva:

7 4 Upali was knoh'n as Unali-Gahapa ti (the Householder Upa-

Ii). He lived at N~land~ in Magadha as one of the chief fol-
lowers and supporters ,of ~igha~tha Kataputta (or Vardhamana
Mahavira),
N"
the founder
.
of Jainism and a member of the clan of
Jnatriya Kshatriyas. The discourse relates how Upali, the .
householder, later met the Buddha and became in turn one of
his most devout disciples. For a more detailed account of Up-
~li, s~e Mala1asekhera. op_ cit., 1:411.
p

66

" ••• Tmesam-kho avuso pat1cannam indriyanam nanavisayanam

_ - - • . AlN rJd ' . .'".
nanagocaranam na annamannassa gocarav1sayam paccanubhont-
anam mano patisaraI')am. Mano ca nesam gocaravisayam pacca-
nubhot'lti."
(M. T,p. 295)

" ••• Of these five sense-organs, your reverence,

different in range, different in pasture, not react-
ing to the pasture and range of o~e another. mind is
the repository, and mind reacts to their pasture and
range." .
(M. Tr. I, p. 355)
Herein lies the clue to perhaps the most important concept

in Buddhist philosophy, a clue which 1S found neither in thn

~gveda nor in the earlier Upani;5ads. wbile the Hajjhimanikaya

• I
refers only to the phys1cal organs of'sense, there are, ac-

cording to ,the Dlghanikaya (III. 28. 4), six • fields' of

sense, subjectiv~ and objective: those which relate to the

eye ('sight and visible things'), to the ear ('hearing and

sounds'), to the nose ('smell and odours'), to the tongue

(·taste and sapid things'), and to the body ('touch and tan-

gible things'). The l.ast is the mind and the mental objects i t

encompasses through the heart and. brain, which serve as the

mi-nd f S o'rgans of perception and conception. Of all the senses,

mind is the key which expiains all mysteries, 'the reposito-

ry,' the master, the guide, the overseer. Since the time of

the Buddha, the concept has become universal. One has only to

harken to the voice of Hamlet to accept the wide-spread belief

p Piyananda, Dickweia. "The Concept of Mind in E.ar1y Buddhism." 2. of 3
Washington, D.C.~ 1974.

in the all pervasiveness of the human mind. 75

There are also a great variety of compound words in which

mana is used in its general sense, or as 'active conscious-

ness.' Among these are manonadosa (D. III. 72; M. I. 377; Sa.

IV. 20), or 'evils 2n mind'; manopadosika (D. I. 20), or 'de-

bauched in mind,' and mano~asada (Dhp~ Adikaram. I. 28), or

-tranquility of mind.'

Moving on to the Samvuttanikava, we find that citta, mano,

and vi~a~~ occur side by side and denote three important

parts or aspects of the mind:

" • • • Yru;t ca kho etaIp bhikkhave vuccati cittam i ti pi mano

.
\j

i t i pi vi~fian~ i t i p1. Tam rattiya ca divasassa ca an-

,..J

NN
Ilad eva uppajjat~ annalll nirujjhati. tf
(S. II. 12. 61. 7, p. 95)
" .... But this, brethren, that we call thought, that
we call mind, ·that we call consciousness, that ari-
se~ as one thing, ceases as another, whether by
nig~t or by day."7 6
(s. Tr. II, p. 66)
In this particular instance, Caroline Rhys Davids trans-

·lates citta as 'thought,' mana as 'mind,' and vifinaDa as 'con-

-~ciousness,t whereas a more correct and specific rendering

would entail the use of 'perception of active consciousnes$'

75 In resnonse to his friend, Horatio's query as to where

he sa\.; hi s dec ea sed fa ther, Haml e t. ansh'ered: .. In my rni nd' s
eye, Horatio." See ~a~let, I. 11. 186, in ~illiam Shakeqneare,
The COlT'.Dlete '-!orl<:s or ~:ilLia::1 ShakeSDeaI"""'. The Cambridge edi-
tion text, 2.3 .~d:i.t",,~ b:.T'iilliam Aldis ','ri<>:ht ••. Illustrated
by Rockwell Kent, with a preface hy Christopher Morley. (Phil-
adelphia: TIle Blakiston Company, 1936), P. 737.

76S~ (C. A. F. Rhys Davids and Woodward edo), 2:66.

) ,
p

68
for rriano ,"and 'pa.ssi ve consciousnes:s' for vifi~a!}a. The reason
for this choice lies in the nature of the concepts themselves:
whether taken separately or collectively, each,' like the tide
" .
of a swift-flowing river~ is momentary, transient, and ever-

changing.

The diversity of usage of citta and,mano even in the same

work is exemplified in the following passage, where, contrary

to expe'cta tion, . both ci tta and mana appear as' synonyms in the

general sense of mind and as synonyms·of citta, denoting 'ac-

tive consciousness.- for passive consciousness neither can be

fill.ed with dismay nor overcast with anguish:

.
"Niccam utrasta'll idam cittam.
., Niccam ubbiggam idalllmano."
I (S. I. 2. 2. 7, p. 53)

"Ever my heart is filled with sore dismay,

Ever my mi.nd with anguish' is o'ercast. u
(S. Tr. I, p. 77)

The passage of the Samvuttanikava quoted below, on the

other hand, uses mana (manindriva) 1.n its secondary sense, to

mean the mental sense-faculty. The Buddha addresses Mara:

, (

'J "Tav-eva p@..p-ima mano tava dhamrna tava manosamphassa-

vinna~~yatana~.Yattha ca kho p~pima natthi mano natthi
.~dhamma natthi mano-sa~phassa-vinn~~~yatanap agati tava
tattha papima ti."
(s. I. 4. 2. ll~ p. 116)
"Thine o711YJ 0 evil one, is the eye and its ob-
jects and the field of consciousness of the eye's con-
tact. But wh~re, 0 evil ene, eye is not, nor object,
nor field of consciousness of the eye' s contact, there,
o evil one, ~s no waygate for thee. u
(Sa Tr. I~ p. 145)
Passing on to the ~~guttaranikava, we find that in the ~-
. I

alikasutta of this ....ork, citta and mano are used synonymously

1..-..
 to mean 'feeling' or 'heart,' a representation of the primary

meaning of the former and the secondary meaning of the 1at-

ter. The Buddha says to Kokalika, the chief disciple of Deva-

datta:

"Ma h'ev~ Koka1ika, rna h'ev~ Koka1ika, pasadehi Kokal-

ika Sariputta-Hoggallanesu cittarp, pesa1a Sariputta-Mog-
ga11ana C ti. If 77 I

(A. V. 89. 1. 3, p. 170)

"Say not so, Kokalikan! Say not so, Kokalikan!
Calm your heart towards Sariputta and Hoggall.ana. O:f
dear virtues are Sariputta and Mogga1Hina. n
(A. Tr. V, p. 113)
In another instance, Tudu, the individual Br~~a, uses
I

mano in its primary sense in these words to Kokalika:

"Sabbassapi sahapi attana
ayam eva mahattaro kali
yo sugatesu manal)1 padosaye."
(A.V. 59. 3, p. 171)
"Greater by far th· ill-luck of him
Who, losing all and losing self,
eGainst the Wellfarers fouls his mind."
(A. Tr. V, p. 115)
An excellent example of the use of mana and manasamin
-the general sense of 'active consciousness' occurs in the

following passage of the'~guttaranikava:

"Cha bhikkhave anisaTse sampassa~anena alam eva bhik-

khtma sabbasafu.charesu anodhimkari tva aniccasail?lam upa-
tthapetUT~ Kat~ue cha?
Sabbasankhara ca me anavatthitato khayissanti t sab-
baloke ca me mano nabhiramissati, sabbaloka ca me mane

77 Sariputta was the chief disciple of the Buddha. Haha-

kotthita was another of the foremost of the Buddha's fol-
lowers and in the art of logical analysis was considered to
, be wi thout peer.
>

70
vutthahissati, nibbaI}apoI)aii ca me manas~ bhavissati,
.
samyojana ca me pahan~ gacchant2, pararnena ca samannena
~ ~~

samannagato bhavissami ti."

(A. 111.102. 1-2, p. 44J)
"Monks, if a monk [may] perceive six advantages,
i t is enough to establish, without reserve, the
thought of impermanence anent all phenomena. What
six? .
Then all. phenomena shall appear to me as lacking
i'ixity; my mind shall find no delight. in any world;
my mind shall rise above every world; my thoughts
shall be inclined towards Nibba~a; the fetters in me
shall go towards their ceasing; and I shall follow
the course of highes t =:'ec.1useship."
(A. Tr. III, p. J08)
In the Udana, the expressions kim mart~asi (Ud. III. 2, p._

22),·what do you think?', sekho ti rnai1:namanam (Ud. VII. 2,

p. 74)" 'considering him to be a learner,' use the root man .-

in its primary sense. Examples of the use of mana in its gen-

-eral sense are manase ubbilap3. and manaso vitakke (Ud •.IV. 1,

_ p. 37), 'elations of mind,' and 'thoughts of mind.'

The clause ~ man~eyYa padusita~ of the Itivuttaka (Itiv.

III. 4. 10, p. 86), translated 'who should think to soil,;

• • c/"'../ ~
:represents the pr:1.mary mean1ng of manneY-,d·. Hanoduccar1.. tam
(Itiv. III. 2. 5, p. 54), 'evil practice of mind,' micch~

manam panidhaya (Itive III. 3. 1, p. 59), 'wrongly directing

. d
m1n J t •
mano-moneyva~ ( It1v.
• III. 2. 8, p¢ 56), 'perfection
(or silencing) of mind,' and m~no-socevyafu (Itiv. III. 2. 7,
POl ,.55), 'puri ty or rr:ind, t on the other hand, are examples of

the general meaning of mano as 'active consciousness.'

One of the widest uses of mano in its primary sense,

Itthought,· however, appears in the first two verses of the

~ ...
>
71
Dhamma.pnda, where i t is used eight times. There·is also fre-

quent repetition of its primary meaning in theSuttanipata78

in expressions such as manas~ yeva nucchatha (Sn. lOo4). 'ask

your question in thought; and manasa 1)ucchite pai'{he vacava

vissajessati (Sn. 1005). 'what you ask in thought the Buddha

wil1 answer in word.'

The foregoing study demonstrates that citta and mano may

be used with three distinct typesetf meanings: primary. sec-

ondary. and general.. Copious examples appear in the Vedas.

the Upani~ads. and in the Pali Tipi"j;aka.

Our investigation shows. furthermore, that the prefer-

ences of translators of Pali canonical. texts are man¥ and di-

verse. Some. have used 'mind'-to represent both cittaand~-

!!.2.; others have used 'heart' and 'thought' to mean one or

the other, or both. By offering the t~bles be10w as a demon-

stration of the frequency of the Various choices of a group

of selected translators of the Dhammanada and Suttanip~~,

~he confusion that surrounds the meaning of these words will

\
. \

be somewhat mi tigated. When a choice otl1.E~r than the three

mentioned above occurs, or one that clearly refers to the

emotional and perceptual aspects of mind that relate to

heart, or the conceptual aspects that rel.ate to thought, the

not~tion 'indirectly' 1S appended to that particular choice:

78These citations are taken from the Chalmers edition of

those ot~ Fausb¢l1. and
the Suttaninata. T-wo other edi tions,
Hare:-~ereuseful in compiling Tables 5 and 6$

L
 72
TABLE :3

TRANSLATIONS OF CITTA IN THE DHAHMAPADA 79

c: s Cl$ ~ Cl$ c: cr) I ....Cl$
....0
~
C¢
~
~
~
as
~
.... "0
Cl$
Cl$
C
.c
"0
.r! ~

CIS
(1$
.!z: "0
.-I
::1
$04
las III
>
lIS
0
f-4
..... or! (1$ ~ Z or! Q
12 '0 .c J.t
c: < "0 .!z: • II)
lIS "0 as f)>-
l: :s
QJ
.c .$04 .s::
'0 ~ll::
as
~

,I
. Mind .20 25 15 26 13 26 125
Heart 1 1
Thought 7 2 12 1 13 1 36
;
-
Total 27 27 lt 27 27 27 27 162
..
TABIJE 4
TRANSLATIOXS OF MANO IN THE DHAMHAPADA 80
-=========~~~~~~~~====~~f~~~~~-~·~~.~~~~======r======='

ItC'I:S
"0
as
.c
'0
"0
:s
QJ

- ..
Mind 28 23 1.5 26 18 28 1)8
·Heart 1 1
_.'H eart ( 1nd1rec-1
., !
4 4 2 15

Thought
1y)
3
I 1. 3

6 13 2
1

11 2. 37
Thought (in- 1 1 1
directly) I
Total I 32
1 32 32 32 32
i 32 i 192

79 In the 423 verses of the Dhammanada, citta occurs 27

times in 25 verses: 13-14, 20, 3J-J41' J5(h.rice), 36 (twice),
J7-4op 42-4J, 88-89p 116, 138, 154, 18J, 185, 218, J26-27,
371, J7J~
80Mano appears in the Dhammapada 32 times in 22 versest
1. (four times), 2 (four times), 47-~8, 58, 68, 96, 116, 218,
, 233 (fou~ times), 234, 280, 287, JOO-J01, 348, 361, J78,
390 (twice), J91.

L
 ,.
!

73
TABLE 5
TRANSLATIONS OF CITTA IN THE SUTTANIPATA8I
~
...
0
.40)
Vl
J.4
~
E
,..1
.-4
-Q...
.0
Q>
M
as
.-4
~
as
0
lIS ~
as
11) == ~
pC ::s
fl)
~
.e
U ~ .
IS
~'

Mind 9 26 18 53 .
Heart 17 7 24
Heart (indirectly) 6 4 4 14
Thought
Thought (i.nc~irectly)
. 1
3
,
1 4
4
Total. JJ JJ JJ 99

TABLE 6

TRANSLATIONS OF HAND IN THE SUTTANIPATA 82

I

c:: C .-! IV .-4

0 ~ .-4 M as
~ G,} -c.. cd ~
~ s .c !I: 0
CIS .-4 CI) ~
as ::s
'"c"
C1 .c
0
as
r:.
as
~
I,
i,

Mind 16 30 24 70
-Heart 14 5 6 25
Heart (indirectly)
I J 7 10
Thou~ht , 8 6 4 18
, To:ta1 41 41 41 123

8l In the Sut!aninata, citta appears 33 times: 23, 37.

50, 65, 160-61, 16)A, 1638, 164, 235, 268, 316, 341, 390,
403, 434-35, 483. 500-507, 689, 717, 1028, 1149, twice on
p. 67, five times on p. 157, once on p. 159, and once on p.
18,. The numbers are according to the Chalmers edition.
"'

82Hano appears 41 times in the Suttanio~ta: 77, 154-55,

(
171, 222, 228; 252, 270-71, 3JO, 365, J88, 424, 449, 470,
572,659, 678, 680, 689, 692, 697, 702, 766, 829. 834,873,
942, 967, 985, 1004-1005, 1017, 1024, 1028, 1030, 1039,
.1142-1144, and once onp. 71. The numbers are according to
the Chalmers edition~

L
t", ,' ..
p

74
It would thus appear that" translato";'s of the·· Dhammapada,

and to a l.esser extent of the Suttanipata, failed to develop

a specific concept of mind. The majority not only treated

eitta and mano erroneousl.y as· synonyms in the majority of

I cases that have been tallied on the foregoing tables, but

erred on the side of simplification in interpreting their

meanings. Mind, as we have shown, could be viewed in the

l.ight of a sixth sense. In the l.ife-span of the individual,

i t appears only in a state of active consciousness, acting

through its physical. agents, the heart and the brain, as the

master of the other five ~ensess sight, hearing, smell,

taste, and touch.

The purpose of the present chapter was .to examine an.d

decide the terms, other than vedana and sa~~a, used to ex-

press the aspects of active consciousness, which is the wak-

-
ing mental state of an individualg and also to see in what
ways those terms have been used. The study clearly shows

,
that
\
active consciousness has only two phases, namely, per-
" )
ception and conception. They are introduced by the two terms
citta and mano, as they ryave been used in the ~5veda, earl-

ier Upaniiads, and the earlier works of the Tipitakae The

findings are confirmed by the usage of pratyak~a and anurnana,

as representatives of citta and mano, in the Sanskrit works

nf Indian l.ogic. These philosophers of the Nyaya school,

presumab1y, found the difference between the two concepts of

.'
~erception and conception as the only two aspects of active
s
p
75
consciousness and introduced them using new l~belg'E.ratyak­

~ £or citta and anumana 83 for mano.

A study of these two concepts alone does not give a com-
plete idea of mind. However, i t gives an idea about one im-
, '

portant aspect of mind, i.e. the -active consciousness. A com-

plete analysis of mind, in all its component parts, is too be
,.J
found in the specifically Buddhist teaching known as Panca-

kkhandha, 'The Five Aggregates.' An understanding of the con-

tents of th,e present chapter helps only as a preliminary step

to understa.nd what is precisely intended by the two terms ve-

dana and safiha that are used in the teaching of 'The Five Ag-

gregates,' the subject which 1S discussed 1n the next chap~.

I. '

8JOnly a shade of' difference exists between mano, or con-

ception, and anumana, which is best translated as syllogistic
'inference. B01:h concepts are accepted as pramaI]as, or the
means as well. as the end of vaJ~id know~edge • The foremost
'works on the 'subject are those of Aksanada Gautama (second
century A. D.), the Nvavasutra, Dinn~g~ (fifth cen~ury, A •
. D.), the Pramat:1asamuccava, and. Dharrnaki"rti (seventh century
A. D.), the {>;va..vabindu. 'The greatest of these wasAk~ap-ada,
ttte founder of the i'iyaya School. Dirmaga was the pupil of
X~anga and Vasubandhu, and Dharmakirti, the pupil of Dinnaga.
F()ir a more detail,ed description or the works and· thoughts of
these eminent logicians, see Gotama, called Ak!;iapada, The
Nvgya Sutris of Gota~a. Trans. Satisa Chandra Vidy~bhUsana.
The Sacred Books of ~he Hindus, vol. Be (Allahabad: P~~ini
Office, 1913), p. 2. (Hereafter cited as Ny. Su.); Dinnaga,
Pra.maoa Samuccaya. Ed. and restored into Sanskrit with vrtti,
~~~--------------~-. ~
tik~, and no~es by H. R. Rangaswamy Iyengar. Mysore Universi-
ty Publication. (Hysore: Government Branch Press, 19JO), p.
4; Abayasiiigha, ~~va"'''abindu DlPika. Wi th text, cOr::lmentary,
and Sinhalese parap~~~se. LSanskrit Text in Sinhalese Script]
(Colombo: Laflkabhinava Vi~ruta Press, 1945), p. 10 An excel-
lent general account of the logic of the Buddhists as com-
-pared to that of the Hindus is given in Fedor Theodore Stcher-
batsky, Buddhist Losic. Reprinte (New York: Dover Publica-
tions, 1962), 2t5e

L
,'\

CHAPTER II

THE FlVE,AGGR]!;GATES
RUpA. VEDANA. SA~NA, SANKHARA. VINNANA

The Buddhist teachings on the conc'ept of mind. as a

whole, can be ascertained only by a thorough analysis of the

four PaLi terms, vedana. saftna, sankhara, and viliha~a, as

~ -
they appear in the canonical term, pancakkhandha, or, The
Five Aggregates. The Aggregates supply not only a complete
account of'· all the constituent parts of the mind, but a com-
plete analysis of' the living being as a combination of mind
and body (nama-runa). Inpa~cakkhandha, Ffipa means body, or
..
: Sthe material form, whereas vedana, ~anria" sankhara, and virt-
fi~a imply all possible component parts of the mind.

The disagreement among translators' as. to the meanings of

the words referring to the constituent parts of the mind has

created much confusion. This confusion is compounded by the

various usage of the terms in the canonical texts and by the

frequently am~iguous explanations given in Pa1i commentaries

and treatises. As in the previous chapter, i t wi1.l be neces-

76
 77
sary to provide a correct interpretation of the terms men-

tioned above, in order to determine the concept of mind as

i t was taught originally in Buddhism.

The Five Aegregates and the Five Grasping Aggre~ates

In the Pali Tipitaka. the compound words paJ!lcakkhandha

(Five Aggregates). and pai'1cupadanakkhandha (Five Grasping

Aggregates), ordinarily denote the Five Grasping Aggregates;

these compounds, however.' sometimes carry two different mean-

ings, for example. when pancakkhandha refers to the five ag-

gregates of the Arahant (one who has totally eradicated ail

I
cankers or mental defilements), and pancupadanakkhandha de- ,

notes the five aggregates of any being who is not an Arahartt.

In an ordinary being, the aggregates are said to be of a

grasping nature. He who is of paf\cakkhandha does not exper-

ience reconception;l he who i:s of pancupadanakkhandha, .on

the other hand, inevitably faces this state after death. 2

lpali Eunabbhava. The Pali equivalent for rebirth is' ,

,punaruDPa tti • .-\1 tholi;Sh the l·atter never occurs in the canon-
i9a1 texts, the former appears in several contexts. See
!\athavatthu. Ed. Arnold C. Taylor. Pali Text Society LPubli-
cationsJ, vols. 34, J6. 2 vola. (London: H. Frowde, 1894-
97), 1: 102 t 285 (hereafterci ted as Kvu.); Pa ti sa!Tibhidal1"~­
~. Ed. Arnold C. Taylor. Pali Text Society [publicationsJ,
vols o 56, 61. 2 volse (London: H. Frowde, 1905-1907), 2:110
(hereafter cited as Ps.); A. I. 259; lIe 1; IV. 56-105, 448;
D. II. 15, 90, 91, 12); III. 134; He I. 167, 173; III. 123.
162; s. I. 200; 11.172; III .. 28; IV. 8; V. 206,432; Ud. J3,
46; Itiv. 94; Sn. 162 F 163, 502, 746.
2In this study paXcakkhandh~ will be used only in the
context of £arlcup~danakkhandha rather than in its specific
meaning.
p

78
In the First Sermon, the Dhammacakkapnavattanasutta,3

i.e. The Discourse on Turning the Wheel of Doctrine, of the

Samyuttanikaya, the Buddha explains the First Noble Truth

(1ife's nature, in its ultimate reality) as a bundle of mis-

eries and sufferings, in these words: Samkhittena nancupada-

nakkhandha dukkha,~ or, "in brief the Five Grasping Aggre-

gates are sufferings." Here he used pan'cunadanakkhandha spe-

cifically to mean the Five Aggregates of the ordinary being.

·In the following passages occurring in another discourse of

the same text, both paricakkhandha and nartcunadanakkhandha

are used without distinction in meaning;

"Katamo bhikkhave bharo.

Pa~cupadanakkhandha tissa vacan1ya~. Katame pahca?
Seyyath~c~ rUpupadanakkhandho vedanupadanakkhandho sa~­
nupadanakkhandho saUkharupadanakkhandho virtna~upadana­
kkhandho. Aya~ vuccati bhikkhave bharo •••
Bhara have pa~cakkhandha
bharaharo ca puggalo
bharadan~ dukkhap loke
bharanikkhepanam sukhalll."
·(S. III. xxii'" 22. 4, 8, pp. 25-26)

Woodward translated the passages as fOlloWS:

"Whalt, brethren, is the burden?

It is the mass of the five factors of grasping,
should be the reply .. 'Nhat five? The mass of the bo-
dy factors of grasping, of the feelin~ factorsg the
perception~ activities and consciousness factors of
grasping. This, brethren, is called °the burden'
.... The burden 15 indeed the fivefold mass:
The seizer of the burden, man:

3S .. Vs 420-31.
4L OC. .
C1.t., p ..

L
 79
Taking i t up is sorrow in thiswor1.d:
The laying of i t down is bliss."
(5. Tr. III, p. 25)

A more adequate translation is obtained, however, when the

terminology used in the preceding pages is ~etained:

"O.Bhikkhus, what is the burden?

·To this question, the reply should be, the Five
Grasping Aggregates. What are the five? They are
the Grasping Aggregate called body, the Grasping
Aggregate called perception, the'Grasping Aggregate
called conception, the Grasping Aggregate called'
kamma-formations, and the Grasping Aggregate call.ed
passive consciousness. This, 0 Bhikkhus, is cal.l.ed
the burden •••
The burden is, indeed, the Five Aggregates:
The bearer of the burden is the individual..
In the worl.d,1 the grasping of the burden 1S
suffering,
And the laying down of i t 1S bliss."
(Wr. Tr.)

Variant Tran~lations of the Five Terms

The f01.1owing variants, as shown in Tables 7-11, occur

. in the works of prominent writers and translators who dealt

with the concepts of the Five,Aggregates, name1y, Banerjee,5

'
Carus, 6 N. R. No Ehara, Soma Thera, and Kheminda Thera,7

5Anukul Chandra Banerjee, "Principal Schools' and Sects

of Buddhism: The Sthaviravadins or the Theravadins9" in 2500
Years of Buddhism. Ed. Po'V. Bapat. (New Delhi: Publications
Division, i>linis'try of Inf~rmation and Broadcastings Govern-
ment of India, 1956), p. 102.
6pau1 Carus t Th~ Go~n~l of Buddha~ Comniled fro~ Ancient
Records. (Chicago and London: The Open Court Publishing Com-
pany, 19l5), p. JO.

7'l'he Path 01- Freedom: VimuttirnaS;-p'a, by the Arahant Upa-

tissa. Trans. into Chinese (Gedatsu Do Ron) by Tipitaka
Sanghapala of Funan; trans. from the Chinese by N. R. N. Eh-
ara, Soma Thera, and Kheminda Therac (Colombo: R. Donald D.
Veerasuriya, 1961), p. 237.
p

80

Grimm. 8 GUenther,9 Horner,10 Jayasuriya,11 Jayatilakef 2 Jo-

hansson,13 Malalasekera,14 Monier-Williams,15 NaradaThera\6

8George Grimm, The Doctrine of the Buddha: The Religion

of R~ason and Meditation. Ed a M. Keller-Grimm and Max Hoppe.
[Translation of Die Lehre des ~ddho, die Religion der Vern-
un:ft und der Meditation]. 2d rev. ed. (Berlin: Akademie";'Ver-
1ag GmbH, 1958), p. 76. '
9Herbert Guenther, Ph;~osonhv and Psvcholoe;-v 1n Abhi-
dhamma. (Lucknow: The Pioneer Press, 1957), pp. 47, 151.

~OM. Tr. I~ 79, 186, 231-32, 236, 360.

11W. F. Jayasuriya, The Psvcholoe:v and Philosonh of Bud-,
dhism, Being- an Introduction to the Abhidhamma.
Y. M. B. A. Press~ 1963). p.lJ8.
12K. N. Jayatilake, Early Bu.ddhist Theorv of Knowled~e.
(Londom: George Allen & Unwin, 196J), pp. 220, ,28J, J71; K.
N. Jayatilake, Facets of Buddhist Tn.'ought: Six Essavs. The
Wheel Publications, ~os. 162-164. (Kandy: Buddhist Publica-
tions Society! 1971), p. 83. '
13Rune Earl A. Johansson, Toe Psvcholo~ of Nirvana: A
Comoara ti ve S tudv of "thf' ~a tural Goal of ;:;,uddhi sm and the
Aim oi' !>loctern \ies-cern .?svcholo~v. Anchor Books A 728. (Gar-
den City, Xe .. York: Doubleday & Company, 1970), pp. 65-68.

14Gunapala Piyasena Mala1.asekera, "Some Aspects of Reali-

ty as Taught by Theravada Buddhism," in The Indian Mind, Es-
sentials of Indian PhilosoDhv and Culture. Ed. Charles A.
:H(~ore, .... i'Ch rhe 2.ssisrance or Aldyth V .. z,lorris .. (Honolulu:
Bast-~';est Cent;er Press, University of' Hawaii, 1967), p. 70.
15}1onier Moni{~r-1{i1.liams, Buddhism,
in Itc: Connexion \>lith

tty.
Brahmanism and Hinrtui~m. and in Its Con~ra~t wirh Chrisrinn-
2d ed .. The C;howkhamba Sanskrit Series Studies, ~vol. 45.
Varan3.si: The Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1964), p.
109. (Hereafter cited as Mon.-Wil. Bud.)

16Narada Thera f A ~1anual of Buddhism. Jrd ed. (Colombo:

The Associated Newspapers of Ceylon, 1952)~ pe 99-,
p

81.

:~an~nanda
. .Thera,17 Nyanamoli Thera,IS Nyanatiloka 'Thera,19
Pe Maung'Tin,20 Piy~dassi Thera,21 Ra.dhakrishnan,22 R§.hula

, Thera, 23 c. A.F. Rhys Davids,24 P. de Silva. 2S S. P. de .

,.

17~aI}ananda, Bhikkhu, Conceutand Reality in Early Bud-

dhist Thou~ht: An Essav on 'Panaiica and Pananca-sanria-San-
.kha.· (Kaney: Duddhist Publ.ica-cion Socie-cy, i971),. p. 7.
(Hereafter cited as Conc. Real.)

,·1.8Buddhaghosa, The Path of Purification Visuddhima a.

Trans. from the Pali by Bhikkhu ~anamo1i. Colombo: R. Dem-
age, 1956), p. 489. •
19The "Word of the Buddha: An O"lltlin.e of the Teaching of
the Buddha in the ,,",ords or- the Pal:i. Canon. Compil,ed, trans-
l.ated and explained by Syanatil.oka .. (Kandyr B~ddhist Public-
ation Society, 1959), p. 4: . .•. .' .'
20Buddhaghosa, The Path 'of Puri ty. Being a translation
of Buddhaghosa's Visuddhi:nagga, by Pe Maung Tin. Reprint.
Pali Text Society Translation Series; Nos. 11, 17, 21. (Lon-
dont LUZL'-i.C aGo., 1971), p. 507.
. 21Piyadassi Thera, The Buddha's Ancient Path. (Londonz
. Rider &: Co., 1964), pp.4.5-48; Piyadassi Thera, The Psvchol-
'o$ical Asnec t of Buddhi sm. Fifth Sir Baron Jaya til.aka Hemor-
. ia1 Lecture. tColombo, 1.972), p. 9.
2.2Dhp. (Radhakrishnan), p. 1741 notes to verse 370; Sar-
vapalli Radhakrishnan, tfForeworcl," in 2500 Years of Buddhism,
p. xii.
·:S 23Walpole Rahula, "\ihat the Buddha 'Tau!':"ht. 1{ith a fore-
word by Paul Demievil.le and a coll.ec-cio:1 o:f illustra ti ve
texts translated from the original Pali. 2d and enl. ed.
(Bedfordt The Gordon Fraser Gallery Limited, 1967), p. 65 •
. 24Caroline Au~sta Foley Rhys Davids, Buddhist Psychol-
0 .... : .~n Ini"1uir""", i:1to t'!1e )3.nalvsis and Theo!:",," of" :·~i71d i~ ?:lli
Literature. Q~est Series. 2d ed. (London: Luzac & Co., 1924),
pp. 40-41 (hereafter cited as Bud. Psy.)

. 25padmasiri de Silva, Buddhi st and Freudian Psvchology.

(COlombo: Lake House Inves~ments, 19(3), p. ,5 e
p

82
Silva,26 Stcherbatsky,27 Suzuki,28 Takakusu,29 E. J. Tho-

mas,3 0 Vajira~aI}a Thera,Jl., Warren,J2 and Woodward.JJ The

references given in Table 7 are the same as for Tables 8-11.

26S • P. de Silva, A Scientific ~aticnalization of Bud-

dhism. (Colombo: Metro Printers, 1969), pp. 1, 16.

27Fedor Theodore Stcherbatsky, The Central Conception of

Buddhi SID and the Meaning- of the h'ord Dharnma. Reprint. ( Del-
hi: Hotilal Banarsidass, 1970), p. 6.
28The Lankav~tara Stitr"!._ A Mahayana text translated for
the first time from the' original Sanskri t by Daisetz Tei ta:r'o
Suzuki. Jd impr. (London: Routledge &: Kegan Paul., 1959), p.
107.
29Junjiro Takakusu, The Essentials of Buddhist Philoso-
£hy. Ed. Win~-Tsit Chan arid Charles A. Moore. Jd ed. (Hono-
1ulu: Office Appliance Co., 1956), p. 72.
JOEdward Joseph Thomas, The Life of the Buddha. (New
York: Barnes &: Noble, 19 6 2), p~, 195.

J1paravahera Vajira~an<i Mahci thera, Buddhi st Medi ta tion

in Theorv a!1d Practice: A'General Exnosition Accordin2: to
.t"h'e Pali Canon or "the Theravada School. (Colombo: H. D. Gun-
a~ena ~ Co., 1962), pp. 348, J 5 2 . · .
J2Henry Clarke Warren, comp.J Buddhism in Translations.
Passages selected from the Buddhist Sacred Texts and trans-
l.ated from the original Pali into English. 9th impr.Harvard
'Oriental Series, vol. J. (C~mbridge, Mass.! Harvard Unive~­
\~ity Press, 1947), pp. 155-56, 487, 491.

JJS. Tr. II. 166. 168; 1110 14, 85-86, 87, 89.
p

,8)

TABLE 7

TRANSLATIONS OF RUPA
-
,'.
e
>.
....
~

P"4
Q)
0.'
I
>. Sot cO as
>.
~
~ 0 ;:3 J:
Translators 0
fH
'r4'
P"4
asQJ
ft1
.-4
....
~

P"4
0-
P"4
f)

P"4
. ,
>.
.... 0
H .....J.!tU ....asJ.! .cO...Sot .Has... ~
QJ
. >. .!"'f 0. E QJ QJ QJ QJ ~
't:$ '0 H H ~ ~ 1-l ~ 1-l
0 0 0 0 d as cO cO
.c .0 0 c... ! E E E E
d
S

Banerjee x
Cat;us x
Ehara, Soma. & Kheminda x
Grimm x
Guenther x
Horner x
Jayasuriya x
t
Jayatilake x
Johansson x
Malalasekera x
Mo'ni er- Wi 11 iams x
Narada Thera x
,..,.- - . -
NaI.1ananda Thera x
Nya:t;lamoli Thera x
Nya?atiloka Thera x
Pe Haung Tin x
P~iyadassi Thera x
Radnakrishnan x
Rahula Thera x
Rhys Davids, c. A. F. x
Silva, Padmasiri de II x
Silva, S. P. de x
Stcherbatsky
Suzuki
I x
x

Takakusu x
Thomas, E. J. x
Vajiranava Thera
-
x
~arren x
~oodward x
 84
TABLE 8

TRANSLATIONS OF VEDANA

s:: ., 11
., C
..,
t: s::C .C
c·
0
..,as
ot"4
bO
C·
tiD
s:: 0.
opt opt
..,
....t
cu 'cxs
....G
....t
....cu
-ri'
(,) III
s::
11
s::
cu
~
cu '"fr
I (,)
.,
I
4U (II (II (II
~ fH 0. Sol 11

Banerjee x
Carus x
Ehara, Soma & Kheminda ~:

Grimm x
Guenther ~:

Horner x
Jayasuriya x
Jayatilake x
Johansson x
Mal~1.aseker~ x x
M6ni~f-Williams
......
x
"Narada
,.., Thera x
Nanananda Thera x
.
"Nyinamol
,.; -
i Thera"
Nya~atiloka Thera
x
x
Pe Maung Tin , x -
piyadassi Thera x
Radhakrishnan x
~ahula Thera
I
I x
-
Rhys Davids, c. A. F. x
Silva, Padmasiri de x
Silva~ s. P. de x
Stcherbatsky x
Suzuki x
Takakusu !
x
Thomas, E. J. x
Vajiran~na Thera x x
•
Warren x
Woodward x r
 TABLE 9
roJ-.I_
TRANSLATIONS
- .
OF SANNA

.0)
~ C
'.
0 0
oro( ,ro(
g) ~
a') P-
I lI2 II) IV
C C· C III H 0
0 0 0 ~ C 0.. H
...-I . Il.I 'c 'ro( 'ri 0 0 5 11)'
~
0.
~
0.
0 III
t:.o
~ ~
c..
'ri 0" '" c. ~
Trans1ators IV (Il III '"tiS
~ C
C
0
C.
IV IV
~
tiS
~
tiS II) IV
..s:::
CO
0
C
0
u
C
0
tiS
Q)
~
~
IV Q) ~.
.,
'" '" H
0 t)
H C
U) UJ
C
lI)
t:
III
C
::3
0
'0 "0 '0 '0 IV IV IV Q) IV IV ..s:::
o. .i-i c..
0
'" '" C C 0- lI) I1J g) III ~

Banerjee x
Carus :c
Ehara, Soma & x
Kheminda .. ";'

Grimm x
I
Guenther x
Horner x
Jayasuriya x
. Jayati1ake x x x x
Johansson x
Malalasekera x x
Monier-Wi.lliams x
'..War':da Th era
~ananda Thera
1fya~amOli Thera
J
I x

x
x

'~y~atiloka Ther x ,

Pe Maung Tin x
. Piyadassi Tnera
• I
x x: x x x
Radhakri shnan x
Rru,u.la Thera x -
Rhys Davids, x
c. A. F. ..
Silva, Padrnasiri x
de I
Silva, s. P. de x x x x x
Stcherbatsky x
Su%.uki x
Takakusu x x
'.thomas, E. J. x
VajiranaI)a Thera .X
. Warren x
WOodward x
-
 p
86

TABLE 10

TRA~SLATIONS
. -
OF SA!-.TKHARA
.

Translators

Banerjee IX I

Carus :x
Ehara, Soma & Kheminda x
Grimm I
x
Guenther
Horner X
Jayasuriya .x
Jayatilake x x x
Johansson x x
Malalasekera x pc
Honier-Williams x
. Narada Thera x
'"IY •
Nanananda Thera
,Nyanamo'li Thera I·x. I x
! •
i
N •

!
Nyagatiloka Thera
Pe Maung Tin
Piyada·~si Thera
I~ x
I
! x

'x I
Radhakrashnan X
I
Rahula Thera
Rbys Davids, C. A. F. xx Ixl!
II Ix I
Silva, Pa~T.asiri de x IX
Silva, s. p~ de x x x
I
Stcherbatsky ! X
Suzuki XI
I
I
I
I
Ta.kakusu x I
I
X
Thomas, E. J. x
Vajiranana Thera X
Warren . x I
'WOod,... ard I tv xx xl , I i

; · · · .· ·
L"i
 87
TABLE 11
.-y,.J_
TruL~SLATIONS OF VINNANA
- , i i

~ I I
c.,. ~ en .-4
0 Cll en ;j ~

<D <D
>
e
C!3 III
If.!
Ii')
t'l
~ iii
~ ClltM
0 ~ t)
t) en Ol
0 0
ro
...-I
ro
I
Ill)
C
0
.-I
~
>-
...-I
;j
t)
'!lO
c
::l ~
I~
H Q) Q) ~ • .-4
Translators
"" ~
~ III Ol
c
til C
c
0
C
(f.l
"d 0
Il)-njt)
0
~
::l
Ill)
roU)
~
ro "'0
e
as
.-to 0
::3 If.!
<D
0
-..-I
-.-4
~
;:l
0
~t)~
ro 11J
t)
Il) ltD -.-I
cQ) ~ ~
ro
...c
"I
! . ;S"r-! .... e -IJ P- -n .-t C jm ...-I 1...-1 Ul Ol
e e (J m -.-I Q) (J ::l 0 [H ...-I i...-f c.C
.... H
::3 CI1 III H C u (f.l
,~
E uC UJ ~ ~ -IJ 'H ~ >'·1" b 1m ~
cl)
()C e d CD s:: C H 0 '0
0.>- 0 ~ 0 0 0 o elm ~.ee ... l~ ..c c
d"d (J d (J I (J u ~ en it..: C on > I-I"'! :0.. I~ ::l

Banerjee
Carus
x
! x
Ehara, Soma & Kheminda x
Grimm x
Guenther x
Horner x
Jayasuriya x
Jayatilake x x x
Johansson x
Malalasekera x x
l-loni er Williams x
~rada Thera x
,
I
I.
NananandaThera x
NfaIjamol i Thera x
.
Nyanatiloka Thera
Pe Haung Tin
x
x
Piya:dassi Thera x
Radhakrishnan xl
Rahula Thera x
Rhys pavids, c. A. F. IX x
S. 0\
1.1 val Padmasiri de x
Silvp., s. P. de x
Stcherbatsky x x
Suzuki x
Takakusu .,
x
Thomas, '"'. j .
.l...,," • x
,

VajiranalJ.a Thera
Warren
x
x
I
Woodward ,x I
x ; I
 p
88
In order to ascertain the correct meanings o·f' rupa, ved-
h

,.,fJ -
ana, sanna, sa1lkhara, andv1nna~a,
. ..,~.-
the definitions that ap-

pear in the preceding tables and those that are listed in

the dictionary of the Pali Text Society must be compared with

each concept and its usage in the canonical texts.

I. Rupa
T. W. Rhys Davids, the compiler of the dictionary of the
Pali Text Society, lists six meanings for rUpa: form, figurE!,

appearance, principle of form, matter, and material quali-

ty.3 4 all of which commonly refer to visual and tangible ob-·
I
jects formed of material elements. His choice of synonyms

thus compares favorably with those listed in Table 7. Al-

though their choice of words may differ, all scholars agree
that rUpa should be defined in purely physical terms. In its

litera1 sense, therefore, rGpa refers ~o the physical body;

to define the concept in its general sense, or as any visual

or tangible object, however, is to go beyond the limits of

, the Buddha's teachings. In the Five Aggregates, the Four No-

ble Truths, and Dependent Origination, his philosophy is lim-

ited strictly to the life.riC the being as a whole, not to the

objects external to it.

Rupa is derived from the root rup, 'to break.·.J5 In the

Sam>yltta!,.:.ikaya, the Buddha gives emphasis to its radical

~.

,
f
· t .,
D 1C S.Ve

35 wbit. Roots, p. 143,

If rupa.
- ft

SeVe tt ruE • '"

r
Ii
II
89
meaning:

"•••• Ruppat'iti kho bhikkhave tasma rUpan ti V1iccati."

(S. III. xxii. 79, 7, p. 86)

"It (body), indeed, breaks,.O Bhikkh~sJ there-

f'ore i t is cal.led rupa."
(Yr. Tr.)
A1·so inherent in' the Buddha· s teaching is the theory that any

physical objects or rUpa, whether animate or inanimate, is'

continually in a process of momentary change (khagabhangura),

a1though in appearance, the object may be a lump or a mass of

matter (so:tid, liquid, or gas), of undefined shape. This

mass, or TUpa, in turn, 1S composed of four great elements,3 6
catummahabhutiko,37 and 1S born of parental matter {matapet-

tikasarnbhavo).J8

In the Sarn~ttanikava, emphasis is given to this point in

the words tha t MaJlakaccana addressed to the householder. Hal-

iddi~ani, in which the sage defined rlina as the material seat

or home of the mind {passive consciousness):

'~Rupadha tu
kho gahapa ti vinna!1assa oko; rupadha tura-
gavini baddha~lca pana vinnaD-arn okasar"iti yucca ti. "
(S. III. xxii. J. 4-7, p. 9)
"The material body, householder, is the home
(ako) of vinnana or passive consciousness. So vinna-
---------------------------
36pathav~dhatu (earth element), Apodhatu (water-element),
Tejodhatutheat-element), and Vayod1"atu {air-elernent)~ A.
II. ,164-65e
~
J7M. I. 515; s. III. 101; .D. II. 228.
J8D. I. 34.
 90
.. . . :

~t;all''Wh~chis tied by greed to the ma:terial being, is

called the dweller or runner of the house (okasari)."
(Wr. Tr.)

Rtipa.thus first appears at the time of conception as an em-

bryo' in the maternal 'Womb, assumes the form of.a growl.ng ov-

um, or egg' (gabbha)'? for the first two months of life, and

bef'ore birth takes place, takes ttle shape of' a foetus, or

zygote. Once the infant emerges from its mother's womb, its

body is ready to serve as the depository of the physical,

emotional and mental faculties.

The concept of rupa, however, holds little meaning un-

1ess i t is viewed. in context with the Buddhist cycle of life.

To cl~im that the union of the male ~nd tne female is the

sole factor that determiries conception and the cycl~

',,="",,,.
that

f'ollows is to misunderstand the meaning of the Five Aggre~

gates. The Buddha observed life as a c~ntinuing process.

while the individual, at the same time, experiences constant

change. He explained this concept in terms of the changesr

,good and evil, positive and negative, that affect an indivi-

dual during the life cycle, with the ovu~ beginning growth

only when vit{i'tina, the passive consciousness of another being

39 n •
I. 54. 229; Dhn. 126, 235; M. I. 265, 518; S. III.
212, Sn. 278; Ja. I. 50~ 134, 290, 293; II. 2; IV. 482. See
also The Nettinakara!)a.' With extracts from Dharnmanala's Com-
mentary. Ed. ~~~und HardYe Reprint. Pali Text Soc~ety [Publi-
catiopsJ~ (London: Luzac & Co., 1961)~ pp. 34, 129. (Hereaf-
ter cited as Nett.); Thera-Ther2-Gatha. Ed. Hermann Oldenberg
& Richard Pischel. 2d ed. with Appendixes by K __ R. Norman and
Ludwig Alsdorf. Pali Text Society [PublicationsJ. (London,
Luza~ & Co •• 1966), I. 17. (Hereafter cited as Ther. G.)
f
91
who has died at exactly·the same moment, is· absorbed l.nto

that ovum. Whether on earth or on any other planet, the pro-

cess, or gabbha~avakkanti.40 never varies. If' virfi'ia,9a is un-

,.

available to the fertilized ovum, the ovum dies.

The teachings of the Buddha's doctrine of Dependent Ori-

.gination shed further light on'the process. The combination.
of vif{~a~a (passive· consciousness) and rupa (the fertilize.d

ovum) 1,.S known asnamarupa. The vin~aI)a which is· ready to

enter the ovum 1scalled gandhabbha 41 (Skt.gantavya, or or;e

who is ready to go). It'is·also called sambhavesi 42 (one who
I

seeks conception). The factor which governs the choice of an

. appropria te ovum for the passive consciousness released from

a. dead being l.S the 1atter's own sankhara, or karnma, i.e.

40D• III. 10j, 231. For references to gabbhe okkante,

see Mahi Niddesa. Ed. Louis de la Vall'e Poussin and Edward
Joseph Thomas. 2 vols. Pali Text Society [publications].
(London: Luzac & Co •• 1916-1917), II, 304. (Hereafter cited
as ~.) .

. 41M. I. 265-66. In Pali there are two forms of gandhabba

with different meanin;:;s and 'different derivations. Gandhabba
{in the sense of passive consciousness separated from the
body of an individual at death and. ready to grasp a newly
fertilized ovum) is the irregular form derived from the Skt.
gantavva. The regular form is ~antabba. This double form of
deriva~ion may be analagous to the similar double form of
the Pali pho~thabba and phusitabba from the Skt. spras~avya
(suitable to touch). The Pali form ~andhabba, 'derived from
Skt. gandharva means in the ~gveda 'divine physician' and in
Sanskrit epic poetry~ 'celestial musician.'

42Khp., p. 5; M. I. 48; S. II. 11; Sn. 147.

L,
p
92

the. consciou;.purposive mental action o£ the active con-

scio~sness, whic~ is capable of producing results. Sankharas
are accumulated during the long process of rebirths and are

stored wi thin the,' individual's passive consciousness contin-

uum.
The Buddhist., canon, finally, also ,uses loka, or,world,

to m~an body. The same materia1 elements which form the hu-
man body also form the material objects and the material mas-
ses o£ the universel meteorite~, comets, satellites, planets,

stars, and nebulae. As the Buddha put it, "In this one-fath-
omed body I proclaim the whole world or universe ... 4 )

II. Vedana . i

Vedana is the' first-mental factor that consti tut,es mind

and the next step in the growth of an individual who has ac-
quired a physical shape. While the PaliText Society lists

oruy 'feeling' and ·sensation' in its dictionary as' English

synonyms for the concept, a glance at Tab1e 8 will show that
. the
. . trans1ators cit~d .mention 'feeling~'
.
'perception,' 're-

ception,' and ·sensation.' Only in its restricted meaning can

'reception' be described as sensory reception, but there is
'universal agreement'here that y~dana refers to direct sensory

experiences. In the first chapter it has been demonstrated

that citta, in its primary sense, means 'perception,' func-

tioning as the first factor in active consciousness. Hence

43A. II. 48, 50f So I. 62.

L
p

93
the relationship between vedana and citta becomes signi£i~

cant, for as expressed in the Five Aggregates and Dependent

Originationf ve'iana also carries the meaning of perception.
Vedana is derived from the root vid, 'to know.' Ordinar-

i1y i t means 'pain, feeling, sensation, particularly painful

.sensation, i.e. torture, agony.' In the Five Aggregates and
Dependent Origination i t is explained as Vedeti iti vedana.

Vedana means 'to know through sense experience.' As previous-

ly noted, vedana implies the meaning of citta, i.e. 'percep-

tion as the experience of the sense~.'
. .All feelings, emotions
and sensations are included in the concept of perception. The

meanings pain and torture, as implications of vedana, are

secondary_ In a philosophical sense, .:yedana has retained the

same meaning as citta. Taking into account both the original

sense of the root vid and the philosophical definition, we
can assume that ~dana is the sense exper1ence of active con-

sciousness, or the perceptual aspect of active consciousness.

Vedana frequently appears as a factor 6f the Five Aggre-
gates throughout the Buddhist canonical works. It is so used

in 29 discourses in the Vedanasa;'vutta (S. IV. 204-238), in

102 discourses of the Khandhasarnvutta (5. III. 1-188), and as
a f~ctor 6f the Dependent Origination, in 93 discourses 6f
the "\Tl.·
_~ ~-
'-' ...,. n~
•........ ~a{,..,·
_ '" .,, ..,,.'1
' _ ......t. ta
_ or
_ dol ~r"
the ,_S-m" .... tan1.·l-"'""'"a
v c_.., c _ ~ (s • II" 1-139).

In the Sam~~ttani~ava, 'the Buddha defines vedana as:

p

94
"[VediyatI tiJ44 kho bhikkhave tasma_vedana ti vuc-
cati. KiKca vediyati. Sukham pivediyati dukkharn pi ved-
iyati adukkha~~kham pi vediyati. Vediyat1ti kho bhik-
khave tasma vedana ti vuccati.tI
(S. III. xxii. 79.' 6, . pp. 86-87)
"It is exPeriences by the senses-, brethren,
therefore it.is called vedana. What experienced?
Pleasure is ~xperienced, pain also is experienced,
feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure is also
experienced. It is expe-rienced by the senses, l;lreth-
ren, therefore i t is called vedana.··
(Wr. Tr.)
'!hus vedana is a part of' the mind, and_like-citta, is rela-

ted to the senses. I t does not refer to the intellect, as

does manc, so in nature i t is perceptual rather ,than concep-

tual. A passage from the Great Discourse on Causation of the

Dighanikava illus~rates this points

" ••• Vedana va hi Ananda n~bhavissa sapbena sabb~

[sabbatha]45 sabbat? kassaci kimhici, seyyath'idatp cakkhu-
samphassaja. vedana, sotasamphassaja vedana ghana~samph­
assaja vedana jivha-samph~ssaja vedana kaya-samphassaja
vedana mano-samphassaja vedana, sabbaso vedanaya asati
vedananirodha
.
api nu kho tanha
No h' et~ bhante.
, .
pahhayethftti1
-
.

Tasmat ih ' iL~anda est eva het~eta~ nidana~ esa s~m­

udayo esa paccayo ta~hayaf yadidazp vedana."
(D. II. xv. 6, p. 58)

44 The PTS edition of the texts gives the form ved1vantiti

which was pointed out as an error in the Society's-transla-
tion of the text (S. Tr. III. 73, note 2). Vediyatiti, howev-
er, is given in tile repeated sentence at th-e- end 01' the same
paragraph. This form is also given in the Ceylon edition of
the Safu~lttanikavao_Ed. Arnaraseeha Thera. Pt. II. [Pali Text
in S~nhalese Script}_ (Colombo: H. M. B. Vijayatunga, Vijjir-
atanakara Press, 1901), p. 400 •
. 45Sabbattha is changed to Sabbatha as the latter form oc-
curs in other paragraphs of the same sutta and in the Ceylon
edition.

L
p

95
..... Ananda, if there were no sensory perception,
o~'any form, of any kind, of anyone, in anything,
namely, perception born of visual contact, perception
born of auditory contact, perception born of olfac-
tory contact, perception born of gustatory contact,
perce:?tion born of tactile contact, perception born
or mental contact, in such a situation where there
would be no perception whatsoever of any form, would
the appearance of taryha (craving) be possible?
It would not, Lord.
Therefore, Ananda, this is the reason.e ThiS1S
the basis, this is the genesis, this is the cause of
craving, namely, 'sensory perception.'"
(lir. Tr.)

The above passage states clearly that vedana. pertains to

personal s(~nse experience, and arises from the six sense im-

pressions (phassa or sarnphassa) which depend upon material

objects and the eye, sounds and the ear, odors and the nose,

taste and the tongue, touch and the botly, and abstract ideas

and the mind. As a sense organ, the mind functiong both sen-

sorily or emGtionally, and intellectually, or by means of im-

agination. AIl six sense organs are capable of' producing per-

ceptive experience, or primary and direct knowledge, but only

the sixth sense, i.e. mind, can experience both perception

and conception. Mental perception at the highest intellectual

level is but an extension of perception. In that state such

me~tal perception is called insight or realization~ It thus

follows that in the process of attaining powers of percep-

tion, only a part of a being's active consciousness is set 1n

motion, namely, personal sense experience. In the process of

conception, the sixth sense reaches beyond the senses to the

intellectual side of man. Thus the primary meaning of citta

and vedan~ is perception, and that of mano and 2a~nat to be

discussed below, is conception. Only these definitions convey

their real philosophical and psychological significance in

early Buddhist writings.

III. SaT1na

The Buddhist concept of sa~~a pertains to the second men-

ta1 factor that constitutes mind. It is the third factor in

the Five Aggregates and their role in the life of the indi-
vidual. In the mental stage of saffna the individual is ready

to form conceptions out of perceptions. T. W. Rhys Davids

has divided his list of English equiva~ents for saff5;:£ into

five groups (1) sense, consciousness, perception (2) discern-

ment, recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness (3)

conception, idea, notio~ (4)" sign, gesture, token, mark,

monument, and (5) sense impression, association by simil:.ar-

ity. But 3inc~ no distinction is made between the primary

and secondary meanings of sanna, that enumeration is of lit-

tIe value.

The meanings g~ven by the translator:s listed on Table 9,

fourteen al together, are divided into h.o groups 'ihich are

contradictory; one group pertains to perception (perception.

perceptions, sensationt sensations, sense-impression, sense

perception), the other to conception (conception, concepts,

idea, ideas, ideation. notings, notion, thought). The table

demonstrates that only two scholars have realized the dif-

ference between vedana and sanna. In 1915, Paul Carus, the

German scholar of' Theravada Buddhism, translated vedana as
 97-
""" ".:,
sensation and' safina as thought {c~. note 6). thus making a
clear distinction between the two concepts. Takakusu, the

Japanese scholar of Hahayana Buddhism, added even greater

clarity to their meaning in 1924 by attaching 'perception'
to vedanaand 'conc,eption- to sanria. (cf. 'note 29)

salUla, then, is the intellectual aspect of' active con-

sciousness. Its litera1 meaning is·conception.' A concept,
i.e. thought, starts from vedana, or active perceptual con-

sciousness and grows through contact with the imaginary and

intellectual processes. Through deep meditation, thoughts can

I
u1timately result in an active mental perception, which is

called realization. wnile vedana is direct knowledge, related I '

to the senses, saf'{na. is indirect knowledge, rel.ated to the

intellect. Together they represent the two main functions of
'active consciousness.
In the Khajjanisutta, or The Discourse onDevourers,of
the Samvuttanikava, sanna 1S introduced as follows:

ttKirica bhikkhave sarli'faIJ1 v~detha.

Safijanat3:ti kho bhikkhave tasma safiha ti vuccati.
Ki~ca sa~janati. ~rrl.~m pi sa~janati pTtakam pi sanjanati
lohitakam pi safijanati' odatam pi s~janati. Safijanat1ti
kho bhikkhave tasma sailna ti vuccati."
(S.,III. xxii.' 79. 7, p. 87)
"And why, brethren, do ye say 'perception'?
One perceives, brethren. That is why the word
'perceptionS is userl. Perceives wha~? Perceives blue-
green, perceives yellow, or red, or white. One Der-
ceives, brethren. That is why the word 'perception'
is used."
(s. ',T:r •. III;" 15- 73)

,
In this i'nstance, Woodward, 1n translating saf{f'ia as 'percep-

L
p
98
tion' and sa~,ianati as 'perceives,' has confused sa?ina with

vedana. More appropriate renderings in this particular con-

text 'Would be 'recognition' and 'recognizes' respectively.

Whi1e 'recognize' is the proper translation for both ,Finati

and s ar{j ana ti, the first is used only in a primary sense; the

second denotes secondary usage. In .order to recognize an ob-

ject indirectly, furthermore, thinking, memory and belief are

brought into play a10ng with perception. Only then can the

identification of the object ce cC!mplete.

The fo.llowing translation, on the other hand, takes into

account the limits that the Buddha placed upon the concept of

sa~a as the end product of vedana, or perception:

"And why~ brethren, do you'say 'recognition'?

Sgfi~a recognizes, brethren. That is why the ~ord
'reco·~ition2 is used. Recognizes what? Recognizes
blue {or green), recognizes yellow, or red, or white.
One recognizes, brethren. That is why the word 're-
cognition is used.,"
(Wr. Ti:-.)

IV. Sankhara

To arrive at the correct meaning of sankhara and its re-

1ationship to E~ni;a and vedana is to understand the philoso-

phy of the Buddha in all its complexities and ramifications.

Beginning \'<'i th the maze of defini tions listed in the Pali

Text Society dictionary (1) aggregates of the conditions or

essential properties for a given process or result (2) one of

the five khandhas9 or constitutional elements of physical

1ife (3) life (physical or mental)~ and (4) synergies, we

pass on to those of the translators cited in Table 10, where

 99
aJ.l twenty-one definiti~ns are equally abstruse •. The conf'u;..

sion, no doubt, is due to the fact that a single or compound

word cannot express the exact meaning of the concept.

Sankhara is derived from the root sam -r kar (eto do').

It is a purely Buddhist term as used in the Five Aggregates

and the Dependent Origination, and in later Buddhist Sanskrit

l.iterature. 46 It appears· most frequently, however, in the

works of the Tipitaka, namely, the Vinayapitaka, i.e. Collec-

tion of Discipline, the Suttapitaka, i.e. Collection ot Dis-

courses and Other Utterances, and the Abhidhammapitaka, i.e.

Collection of MetaphYsics.
The Tipiijaka calls Buddhas and Arahants those who have

eradicated sa~~haras. In·hisfirst paean of joy (udana) after

his Enlightenment, the Buddha expressed his newly achieved

pure mental state in this manner:
I·

'"Visat1kharagatam cittam taI}hanam khayam ajjhaga.·'

(Dhp. 154. 9, p. 110)
"My mind attained the state which is devoid of
sankharas, and reached cessation of all. selfish at-
tachments."
(Wr. Tr.)
. -
Sankhara thus implies the co~~otation of defilement or spoil-
age, the corrupt mental state to which Buddhas and Arahants

are no longer subject. The attainment of nibbarya is the total

freedom from sankh2,ra. Thoughts which are defiled or colored

by ta~a (i.e. attachment to self), with its concomitants,

46 pTS • Dict. ,POI 123.

p Piyananda, Dickwela, "The Concept of Mind in Early Buddhism_"
Washington, D.C., 1974.

100

lust, hatred, delusion, and pride, are often referred to as

saftkhara, kamma, kil.esa, kusalakusala, papahca, and cetana.

Since defilement i~ understood as a mental process, san-

kharas belong to a group of fifty-two mental states called

cetasikas,whose literal meaning is 'those that pertain to

mind.' They are listed in the 'Work on Buddhist metaphysics

called the Abhidharr~atthasangaha.47 They begin and end with

c1tta, and have the same object of dependence. All cetasikas,

however, are not sa-n..'tcharas; according ,to the Abhidharnmattha-

sa~gaha, only fourteen akusala (demeri~oriousl cetasikas 48

and nineteen kusala {meritorious} cetasikas 49 fall into the

sankhar~ category. These cetasikas are known as kamma, while

47Anuruddha, Ab;':idharr:matthasan~aha. Ed. Ariyaratne Reru-

kana. [Pali Te. xt in Si~halese Script I. (Colombo.: P. K. W.Si-
riwarcLl-tane, Granthadarsa Press, 194zJ. (Hereafter ci ted as
Abs. )

48The fourteen akusala cetasikas are: dullness (moha): im-

pudence (ahirika); recklessness of consequences (anottaDDa);
distraction {ucdhacca); greed (lobha); error [of viewJ ~dit­
fhi); conceit t~anaJ; hate (dosa); envy (issa); selfishness
, macchariva); worry (kuk!~ucca); sloth (th'l1"!a); torpor (mid-
DYO: lon - t Y {,.;.-':;
d 'h'" \ . P'_:-P~~X~
~J'
'c-'; r~h; \ '
\,,-,-~-,--,.-,--,}.
Cpd . , pp~
--0--9':'
.. ) u . --

~9The nineteenK1JSala cetasikas are: faith (saddha); mind-

fuln-ess (sa ti ); pruG.2nce (hi';:-i); oi scre ti on (0 tt0.0n3.); di sin-
terestedness (alohha); balance ofJmind (1atramajJhattat~);
composure or r;1en-i:al properties (kayaDa..,,~~ddhi J; composure of
mind (cittBnassadrth;); buoyancy of mental properties (~~yala­
hutli); buoyancy or ~ind (cittalahut~)J pliancy of mental pro-
perties (ka~;,uduta). pliancy of mind Ccittamuduta); fitness
o f H 0 ::: k 0 : ;:-: ":'1 1: ~ 1 r: ::-' :) D e r tie s ( ~..::- a va:': <1 ~;-: :-: a '?i f, ct t:i i; fit n e S s 0 f W 0 r k
in mind (cittakamm~~~~ta); pr~ficiency of me~tal prooerties
~kaya p;:1 :inf'iha ta): prr::J!-~C iency of mind (c i t tapap:unna ta); rec ti-
tude or r::ental properties (ka:v-u,i juka ta); rec titude of mind
(cittu,i,iukata). Ibic., pp. 90-97. I;nen these properties occur
in the ~inds of Buddhas and Arahants they are not sankharas,
but kiriv3..s.
 101

n.on-sankharas, such as vedana, safH'ia,and vi~alj.a are called

kiriya (mere action).5 0 Sankhara, then, may be defined as a

b~dy ofmenta1 kamma formations, i.e. thoughts mixed with

ta~a. Sartkharas, when formed of thoughts, are stored in the

I

passive consciousne~s of the individual.

Evidence of the difficulty in determining upon the pro-

per English equivalent of sankhara appears in the transla-

tion of the h...'"haj jani sutta (No. 79) of the Samyuttani kava

that follows:
"Kifica bhikkhave sankhare vadetha. SankhataIJ1 abhisan-
kharontiti bhikkhave tksma sax1.khara ti vuccanti. Kifica
sankhatam abhisankharonti •. Rupam. .
rITpattaya sankhatam
.
.isanr;:haronti. Vedanatp vedanattaya sankhatam abhisankhar·-
abh-

onti. Saru~a~ saf~att5y~ sankhatam abhisa~haronti. San-

khare sarJ<hara ttaya saitkha tam abhisahkharon ti. ViilftaIJalp
.
vifi~anatthaya51 sankhatam abhisankharonti. Sankhat~~ abh-
'isaftl<haronti kho bhikkhave tasma. sankhara ti vuccanti."
(5. III. xxii. 79. 8, p. 87)

Woodward's translation is as follows:

"And why, brethren, do ye say 'the activities-

compound'? ,
Because they compose a compound. That is why,
brethrent the 'yord 'activities-compound' is used. And

.5°Kirivas are the mental properties which are mere mental

action~'hey do not have the qualities of sankhara or kamma •

.5lThe PTS edition gives the :form viJ!tnanatthava. This

form, with the aspirant tha, however, does not agree with
othe:r similar formes occurrint; in the 3amenara.o:ra!,h~> namely,
rTipa t: tv. V,t t ved'l 'C3. t tava, S<:l7111a ttava J! and sahkhdra ttava. Vi n-
nar)attdya 'is t:he lor-n given in the Ceylon edition of' the·
work. See The Sar~n,tJ.ttan.ikavn of the Sutta Pitaka. Pt. I. Rev.
and ed. Bandaram~lle Amaraseeha !>-1aha Thero. LPali Text in
Sinhalese ScriptJ. (Colombo': M. H. Po. Wijayaratne Appuhamy,
The Vidyaratanakara Press and Saddharma Praka~a Press, 1926),
i ~. 401~ (hereafter cited as S. Cey. ed.)
?

102

what compound do they compose?

It·is body that they compose into a compound of
body. It is feeling that they compose into a feeling-
compound. It is perception that they compose into a
perception-compound; the activities irito an activi-
ties-compound; consciousness into a conscicusness-
compound. They compose a compound, brethren. There-
fore the :word (activities) compound is used." ..
(S. Tr. III, p. 73)

Due to the great diversity of terms 52 which may be used

to express an appropriate aspect of sankhara, and an inter-

pretation of sankhara as an • activi ties-compound,' the ren-.

dering ab~re appears meaningless. One-fifth of the entire

Paficunadanakkhandha is reserved for the discussion of this

concept in the First Noble Truth; since sankhara is formed

of taryh~ (craving), i t ~ppears prominently in the Second No- I· .

b1e Truth also •. The Third Noble Truth.is the cessation of

saTrkharas. The Fourth Noble Truth, or the Middle Way, deals

with the eradication of sankharas (sankharakkhava). 'Activi-

,.
ties-compound' is certainly not a suitable definition for

san..l-chara, and neither is ·Woodward's choice of 'compose' for

abhisankharonti, tco~pound' for sankhata, and 'perception'

52Synonyms f'or sankhara ~n alphabetical order are: an~­

nat anurodha-virnrlha~ an'l~a~a, ~d~~a, ~lava, ~sava, ~~ava,
asa
___
-'.
i~!"'"
~}I ,,-
-;-:1
\' ",
l'! ::-:--. ~~
-=-....:...:..::.::. ~i
~f
1..1 n;·l:.:~-ci 1 e c:.3. 9 L'1n3.dl~ 1., UD;:l._·v_a.,
___ _ u;c:dana,
upadl, '-15S2.03., e.1--1 , o~(7isa~ o:=oha~ kal.'.lTI3.. iC2.]?'T.",-patha, 15a1i, ka-
1 1- ......c 3.; "l."_~ < , . - ' t .. ~
l·_::. ..... ~_~·....... ~ ~-.,
" .....
~~"':"'I
~-::-
• .:..1., ~' ... ' l-"
l..Cl.l...i:; l.;-,:,12.#
, • .,
i-,:l_Lt?32, 1-:lllC2r:~1
1 ., -; 1
l~L1Sa..L~~~(l..lSa ..... a,
khi.1a, K~ll~, ~~.- £:,.ala, cittal(i10Sa, cit-r:.:l"'Ja~(kil~sa, cet-
-ha
ana, ceto~hila.
(.r:_~-.t, rir)_~0,
cetcnadosa,
~:;ha·.}J'
.
c~'.)':::'.3.,
chadda. chanda,
(i::..r2tha,
.
chand3.ra~a,
d::::=:.':~~a,. ri;~:~::~.?it
ta~-
1'l-iS:::::~._t3.,
nfvara";,i, DaDartCa:--;;;"Dar1casani-~ha, papai:1casani'la. pana-:1casanna-
---:---,..!..'-
." - -"- - - - - - - - -
sarli<ha, pac::ohana, pal1.~eC1ha, nali "ha, E:'"ll i bociha, pa:;;ZI-cta, puri-
hanapa, bClnd~'-;:-:~' b~ja, br:avasalla, manooaciosa, ~la, mara-
pasa, marabandhana, yoga, rajas. rodha, vana, vanatha, vatu-
-
m.a, vana, vit2!::Lca f vi!1"i""edha, vinibandha,. sahkha.ra, san8:a,
---- -----
§aulvo.i.ana, s;-.:nsa~, salla p si ta, .sineha, snehat sava, sar=.
ambha; see relevant passages in Khd~, Dhp., Ud., Itiv., Sn.
 10j
N"'_
for sanna.

A1though 'compose' gives a fair impression of the liter-

al meaning of abhisaAkharonti, in this particular context

and elsewhere, i t signifies specific actions: to create, to

perform, to prepare, to reform, to reinforce, to renew, and

to repair. Several examples may be cited from Buddhist canon-

ical literature: panham abhisankharonti 5J ('they prepare or

renew the question'); sankhare abhisankharonti 54 ('they re-

inforce or create sankharas, i. e. ;neri torious or demeri tor-
ious kamma actions); tatharUpam iddhabhisankharam abhisankh-

asim 55 ('I performed a miracle of such nature'); and khanda-

.. .
EDullam patisankharoti56 ('he repairs delapidations'). In
.the contexts of Pa:r{cakkhandha and Paticcasamunpada, however,

sankhara does not imply all the above meanings. In those

contexts, san~hara could mean the 'mental factors that renew

" life II '

In the above context, moreover, sankhata {'what ~s re-

531-1. I. 176, J95: II. 122, 252; N"d. I. 180. J58, 452; II.
137; see also Patisarnbhid~maR~a. Ed. Arnold C. Yaylor. 2 .
vols. PaliText SOc1ety LPub1ications]. (London: H. Frowde,
1905-1907), II. 196~ 203. (hereafter cited as PS.)

54 S • v. 449, 455.
55D. I. 106, 109; ~r. Ie 330; II. 99, IJ5,ll~3. See also
The Vinaya Pif;:akam: One of' the Principal Buddhist Holy Scri-
~1:ures 1n c:~., ,.-"': i L:~,,"'-'J.:-,.':,:P. ::..d. heJ..:nann Oldenberg. 5 valSe
Reprint. Pali Text ;3ociety-CPublicationsJ. (London: Luzac &
Co., 1964), 1",16,250 (hereafter cited as Vin.)

56 Vin. II. 160, 286; III. 2871 A. III. 263.

p

104
newed-). although used as a passive past participle, serves

as the object of sankhara ('the renewer'). It thus assumes

the exact meaning in which i t is used in the Five Aggregates

and iri the Dependent Origination. In other cases, however,

sankhara appears as an equivalent of sankhata:vayadhamma,

bhikkhave, sahkhara; aopamadena sampadetha ('Decay is inher-

ent in all component things; work out your salvation with

diligence.' D. 11.1.56; D. Tr. 11.173)' anicca vata sankha.•

ra - unnadavavadhammino (tHaw transient are all component

things - growth is their nature and decay.' D. II. 157. 199;

I
D. Tr. 2J2). The concept may also appear, on the other hand,
as • force' or 'urge': ayu-sankhara 57 ·C' renewing force wi thin

a life-span'); jivita-sankhara, or bhava-sankhara ('the men-

tal force that renews the re-conception process.' De II. 99,

l07)~ and, yavatika abhisankharassa gati tavatika~ gantva
"
('kept rolling so long as the impulse that set it moving 1as-

ted.' A. I. 111-12; A. Tr. I. 96)

since thoughts, pure and 1rnpure, that are stored in the

mind, act as the renewers of the aggregates of a living be-

ing, a more appropriate translation of S. III. 87 is offered:
nAnd why, brethren, do you say sankhara?
They are called ~2.n!{h51:"::l, brethre::1, because they
renew what had been undergoing renewal in the Dast.
What do they renew that had been undergoing renewal
1n the past?
They renew the rupa (body),
~ .- - which had been un-
..

57Ae IV. 311; Ap. 151. 530; D. II. 106-108; J~. IV. 215;
H. I. 295; s. II. 266; Ud. 64.
?
105
de~going renewal in the past [t~~~kethe ;tate·o~ .
body]. They renew perception, ~'hich had been ·under~
going renewal in the past [to have the state of per-
ception l. They renew conception, , ... hich had been un-
dergoin~ r~newal in the past [to have the state of
conceptionj. They renewsa~kharas, or the menta~ ac-
tions of transforming thought;s·into kamma-forces,
which had been undergoing renewal in·the past [to
have the state of sarikharas]. They renew passive-
consciousness, which had been undergoing renewal in
the ~ast [to have the state of passive conscious-
nessJ. Brethren, they are called sartkharas, because
they renew or reinforce, what had been undergoing
renewal in the past."
(Wr. Tr.)

.
Vi~ana is the fourth and major component part of the

mind and the last of the Five Aggregates. ViMap~ is defined

in the dictionary of thePali Text Society

, as (l) a mental
.

quality as a constituent of individuality (2) the bearer of

(individual) life (J) life force (as extending beyond re-

~ hirth also) (4) principle of conscio~sriess (5) general con-

sciousness (as function of mind and matter) (6) regenerative
force (7) animation, and (8) mind as transmigrant or trans-

:forming (according to the individual's karnma) one individual

.
1ife (after death) into the next. As vi11'f{a~ refers to~,

~;Lve ~.oAS-ci~ sne s s, the majority of these definitions are \

Ii
< ---~---'-
II
correct in so far as the concept 19 used in the Five Aggre- iI
gates and the Dependent Origination.

Of the twelve translations listed in Table 11, however,

omy three are in agreement with the content of the Five Ag-

gr~gates and the Dependent Origination: 'accumulative dynami~

~tream of consciousness· (Johansson), 'formulated content Of}

 106 >' /;J'U~)J(,-"
consciousness' (Guenther), and 'general consciousness' j 3Y; f"~tlCk>
(Stcherbatsky), while four translations, 'awareness,' 'pure

sensation,' 'cognition,' and 'understGtnding' refer to G

(in its primary meaning) and to vedana (as repr~sented in

the Five Aggregates); other translations, 'conception,' 'in-"

tellectual activity,' 'intelligence,' and 'thought faculty,'

deal with mand (in its primary sense) and sanna (as represen-
',~

ted in the Five Aggregates). In all eight cases, active con~

sciousness is the implied meaning. The term 'consciousness, ') V'

however, encompasses too wide a meaning to assist in a pre- ,

cise analysis.
Virt?iaI)a may be defined precisely as passive subliminal
\:y:. " /tI~ j, c;X" '" . iJt
• .< ,~.~--""'/~.--~<:-\" ,;!', ;'::""'-}\1l'Y2
consciousness, or the sub-consciousness of the m~nd. In ~ts

pure form i t is experienced only in deep sleep or ~n a coma-

tose or unconscious state. No one can experience vinnaoa "

lconsCiOUS1Y except in deep meditation, but it is always \

there in the states of waking and sleeping. In the waking

state, i t appears a~he starting point of active conscious-,

. -------------"-------
------ - --.-~--- ~---------.~.---......-------------------~-----

ness and is usually accompanied by qua,li:fying components,

,~-- '-- '-,._----------.

such as cakkhuviiit1arya (visual consciousness), sotavirihana

(auditory cortsciousness), gha1)avirina~a (olfactory conscious-

ness), jivhavif\.naT,1a (gustatory consciousness), kayavirih~T,la

(tactile consciousness), and manovi~nana (mental conscious-

ness). By itself, however, vi~ria~a in the Five Aggregates \

and the Dependent Origination always indicates passi ve con- \

sciousness 10 .

L
 107
Three pas'sages from the Buddhist canonical texts i11us-

trate the use of virina.!).a as passive consciousness:

"Aciram vat' ayam kayo .

pathavim adhisessati
.
Chuddho apeta-vinna~o nirattham va kalingaram. tt
(Dhp. 41)

"Soon wi11 this body lie stretched upon the

ground, unheeded, ~oid~ubliminal conscious-
ness, just like a useless log of wood."
(lir. Tr.)
"Ayu usmaca vinharya~. Yada kaya~ jahantim~. Apa-
viddho tada seti. Parabhattam acetanal]1."
(S. III. xxii. 95. 15. 4, p. 14~)

-----------
"'Reft of three things, life, heat and conscious-
ness, I
Behold i t tl;town aside. When 'tis cast off,
Discarded there i t lies, a senseless thing,
Mere food for others ••• "
(s. Tr. III, p. 121)
"Yada khoavuso imam kayaffi tayo dhamma jahanti: ayu usma
ca vinna~am, athciyam kayo ujjhito avakkhitto seti yatha
kattham acetanan-ti. tt
:
(M. I. v. 3. 43, p. 296)
"In regard to this body, your reverence, when
three things are got rid of': vitality, heat and
consciousness, then does this body lie cast a 't-l ay ,
flung aside' like unto a senseless log of wood." .
(H. Tr. I. p. 356)
In the 1ast two passages~ of course, consciousness must
be I"
interpreted as subliminal passive consciousness.

In a passage from the Godhikasutta of the Sam'~ttanikaya

that pertains to the concept of' reconception, or rebirth,

the Buddha describes the machinations of ~mra, the Evil One,

in his vain efforts to locate the birth place of Godhika, an

Arahant who had achieved nibbarya and died:

L
f
108
". MEso kho bhikkhave H~ro papim1 Godhikassa kulapu tt-
assa vi~a~~ samanvesati. Kattha Godhikassa kulaputt-
assa vinnaI)~ pati~!=hitan-ti. Appati~~hitena ca bhik-
khave vinnanena Godhiko kulaputto parinibbuto ti. lt58
, (5. I. iVa J. 3.18. p. 122)
"That, bhikkhus, is Mara the evil one, who is
seeking everywhere for the consciousness of Godhika
of the clansmen. ·'Where,· he is thinking, 'hath Go-·
dhika-s consciousness been reinstated?' But Godhika
of the Clansmen,· bhikkhus, with a conscious'ness not
reinstatE!d,';'hath utterly ceased to live."
(S. Tr. l.p. 152)
·Here vinnana refers not to mere consciousness, but to ,pas-

sive consciousness, the factor that joins a fertilized ovum

(' . . J~ ~,l
d.c.f'rr :,,0 ,
to effect rebirth.
Another passage from the Uoaya5utta' (No. 5J. the Dis-
course on Method) of the Samyuttani-k'ayp. explains the term
appatit~hitavi~~ana as i t applies to an Arahant in clearer
. " ..: : ; .

terminology:

.
, tf Tad apa ti t1=hi tam ViMfu;l~ avi~lhrup anabhi sar..khar-
affca vimuttam. Vimuttatta j;hitaI!l thitatta santusitap
santusitatta na paritassati. Aparitassa:,n paccattaffileva
parinibbayati. Khi~a jliti vusitam brar~acariyam kat~
karar,t"iyrup naparam i ttha ttaya ti pa3ana t1. ti. tt
. (S. III. xx~i. 53.,11, pp. 53-54)
, II ""i .YI,J~\·J·0"..... ·V_~{<>'--\0',.n"<.

"Wi -chout tha t""'p!"'a tforn'{c'~{~n.sciousness has no

growth, i t generates ~ction and is freed; by free-
dom i t Ls steadY: bv its steadiness i t is hanpv: ow-
ing to h.:appines~ i t- is not troubled. Being u;"i;i:-oub-
led, of itself i t becomes utterly well, so that it
knows: 'Destroyed is rebirth, lived is the ri~hteous
life, aone is the task, for life in these conditions
there is no hereafter."
(s. Tr. III, p. 46)
Using the terminology which we thi~ is more precise and

58 For a similar passage cf. S. III.' 124.

L
 109
adding expressly the factors imp1ied, the following transla-
-------------
tion is obtained:

"That subliminal consciousness (of the Arahant)

without having a rertilized 07um to which to adhere,
without having conflicts (of ta~h~ and other defile-
ments), and without transforming ~houghts into san-
kharas, is totally freed. Since this· subliminal~n­
sciousnessis freed, i t is steady, since i t is stead-
y, i t is self-satisfied~ i t does not get 6xcited (by
worldly contingencies). The person who does not thus
gei excited attains parinibb~na in this very life.
He understands well that his rebirth-process is over,
that he has lived the righteouS-life, that11er'rag----
done what was to be done, and that for life in these
condi tions there is no her.~after."
(vIr. Tr.)
But some explanation must be offered as to how viI1.flaQa

and namarUpa (the combination of rupa and virt~aoa) recipro-

cate and influence one another. The Dependent Origination

says, "Being dependent on ignorance gives rise to sankharas;

being dependent on sankharas gives rise to vifina~a; being

" dependent on vi.fJ.~ana gives tise to the combination of na:na-

- .--- -._-------.

----------------
rUpao" According to this, as long as tatih-g or i.gnoranr. e ex-

ists, sankharas.wilJ. continue to arise; as long as sahkharas

/

exist, vini'1:lna cont-inues to arise. As long as vinna!.1a exists,

n~marGpa must take place after an individual's death. Accord-

-----------::----.-. --
-- -

ing to the ?--lahanidanasutt..s (No. 15, the Great Discourse on

Causation) of the Dl2,hanikava, the mind continues on in the

recurring process of rebirth in this way:

UViilnat:ta-paccaya nama-rupan ti iti kho pan' etarn vu-

tt~, tad Ananda imina p' eta~ pariyayena veditabbaT ya-
tha Vihr1arya-paccaya nama-r-upal!1. Vinnar;arp va hi Ananda
roam kucchilI1 na okkamissatha;> api nu kho nama-rLiparp matu
kucchismimr
samucchissathati?

L
 No h' etam bhante.
" Viii~a-t1at;l ~a hi Ananda matu kucchilJl okkamitva vokka-
missatha, api nu kho n"ama-riiparp i tthattaya abhinibbat-
tissa thati?
No h' etagtbhante.
Vinrtanam va'hi Ananda daharass'eva sato vocchijjis-
satha kumarassa va kumarikayava, api nu kho nama-rupam
vuddhi~ viru+hi~ vepull~ apajjissath&ti?
No. hi et~ bhante.
Tasma t ih· Ananda es' eva hetu etam nidanam esa sam-
udayo esa paccayo nama-rGpassa, yadida; vin5a~~~.
Namaru.pa-paccaya vinna.~an ti iti kho pan' et~ vut-
talp. tad Ananda imina p' et~ pariyayenavedJ..tabbatp,
ya tha namarupa-pac caya vi"tilia;;tarp. Vinnat;1a.lJl va hi Anand,a,
nama-riipe pati !~ha.1J1 niilabhissatha,api nu kho· ayati jia-
ti- jara-ma.ran.-a-dukkh~- samudaya sambhavo pafiilayeth£i. ti '?
No h' etaIp bhante.
. .'
Tasma t ih' Ananda es' eva hero etam nidanam esa sam-
udayo esa paccayo vinna~assa, yadida~ namarupa~.
Ettavata kho Ananda jayetha va jiyetha va miyetha
va cavetha va uppajjetha va, ettavata
" . adhivacana-patho_
ettavata nirutti-patho, ettavata panfiatti-patho, etta-
vata pannavacara~, ettavata vatta~ vattati itthatta~
: pafifiapanaya, yadidam nama-rUpam saha viJi1h~nena."
· (D. iI. xv. 21-22, pp. 62~64)
T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids translate the pa,ssages as

f'o11ows:

tt'I have said that cognition is the cause of

name-and-form. Now in what way that is so, Ananda,
is to be understood after this manner. i{ere cogni-
tion not to descend into the ~other's womb, would
na~e-and-form become constituted therein?'
tIt would not, lord.'
'Were cognition, after having descended into
the mother's womb, to become. extinct, would name-
and-form come to birth in this state of being?'
' I t would not, lord.'
'Were cognition to be extirpated from one yet
young, youth or maiden, would name-and-form attain
to growth, development, expansion?'
' I t would not, lord.'
'Wherefore, Ananda, just that is the ground,
the basis, the genesis, the cause of name-and-form,

/',
!
p

i '
I i
~,

111. /

to wit, cognition.'
I I have said that name-and-form. is the cause of
cognition. Now in what way that is so Ananda, is to
be understood after this ma~~er. Were cognition to
gain no foothoJ,..d in name-and-form, would there then,
iJ? the cc~qJ\Years, be manifested that c~n<?a~@r(~-:'_'-idi
t10n of bl..rth, old age, death and the uprl..s:J.n~b~~
Ill?' .
• There ",·oul. d no t, lord.' .I
'Wherefore, Ananda, just that is the ground, the
basis, the genesis, the cause of cognition, to w.it,
name-and-form. •
'In so far onl.y, Ananda, can one be born, or grow
old, or die, or dissolve, or reappear, in so far only
is there any process of verbal expression, in 50 far
only is there any process of explanation, in; 50 far
only is there any process of manifestation, in 50 far
only is there any sphere 01 knowledge, in 50 far only
do we go round the round of life up to our appearance
amid the conditions of this world -- in as far as
this is, to wit, name-and-form together with cogni-
tion. 'II
(D. Tr. II, pp. 60-61)
I .

In accordance with the definitions arrived at in this

study, however, a more accurate and somewhat expla.."1atory

translation 0= the above passages is as follows:

larises
UI have said that 'out of passive Eonsciollsness
t:he mind-body combination. How Ananda, does
i t happen is to be understood after this manner. 1{ere
passive consciousness (~andhabba), Ananda, not to de-
scend in-to the fertilized ov~'TI in the mother's womb,
would narn8-and-l~orm become consti tuted as a combina-
tion th':!rein?'
' I t would not, Lord.'
'Were passive consciousness • .~nandaf after having
descendE~d into the ovum in the mother's ,</,omb f to de-
,~ via,:!;efrom it.,., would that mind-body combination re-
ceive birth in this state of being?'
'I~ would not, Lord.'
·Were the passive consciousness of a baby boy or
girl to be ~ut~f.""~Egm the body at its infancy,
would that mind-body combination attain to growth,
development~ expansion?' .
' I t would not, Lord.'
'Therefore, Ananda, this passive consciousness,
j indeed, is the reason, this indeed~ is the origin,
this is the cause, this is the condition of the mind-
 p
1.12

body combLnation. '

II have said that due to the mind-body combina-
V \tion there arises pass~ve consciousness. How, Ananda,
does it happen is to be understood after this manner'
"Were passi~e consciousness, Ananda, not to gain a .
'\/ \'f'oothold in the mind-body combination (at conception)
would it be possible that bil;;'th, growth and death ap-
pear as a chain ,of causali ty tha~ gives rise· to suf-
fering?'
' I t wo~d not, Lord.'
*.' -The:e. :f'.ore, Ananda, t~is ~ind-bOd!·combina~i?n,~bV:"'£'v..
1ndeed, l.5 the reason"thl.s, l.ndeed, loS the orl.gl.n., 7,
;'thii; is the' cause, ,this is the condition of passive '
eortsciousness. • , . ; :
'In so :far on1.y, Ananda, can one be born, or grow
old, or die, or disso1.ve, or reappear, in so far on-
ly is there any process of verbal expression, in so
far only is there any process of explanation, in so
far only i.s there any process of: manifestation, in so
far only is there any sphere ofknow1.edge, in so far
only as we go round the round of life up to our ap-
pearance amid the conditions of this world -:.. in so'
far as this is, to wit, the mind-body combination to-
gether with passive consciousness."

The foregoing passages have thus demonstrated that vi~­

~~a, or sublimina1 passive consciousness, is a very signifi-
.
cant part of the mi.nd. Vifi~a~a may be called the store-house \
of sankharas and me]!lories. Passive in 'nature, it is activated\
j
through the six senses when they come in contact with their '

respective sense objects.' Sanl;:haras in turn :force the indiv- (

idual to suffer various painful (and ple'asant) experiences

during his life span. ~fce in th~min~ compells

~~

his p~ssive cons~..9_us_~~ to grasp the ovum of another living

being at the time of .thela-tx_er_!_$ death.

Aside from the specific role that each of the Five Ag-

gregates assumes during the life of an individual, the Bud~

~ist scriptures and their commentaries contain frequent re-

l
 113

ferences to the interrelationSh~POf' vedana, sahna,an~ san-r

ny. From Buddhaghosa

--------_.-..
or:.'~ard,
' ..
khara as the three asnects of'_mi-npi which control
. /.
rnan·s desti-

'commentators have attempted to

explain the mysteries recorded in the Madhupindikasu,;ta (No. t

18, Discourse Compared to a Honey Ball) of' the Haj,ihimanika-

ya. The apostle Hahakaccana, in the Madhupi~dikasutta, ad-
'-
dressing the Bhikkhus, explained how the concept of vedana

expands and changes first turning into saiifias and finall.y

into sankharas. His exposition delineates the integration (If'

the three aspects of' mind in the development of a person's

active consciousness:

H ••• Cakkhuii c'avuso paticca rupe· ca uppajjati. cakkhu-,

vifiMaparo, ti~~aS sangati phasso. phassapaccaya vedana,
yam vedeti tam sanjanati, yam sanjanati tam vitakketi,
yam vitakketi tam papahceti, yam papanceti tatonidanam
purisarn papa5casannasankha samudacaranti atitanagatapac-
cuppannesu cakkhuvih~eyyesu I~pesu, Sota~ c' avuso pa~­
icca sadde ca uppajjati sotavinflap.arp-- pe - ghanan c'
avuso paticca gandhe ca,uppajjati ghanavinnaI}arp - jivhari
.c· avuso paticca rase ca uppajjati jivhavifillaI)aI!l - kay-
afi c' avuso pa!icca pho~~habbe ca uppajjati kayavinna9a~
- manari c' a\."Uso pa ticca dhamme ca uppaj ja ti mano·vinnal).-
~. Ti::.u;.am sangat;i phasso, phassapaccaya vedana., yam v~-
deti taTIl sanjanati yam sanjanati tam vi takketi, yam vi t-
akketi ta6 papanceti, y~; papaficeti tatonidanili~ purisa~
papa~casan~asankha samudacaranti atit~.agatapaccuppann-
• ..; .J .
esu manov:tnneYY8su dhammesu.,U
(M. I. 2. 8. 18, ppe 111-112)
The interpretative translations of the three concepts,

vedana, sai'lha, and sankhara vary greatly .. I. B. Horner has

translated the above passage in the following manner:

~.A.Visual consciohsness, your reverences, arises

because of eye and material shapes; the meeting of
 114
the three is sensory impingement; :fee1ings are be-
cause 'o:f sensory impingement ; what' one :feels one
perceives, what one perceives, one reasons about;
what one reasons about obsesses one; what obsesses
one is the origin of the number of perceptions and
obsessions ~hich f~;j.?a~,tt,-}[", man in regard to mat~ria~'
shape s c ognl. sabl-!L4:5 y the _..!.~~...:._f~EJ..!'~J-_p_r,.e_s....e..tU ~
"And, your reverences, audi.tory consciousness arises
because. of ear and sounds ••• And, your reverences,
'o1:factory consciousness arises because of nose and
sme~1s •••.~d, your reverences, ~statory conscious-'
ness arises because of tongue and tastes ••• And,
your reverences, bodily consciousness arises because
of' body and touches ••• And, your reverenCes, mental
consciousness arises because of mind and mental ob-
jects. The meeting of the three is 'sensory impinge-
ment, feelings are because of sensory impingement;
what one feels one perceives, what one perceives one
.' reasons about; what one reasons .about obsesses one;
what obsesses one is the origin of the number of
perceptions and obsessions ~hich assail a man in re-
gard to mental objects cognisable by mind, past, fu-
ture, present." .
(M. Tr. I, p. 145)
Bhikkhu Na:Qananda, in his Concept. and Reali~,59 on the

other hand, presents a more radical description of the effect

·of' sa~khara~ upon vedana and saXfia:
..... Because of eye and material o.bjects~ 0 Brethren,
arises visual cOnsciousness; the meeting of the
three is sensory impingement, because of sensory
impingement arises feeling.
What on,e f2els, one perceives; what one perceives,
orye reasons about; what one reasons about, one pro-
ll.fera t,es c'ons::ep t;ually. /
What Oll'e proliferates conceptually, due to that,
concepts characterized by the prolific tendency as-
sail him in regard to material shapes cognisable by
the eye, belonging to the past, the future and the
present ••• 11
(Conce Real. pp. 5-6)

In order to understand the full implication of the pas-

sag.e, however, one must re:fer to the explanation of the

59 This work also accepts feeling as an aspect which is

~ot included in perceiving.
 115
fifth century commentator, Buddhaghosa. who in his Pali com-

mentary on the Ma,i~himanikaya.60 caught the true meaning of

the MadhHpiryr;!ika f.ormula:

"Cakkhuncavusoti adisu ayam-attho: aYUso, nissayabhavena

cakkhuppasadaR ca, arammary.abhavena catusam~~~hanikarupe
•
. " .J 1'4/-- • _ . . . . , . . .
. . nama uppaJJat1. T1nnam sanga-
ca pat~cca Ca!~khUY1nnanam
ti phasso ti tesarn tinnam sangatiya phasso nama uppaj-
jati. Tam phassam pa~icca sahajatadivasena phassapacca-
ya vedana uppajjati. Taya vedanaya yam aramma!1a~ vedeti,
tadeva sanna sanjana ti. Yam sa'nila sa.1Ijana ti, tad eva ar-
~ .
a.mmanam vitakko vitakketi. Yam vitakko vitakketi, tade-
varamrnaIfa..n papanco papariceti. Tatonidanan ti etahi cak-
khurupadihi karanehi. Purisam papartcasan~asankha samud-
acarant1 ti ta~ aparinnatakara~~ purisa6 papa~cako~~h­
ass' abhibhavanti, tassa pavattantl:" ti attho."
(Me A. II, p. 6J)
"The expression cakkhui'i c· ElVUSO, etc. [i.e. cakkhur;.
c' ~vuso paticca rnpe ca uppajjati cakkhuvihfiana~J
means: f 8rethren, :\lisual coasciousn.2s~ arises due
to ~he visual sense agency which acts as a resource
or foundation, and the vise.al o..O-d..e..c.t~ which are
formed of ~he four kinds of material elements.' Tin-
nam san.2"a ti Dhas so rr:eans: • As a resul t of meeting
the three i i. e. visual sense agency, visual object~
and v..i-S-.ua.l. '- consciousness l, thf.~re arises !sensory ir:n='
ping~.. " Due to sensory impirigement, which arises
foge~ther wi th sensory perception and functions as
its cause, there arises senso~y nerceDtio~. Whatev-
er object sensory percep tion~;,'(p~rien~es ,§r1f'ia) con-
ceives or 1:hinks about. Of whatever object' Sdnl1a
cOEveives" that very object w::_11 be reasoned out by
V --------v-fSkk~. rtna t has been reasoned out by vi takka, that
very obje,:,t is. ~~rn;d into a \E3.h~~ orl::~~by
\) ~£1ca. 1.. a. tonlC.1Cinarn means: ~ because of "Chese ! ac-
tors, suc~ a~ ~y0, visual object, and the like.'
Purisam DC."0anCasClYi.f'l3:.sankha S3 1;J'_ldacaranti means:
'TThe groUD$ oi~ D3n3r1cas or san',,;:naras over><lhe1m the
- , ~-.'-

----------------------------
60Buddhaghosa, PaDatlcasudan1", or The Commentary on the
Hajjhimani}:aya of t:-:e Sutta Pitaka. Ed. Dhammakitti Siri
Dhammananda. Simon :--iewavi tarne Beauest, vol. 44. 5 vals.
[Pali in Sin~alese Scriptle (Colombo: Trustees, Tne Tipitaka
, Publication Press~ 1943), II. 6J. (Hereafter ci ted as H. A.)
 116
v"lindiv1dual who is ignorant of the facts.' Thus they
hse him or overpower him. 1t
. (Vr. Tr.)
The key words ~n thi s passage are vedeti, sanjana ti •. vi-

takketi, paoaJ{ceti. pana~ca-sai1na-sankha, and sar:lUdacaranti •

• 1lile Horner and Nanananda have correctly translated vedeti

•
as 'feels,' for there is no difference between feeling and

perceiving, as both indicate sensory experience, satijanati

can never take on the meaning of perceiving. If such were the

case, the expression would become redundant.

As in the case of sanna, the same confusion arises regar-

'6 I
ding sar1,janati. 1 This term has been transl.ated in the dic-

tionary or the Pali- Text Society as (1) to recognize, per-

ceive, know, be aware of (2) to think, to suppose (J) to call,

name, or nickname. In context with the Madhupindika, however, i' t

sanjan5,t-i should carry the con..~otation of knowing as a pro-

duct of thinking, together with the help of extant data, ima-

gination, memories, beliefs, likes and dislikes. While sa~na

signifies that aspect of active knowledge, or active concep-

tual consciousness which is attained indirectly, the other

perceptual aspect which i~ implied by vedan~ occurs directly.

The same is true for mano and ci tta, respectively. Sanja~ti,

I

therefore, should be translated only as 'recognizes' or 'con-

•
.... \ IY
i
ceives' or 'thinks .. ' VTtrkka ~s comparative thinking, i.e.

the intellectual process of thinking by compar1son.

6l pTS • n"1C t ., p. 129 p s. v .. "sa£1janati,,"

L
 117
Papa~a: (from the root pa~c, 'to spread') appears ~n the
'~\
dictionary o'i~ the Pali Text Society as (1) obstacle, impedi-

ment, a burde~hiCh causes delay, hindrance (.2) illusion,

ob3ession, hind~ce to progress. But in essenceJ~i~ is a

C'i' 'f'-'-/,u/\",," '
sUbstitute for sa~kh!ra. As can be seen in expressions such
"--~
as papahca-samatikkanta (Dhp. 195), 'those who have trans-
cended sankharas,' pana~cabhiratapaja nippapa~ca tathagata 62

(Dhp. 254), 'all individuals delight in forming sankharas out

of though-t;s, but the Tathagatas have extinguished them.' The

denominative verb papa~ceti, the~efore, in context with the

above formula, should be translated as 'transforms thoughts

into sanl<lfara:s.·
-..J ..)v-- ~ -
In the compound pananca-sa.nna-sankha, moreover, the stem

of the last member is not the Pali form sankha. but sankha,

the Sanskrit equivalent of which carries the meaning of con-

flict, battle, or war. Thus 'the battle, or conflict of san-

khara thoughts' suggests a more precise translation of the

compound. English translations of ~h~ Pili samudicaranti,

finally, are 'beset,' 'assail,' and 'domineeringly force to

take action'; in this case the meaning differs from the San-

skrit, where i t means 'offering,' ·presenting,' and 'good

and correct behaviour.' Thus, a clearer and more precise

meaning of this crucial passage of the ~iadhupi~1ika would be

62 Also cf. Visa~kh~ragata6 citta~ - taryh~na~ khayam ajjh-

a~§:;. (Dhp. l5J-Sh): '1>;y mind is devoid of said{ha~as. I at-
tained the extinction of all forms of ::~!Jhae~ ('i{r. Tr.)

L
p
118
the following:

" ••• Because of the eye and visual. :forms, breth-

ren, there arises visual consciousness. The meeting
of the three is sensory impression. Because of sen-
sory impression there arises perc.eptual consciousness.
'kllat one perceives, one conc~ives; what one conceives
one reasons abcut; what cne reasons abo.ut, one trans-
fo.rms into. sankharas; what one transfo.rms into san-
kh~ras is due ~c the fact that the co.nflict of saft-
kharas, fcrmed cf thcughts, besets the person a~in
a dcmineering manner fcrces him to. act as they want
him to act, in regard to. visual fcrms cognizable by
. the. eye, belonging to. the past, the future, and the
present.
Eecause of the ear and scunds, brethren, there
arises auditory ccnscicusnl:!ss •••
Because of the no.se and cdors, brethren, there
arises clfacto.ry consciousness •••
Because of the tcngue and. tastes, brethren,
there arises gustatcry ccnsciousness •••
Because cf the body and touches, brethren, there
arises tactile ccnscicusness •••
Because of mind and mental objects, brethren,
there arises mental perceptual ccnscicusness. The
meeting of the three is senso:::-y imnression. Because
of sensory impression there arises perceptual con-
sciousness.- r...'hat one perceives, cne conceives; what
one ccnceives, one reascns abcut; what one reasons
abou'c, one trans:forms into. sahkharas ; what cne trans-I
forms into. sankharas is due to. the fact that the ccn-
flict cf sankharas, fcrmed cf thcughts, besets the
perscn and in a domineering manner force~~im to. act
as they want him to., act, in regard to ¥1sJul Icrms \
cognizable by the ';~p~u}, belonging to. the past, the fu-)
ture, and the present~"
(Vir. Tr.)
Mahakaccanats expcsiticn on how an active mental process

starts with perception, expands into. ccncepticn, and cften

ends in transforming the latter into. sankharas by means cf

V tal)ha and cther mental' defilements, did much to. shed light

upcn the same prccess that the Buddha has discussed in his

teaching cn the Five Aggregates, through the ccncepts cf ve-

davE, saflrta, and sanknara. The relaticnship between each cf

r i.
the Five Aggregates 1S
119

further elucidated by the Buddha's

description of the kind of nourishment that is necessary to

the growth of each.

Fo~d for the Growth of the Five Aggregates

Several references to the foods that nourish the Five

Aggregates occur in the Pa1i canonical texts,6J as, for ex-

ample, in the following passage of the DTghanikaya:

"Ca ttaro ahara. KabaliTtkaro aharo o+ariko va sukhu··

mo va, phassD dutiyo, manOsarlcetana tatiya, vif'{tianam
tutthalll·"
,
ca- -
(D. III. XXX111. I, 11, p. 228)
1

"There are four kinds of' food: food taken in in

morsels and doses (solid, liquid,'air) whether gross
or subtle; contact as the second, conceptual thirtk 4 •

ing as the third; and passive consciousness as the

:fourth."
(Wr. Tr.)
These four typesot' food (ahara), as illustrated on Ta-

b1e 12, provide nourishment for each of the Five Aggregates:

(1) kabali~k~r~h~ra, or kabal~~kara (2) phass~hlira, or phas-

sa (J) manosaflcetanahara, or manosancetana (4) viftna1}ahara,

or vi-hnar;a. The literal meaning 0 f ahara (a +- hara) i s ' tha t

which is carried inward~'

Kabalinkarar.ara (the Skt. form is the same) 15 the rna-

terial food formed of the elements taken into the body 1n

morsels and doses! solid, liquid, and air. Their function 15

to aid the growth of the physical body which houses the mind p

thus serving only rGna, except in the sense of nou~ishing

6JD.' III. 228, 276; H. I. 48, 261 i S. II. 13, 98. 101.

I
L~
r
TADLE 12

, "FOODS PRODUCING ~NIMATE BEING

F'OOD
_ - - n _ _ ~_~_ I (Ah~rEi) I ___ .~~.
HA TEIUAL FOOD HENTAL FOOD
(Rupahara or J(abalihkar~i) (Namilhara):,
I I -r-'-----y--'l r----- I -----!·'l
SOLID Llr~UID, • AIR SENSORY H1PINGEHENT THOUGHTS 'ofITHT~~HA PASSIVE. 99!!SCI0USNF$~;"
(food) (drl.n){sj (oreath) (Phassa) (Manosa~cetanaJ ' (V1nna9a)
~pathaVr) (X~I~) ~V~:~J I
I HAfITER 1 - HEA~r HEL~TED TO RELATED TO RELA~ED TO
(1upadhatu) (Tejodhatu) BOPY SPEgCH MIND
, J (Kl1yasaficetan'fi) (Vacisa'hce-· (Hanosa'ficetana)
------. "- ,L tana)
N
I. . J-----r,
,_-' o"""
PHYSICAL BODY PERCEPTION AND CONCEPTION KANHA-FOR~1ATIONSPASSIVE CONSCIOUS-
NESS
(Rup.a) (Vedana) (Safi'lla) (Sam{hara )(Vir'lfia~a)
I ", .~_ I' J

FIVE AGGREGATES
(Pai\cakkhandha)
BODY "M'IND
(niipa)
I
(mima)
,

ANH1ATE BEING
(Savifihanaka-satto)
. .
 121

'the physical sense organs which insure the functioning of the

mind.

Phassahara, (Skt. soa:rsa

,1 -h-
~ a ara, i.e. 'the food called

touch' ), the first of the foods which nourish the mind" a

term usually translated as 'contact,' or 'touch,' :feeds veda-'

~, the first aspect of active consciousness. Perceptions can-

not occur without phassahara, for as previousiy demonstrated"

the term denotes the coming togethE!r or impingement of a

sense organ, a sense object, andsE!nse consciou~ness. 64

Manosaf'fcetanah'ara (the Skt" form i~ thesarne) literally

means 'thinking together with vedanas and thoughts,' and al-

lied to conceptual thinking, i t is the, food which leads to

the growth o:f sah~as and' sankharas. In the l~tter case, the

thoughts have been spoiled by ta~a.

VH~'i1a~ahara (vi T f1a; Skt. ~ + ji'ia, • to know'), or passive

consciousness, however, as evident from the structure of the
. h es
compoun d , nour1S .,..;-J_
v1nna~a.
V 1nna~a,
ON " " - th ereLore,
~ ~
Lorme d OL&'

sankharas and memor1es, and feeding oni t:self, functions as

a recurring passive mental continuum throughout life and

throughout each life after death.

In conclusion, our analysis of the mind, as illustrated

on Table 13, has revealed four notable changes or develop-

ments concerning citta and mana in the Buddhist scriptures.

CD The f~t denotes the Buddha's use of' tlo10 new concepts, ~-

64 M• I. 111; S. II. 73.

 122
TABLE 13

. ASPECTS OF HIND
(CITTA-~~NO-VI~NA~A)
(VEDANA-SANNA-S_~~~ARA-VI~~A~A)
·~I------------~I------~i
ACTIVE CONSCIOUS}IESS PASSIVE OR SUBLIMINAL CONSCIOUSNESS
(conscious state) (u~co~scious state)
(indriya-vir. .£la1}a) .(viMana
. • or
I bhava)

RE-CONCEPTIVE CONSCIOUSNESS I DEATH CONSCIOUSNESS

(pafisandhi-villiqa~a) (cuti-vihAa~a)

CONTI'!'.lJUH CONSCIOUSNESS
.(bhavanga-vii'lfiaI;ta)

I i I
PERCEPTION CONCEPTION KAt\.f}1A- FOR1-fA TI ON S
(citta or vedana) (mano or saf'ilia) (saiikhara)

1
I
INTELLECTUAL NON-INTELLECTUAL
I

(buddhimaya) (manomaya)

I
SENSORY- PE~ CEPTI O~,; CONCEPTUAL-PERCEPTION
II (v1thi-vifina~a or vithi-
citta)
(bodhi-citta, mano-vinna~a, or
vipassana)
f
I
I
VISUAL- TAc1uAL- ttNTELtECYuAL
CONSCIOUS?\TSS CONSCIOUS0:ESS CO::\SCIOUSNESS /1 (bodhi or
( ca.1<:khu-viil- (ghana-vifi... (kara-vinria- . sarna tha')
na!}a) na!)-a J '
pa . . I .
I
AUDITORY-CO~SCIOUSNESS GUSTATORY- EHOTIONAL
(sota-vinnaQa) , CONSCIOVS~ESS (vedan~)
(jivha-viflha-
na)
..

~ ....
p
123
, ·~Jana and safl~a as replacements for citta and mana. ~~-
~-~------~----,--------,---

~arising from the ambiguous manner in which theoid

terms were used and the constant creation of new terms by the

Buddha to remedy the matter ~ account for the change. The

-G)\ se~~ ~s the clarification and expansion of saTU{aand its

cy relationship to sankhara. The t~~d is the formation of the

thesis that there exists a considerable source of mental en-

ergy, the ,sankharas, which are stored in the passive con-

sciousness, or vi~~ana, of an individual. To have recognized

this last development represents the crowllIng achievement of

th.e Buddha, his presentation of suffici~nt evidence to prove
thatfthe, concept of mind constitutes a combined function of

all four of the mental aggregates: vedana, sa~na, sankhar~,

and viKnaoa~Since pre-Buddhist Indian literature contains no

reference to the Five Aggregates, they must be considp.red as

preeminently Buddhist 'in origin. 65

65Mon.-Wil. Bud.# pp. 108-108. " '

'-

L
p

CHAPTER III

THE DEPENDENT ORIGINATION:

PA!ICCAS~~UPPADA

The teachings of the Buddha as formulated in the Five Ag-

gregates provided his disciples with the outline of a doc-

trine that became central: to the two schools of Buddhist

thought, Theravada and Mahayana,l whjch develop~d after his

I Mah fivana, or the 'Great Vehicle,' represents the North-

ern branch of Buddhism. Other terms for this school are Bud-
dhayana, Bodhisatvayana, Ekayana, andA~rayana. Tibetan Bud-
dhism (Vajrayana), in turn, is based on a tantric form of
Mahayana Buddhism. The original texts of the Mahayana School
were written in Sanskrit and date from the first century
A. D. The canonical literature of the Theravada School, how-
ever, ',,-as originally \';Ti tten in pali. 1~nereas :,lahayana is
called the rei'ormed church, Theravada is known as the ortho-
dox church.

124

L
p
125
death. The doctrine,. known as p'aticcasamuppada,2, (Skt. Pra-
, -
t3:tyasaTTlutpada), sets forth a complete explanation of the

theory of rebirth, its l.imitationsand causalities, in terms

o~ the previous existence of the individual., In short, i t

deal.s with the recurringreconceptive powers of' the mind.

Paticcasamuppada: the Doctrine as an Entity

The Ii teraJ., meaning of paticcasamuppada may be rendered

'as ·causally collective arising' or 'dependent arising.'

Western scholars are not agreed on a standard definition ex:-

pressing this doc±rine and have used terms such as:

I

causal arising chain of causation

causal genesis collective uprising
causal happening conditional arising
causal law conditional nexus
causal mode conditional uprising
causal origination conditional co-production
causal series conditioned origination
causality dependent origination
causation dependent uprising
chain of categories doctrine-by-the-middle

2 The body of literature on the doctrine of Paticcasamup-

p~da is substantial. For references in pili texts 9 see Vd.
1-); D. II. Jl-63; S5 II. 1-286; Buddha~hosa, Vi~udrthi~a~~a.
Ed. Eenry Clarke ~,'arren. Revi sed by Liharrnananda Kosambi.
(Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1950), pp. 440-
502. (Hereafter cited asVisrn'.) ~ See also 'The Vibharcrrao Be-
ing the Second Book of the Abhidhammapitaka. Ed. C~ A7 F.
Rhys Davids. Pa1i Text Society [PUblications]. (London! H.
Frowde, Oxford rni~"tersityPre5s 'Harchouse, 1904), pp. 135-
92. (Hereafter cited as \~h.)
For references in English translations 6f Buddhist texts
and general literature, see Bl1drthi~m in 'T-r':1pslations, pp.
159-208, Cpd., pp. 259-64; "Pa~icca-5amt!ppada:t" in l::ncyclo-
paedia of Reli~ion and Ethics~ Ed. James Hastings, with the
assistance or' John A" Selbie ••• and other scholars. 1J vols.
(New York: Charles Scribner~s Sons, 1924-27), 9:672-74.
(Hereafter cited as ERE.) See also Hist. Bud. Th~, pp. 58-
70; D .. Tr. II" 42-49.
p

126

:formula of' causal origin origination by dependence of'

:formula of causality one thing on another
:formula of dependent ori- scheme of the twelve nida-
gination nas or causal bases
law of'interdependent ori- theory of. the twelve causes
gination twelve linked chain
wheel of existence

AS in the case of' our previous definitions, we must con-

sider thePa1i term in its context and a1so take into consu1-

tation those PaJ.i terms by which pa!iccasamuppada is approxi-

mated. They are, with their literally translated names: ariy-

aflaya 3 (philosophica1 system of th~ Aryans), idappaccavata: 4

(relatedness of this to that), idappaccayata-paticcasamuppa-

da 5 (relatedness of factors in the process of rebirth), uda-

yabbav"aIiana 6 (knowledge on. arising and, cessation of the f'ac-
•
tors of life)., dhamma 7 (philos~phical'doctrine)JI dhatu 8 (ele-
mentsconditi~ning bhava), dham~atthitata9 (causal status),
dhamma.nivamato. lO (causal.·orderliness),·dhammenau.al1 (know-

ledge in the norm), anvayen'ana12 (knowledge in the order of

3A. v. 184; s. II. 70-71; v. 388 •.

4 S • II. 25.

5n. 11.36; H. I. 167; S. I. 136; Vine I. 5.

6Ud • 38; s. I. 46, 52.
7 S • I. 12; II. 36-37; M. I. 167, 190, 487; II. 3, 172;
s. Ie 35, 136 ; II. 9; Vine I. 4-6, 40.
I 8 S • II. 25.
9 Ibid.
10 Ibid •
lIS. II. 59.
12 Ibid •

I... '
p .- ~-: .

.. -~ - .:-"

127

factors), nidana13 (origination or causation), paCCayakara l4

(method 0:1 causality), andpanrt3.bhumi l5 (bases of wisdom).

The Buddha was aware, however, that his doctrine of De-

pendent Origination16 in its.entirety was complex and pro-

found, and often alerted his disciples to its pitfalls. One

of his utterances on the subject occurs in several Pali

texts: l7

"Adhigato kho my~yal]1 dhammo gambh"iro duddaso duranu-

bodho santo paI]~to atakkavacaro nipuI)o paz:d,.itavedan1'yoe
A1ayar@.ma kho panaya,? paja alcLyara ta ~layas~~udi t~L ~la­
yaramaya kho pana paj@.ya . -alayara t·aya alayasa:udi
. A
t~ya
duddasa9 ida~ ~h~n~~. Yad ida~ idappaccayata pa~iccasam-
u pp1do. Idam pi kho thanam duddasam. Yad idam sabbasankh-
• • • • J

arasamatho sabbupadhipa~~~ggp ta~akkhayo vir~go n1r-

odho nibbanam
,. .
... 18

"It was realized by me [~hatJ this doctrine [was]

profound, difficult to perceive, difficult to under-
stand, tranquil, excellent, ~eyond the sphere of com-
parative thinking, subtle, and to be realized only

13Ibid., 1 ff.; D. II. 55.

14Vbh • 135.

15Vism. 440.

16 For the complete text of the Doctrine of Dependent Or-

igination. see S. II, pp. 1-4; Ud., p. 1; Vine I, pp. 1-2 •
. It is quoted in full in this study in Chapter III, pp. 163-
64.
17D. I. 72; II. 36-37; Me I. 167. 487; II. 172-73; So I.
126; Vine I. 1. 4.

18n.'II.36-J7; No 1.167; s. I. IJ6. For the Sanskrit

Mahayana version~ see Lalita Vistara* Leben und Lehre des
~ikya-Buddha. Text-ausgabe mit varianten-metren-und-w~rter­
verzeichnis von S. Lefmann. 2 vols. (Halle A~ S.: Buchland-
lung des Waisenhauses~ 1902-1908), pp. 386 ff5 (Hereafter
cited as La1. Vist.)
p

128

by those who have realized the Four Noble Truthsl9

(i.e. Arahants). This populace is~ indeed_ delight-
ing in sense pleasures, delighted by sense pleasures,
and rejoicing in sense pleasures. To a populace de-
lighting in sense pleasures9 delighted by sense
pleasures. and rejoicing in sense pleasures, i t is
difficult to perceive this doctrine called Dependent
Origination, the relatedness of this life factor to
that. This too is a matter difficult to perceive,
that is to say, the tranquillizingof all mental kam-
ma formations (sankhara), the full renunciation of
all defilementslunadhi), the destruction of attach-
ment to self_ the destruction of passions. the anni-
hilation of the causes of life, a~d the cessation of
the weaving of life."
(Wr~ Tr.)
But despite the clarity of the Buddha·s language, his c.e-

voted disciple, Ananda, was misled into believing that the

I

doctrine was perfectly comprehensible. Assuming an air of the

utmost seriousness and patience, the Buddha offered this gen-

tle rebuke:

H ••• Atha kho ayasma Anando yena Bhagava ten' upas~­

kami, upasamkamitva
- Bhagavantam. abhivadetva ekamantam n1.- .
.
sidi. Ekamantam n1.S1.nno kho ayasma Anando Bhagavantam et-
ad avoca:
.
19The Four Noble Truths (cattari arivasaccani) are as
follows: (1) T.~e Ariyan Truth abou~ the na~ure of life as a
mass of ill~ as defined in S. Tr. v. 1"'i7 (2) the Arivan Truth
about the arising of ill, as defined i~ S~ ~~. v. 357 (J) the
Ariyan Tru tIl about the ceasing: of ill (S Tr. V. J57), and
0

(4) the Ariyan Truth abol.'lt the practice that leads to the
ceasing of ill, i.e. the Eightfold Xoble Path: right percep-
tion, right conception, right speech, right action, right
·living, rignt efi'ort~ right mindfulflesst right mental compo-
sure. (S. Tr. V. 358). For other references on the Four Ko-
ble Truths, see A. I. 175-76; D. III .. 277; PSe I. 4; s. Vo
414-78; Vbh. 99, 112; Vine I. 10. For additional source ma-
terial on the Eightfold Noble Fa th (Ari vo a tthan.o:iko mar:;£:.9.)
see A. I. 177, 217; D. I. 157; II. 251, 311; N. I. 15, ~9,
299; II. 82; III. 231; Nd. II. 186, 193, 213, 222; Ps. I. 40;
II. 86; S. II. 42-44, 57, 59; III. 158-59; IV. IJJ, 2JJ; V.
8, 347-48, 421, 425; Vbh. 104, 2J5-36; Vine I. 10.

L
 129

'Acchariya? bhante abbhuta~ bhante yava gaJnbhTro cg--

y~ bhante pa~icca-samuppado gambh1r~vabhaso ca. Atha ca
pana me uttanakuttanako viya khayat1ti.-
Ha
h'eva~ Ananda avaca, rna h'eva~ Ananda avaca. Garo-
bh1ro
-
cayarn Ananda paticca-samuppado gambh1ravabhaso ca.
~ ~

Etassa Ananda dhammassa ananubodha appativedha evam ayam . .

paja tantSklilaka-jata gulagu9-thika-jata mun'ja-babbaja-
bhutci apaya.l!l duggatiIp vinipataJIl sal}1sar~20 n~tivattati."
(D. II. xv. 1, p. 55: S. II. xii, 60. 1, p. 92)

20 The literal meaning of samsara is 'faring on with (the

Five Aggregates).' Other meanings include transmigration,
and the cycle of conceptions, births and deaths. The Buddha
said:

"Anamataggoyam bhikkhave samsaro pubbakoti na pa~aya­

ti avijjan'ivarananam sattanarii tanhasamyojananam san-
• J

dhavatam saI!1saratam. It
(S. II. 178-90; III. 149, 151)
"The sa.T..sara, 0 monks, has' no end other than ama-
ta or
ni bbar;a. Tne earlier point of beginning of
beings. who run on and transmigrate from life to
life, being mentally hindered by ignorance of
the Four Noble Truths and mentally fettered by
their attachment to. self,' is not decidedlY
known ....
(Wr. Tr.)
The above passage occurs twenty-eight times in the Anamata~­
gava>~g-a (chapter on an?_r.1ata.~~a) of the Sarrl'vuttanik~~ {II.
178-90) and twice in the nex~ sec~ion (III. 149, 151). Edi-
tions or th0 Pali ~2xt Society, however, transcribe the word
as anamata~~~va~, but in another section of the same work,
the form Cl;-~~:;;:;2:e:-(ntam is used (S. V. 441). Only the latter
appears in th.e Ceyl~n edition. Translators and commen~ators
alike ha~.,,'e misunderstood the structure of anamata{,:p:a lna+am-
~ +a'?:'o;~); according to the rules of sandhi, the form an~:­
mataFg~va~ is in error, for the compound consis~s of anamat-
ar:~o + a:..-a:.>. ~n nJ.. s
T "
a..L.J.. cemmen t ary on ~."e
-,-,-~.
1- ''\-, \"" -
'J.. clnan~,
t'-Ile -,'
v l-
bhabga~~hakatha, B~ddhaghosa equates the word with anta vir-
ahita l'~i~~out end t ) . but his interoretation is con~radicted
in -Pali texts 11Transia tOTS of the V-i bhat\r:-a have a1 so compoun-
ded Buddhaghosa's e::::-ror (Vibh. 45, 134, -:U32, 259, 260) 9 as
have commentators on Sanskri t t>Iahayana texts o The erroneous
form anav2.ra-:>-r~ (vwithout further end') has often been sub-
stituted ror anamrtag-ra (e no other end than am~ta, S
0
i.e. nlr-
vana
)
f ) ..
 p
130

"And the Venerable Ananda went into the presence

of' the Exa1.ted One, bowed in salutation before him,
and sat down at one side5 So seated he said thus to
the Exal ted One:
'Wonderful, lord~ marvellous, lord, is the pro-
fundity of this Dependent Origination and how pro-
£ound i t appears • .~d yet to me i t seems as clear as
clear can be.·
Do not say that, Ananda: Profound indeed is this
Dependent Origination, and profot.!nd indeed i t appears.
It is not through understanding nor realizing this
doctrine that this populace has become entangled like
a ball of string, has become entwined like a ball of
twine, has become like an entangled heap of rnufija
grass and rushes, and does not overpass Samsara (~et­
empsychosis)" which is Prori tless, the Woeful \.jay,
the Downfa~l. the Constant Round of Transmigra.tion."
(Wr. Tr.)
Ananda, however. may be forgiven, for at the time of his

utterance, he was not an Arahant; he attained Arahantship two

months after the Buddha's death, when the First Council con-

vened on the day of the Full Moon, July, 483 B. C. The Bud-

dba, in fact, had previously asserted that only an Arahant

could fully understand the doctrine:

"Aya~ vuccati bhikkhave bhikkhu di~!hisarnpanno i t i

pi. Dassanas~~panno i t i pi. .Agato imarp saddhamma!:!1 iti pi.
Passati imam .
. saddhammam iti pi. Sekh.aya vijjaya samanna-
ga to ·i ti PJ... DhalT'.l7lasotalJ1 samapanno i ti pi. Ariyo nibbedh-
ikapar\rlo i t i pi. Amatadvaram ahacca titthati iti pl:ti."
(S. II. xii. 28. 37, p: 45; xii. j). l8. 21, p. 58;
xii. 49. 6, p. 79)

n • • • He is what we call a brother who has won the

view, won the vision. arrived at this good doctrine,
sees this good doctrine, possesses the wisdom of the
trained man, has won the stream of the Norm, has the
Ariyan insi<;ht of repulsion, stands knocking at the
door of the Deathless."
(s. Tr. II, pp. 34, 42, 55)
Whatever knowledge gained by the close study of the text

of-the Dependent Origination, of its Pali commentaries (atth-

L
 131

akatha), sub-commentaries (tIka), auto-commentaries (ariu;"ika),

of paraphrases, treatises, dictionaries, and translations,

such knowledge is not perceptual, but conceptual. Knowledge 1S

relayed by a combination of' words; when one word is misunder-

stood, th~ whole picture 1S distorted. The whole becomes in-

complete by virtue of a single erroneous part.

Paticcasamupp~da: the Specif'ic Aspects of the Doctrine

In order to explain the conditioning factors that round

out the specifics of his Doctrine of Dependent Origination,

the Buddha devised a f'ormula of twelve words, expressed in

I

eleven short simple sentences. The formula has two parts. The

first~ in which each of the eleven expreSS10ns contained

therein implies 'because of this, arises this,' denotes an

arising order (upnada), while the second, including the same

expressions which imply 'because of the cessation of' this,

ceases this,' denotes the cea~ing order (niroda).

Since the general meaning and the specific princ{ples of

the doctrin2 are closely allied to thS Five Aggregates, any

definition of the former must conform strictly with the lat-

ter~ To arrive at the correct English definition of each of

the twelve caus~l factors, we shall·follow the method used in

the earlier chapters, i.e. list the Pali equivalents of the

'twelve factors, determine their general meanings, their par-

ticular meanings in a given context, evaluate the various

English translations of each factor as represented in indivi-

dual textSt and in the body of canonical literature as a

L
 132

~h~ie, andthen'~stablish what we hold to be the correct Eng-

1ish rendering o·f the terms and texts.

The Twelve Factors

The doctrine of paticcasarnuopada entails the.· embodiment

« -

of twelve c?ricepts. each denoting a factor,condition, or

link in a causal chain which is related to reconception. They

ares (Ar avijja (B)sankhara (e) vinfia!}a (D) namariipa (E)

salayatana (F) phassa (G) vedana un ta:t:lha. (I) upadana (J)

, or .jarama:+anam-soka-parideva
bhava (K) jati (L)· jaramarana,

dukkha-domanassa-upayasa,. Nine· of the preceding fac tors,

which will be discussed in detail at a more appropriate time,

re1ate to the Five Aggregat:e~ and their related concepts.

'!he findings of the seven translators, namely, Basham,21
Horner,22 Jones,2J Kern,24 Rhys Davids,2S Thomas,26 and Wood-

ward 2 7 who have rendered the Dependerlt Origination into Eng-

21Basham, pp. 269-70.

'22 Vine IV. 1.

2J The }!ahavast;u. Translated from th\~ Buddhist Sanskri t

by J. J. Jones. J vols. Sacred Books of the ,Buddhists Series,
vol. 18. (London: Luzac & Co., 1952). (Hereafter cited as
}llivu. Tr.

24Saddharmapundarika. Ed. HendrikKern and Bunyin Nanjio.

(St. Petersbour~~·lmpr. d~ l~Academie imoeriale des sciences,
1912), p. 4 ff. (Hereafter cited as Sadh~up~.)
25S. Tr. II. 1-2.
26H 1St.
"
Bud. Th., p. 70.
27ud. Tr. 1.
\~
 IJJ

lish appear on the table following. Two features of the table

are striking. In the first instance, there is wide similari-.

. ty but little concurrence among Pali scholars as to the in-

dividual meanings of the twelve linki in the chain of causa-

tion that the Buddha included in his formula 6 'Secondly, what-

ever simil-aci..-ty does exist appears to be the resul t of imi-

tation rather than original thought. Due to the misinterpre-

tation of vi~~ana as consciousness, the general meaning of

pa~iccasamuppada is finally lost. Vif1i{a1}a. as previously no-

ted, relates to passive, not active consciousness.

I

To arrive at the correct definition of each of the fac-

tors listed.in Table 14, i t is necessary to examine the gen-

era! and specific usages of each in the canonical literature

of the Buddhists, particularly in those works which contain

the utterances of the Buddha.

A. Avijja

The literal meaning of avi,jja (Skt. avidya) ~s ignorance.

In the first sermon of the Sahvuttanikava, its antonym, vij-

ja, refers to the mental~intellectual illumination of an in-

dividual ilpon his realization of the Four Noble Truths in re-

·
]. a t ~on ....,,0 l ':1. ....+" e. I
\. -
Vl.J.la,
0-
therefore, refers to the absence of

that illumination. In Buddhist sacred literature, its mean-

ing is specific, relating only to ignorance of the Four Noble

Truths. The words of the Buddha confirm this v~ew:

UKatama ca bhikkhave avijja. y~ kho bhikkhave dukkhe

anllanam dukkhasamudaye anflanam dukkhanirodhe annana.m
I'- .. • 1 lifo ...

L
r-
(-
'.~' "'
':;;::
\1l
til
TABLE 14 P'
1-"
l::!
(Jt)
PATICCASAHUPPADAI TRANSLATIONS OF ITS-TWELVE'FACTORS
_.v._. - - __. . __.......H._ .n-
, iF;;to; B-~~ha;--~ "I1~~;e~-:'-'"
-- "---',-" .
-'Jone s . r - ..- .- " . o
.l::! ..,
Kern Rhys Davids, Thomas- Woodward:
•
-
.
t:J
1. ayjj.i~. __~G:~'l!!~ i.rr!!or"':!2.~~J-rr!lorancc iJI!!9_rl1nc e ip;norance i..en.9.!'anc..Q_ Jgn.Q~a.rtQJL o
2 sanl<ha- imag'ina- halli tual saml(haras conceptions activities a ggre(~a te s, activities
-, ----;- -,;:1'-;1"::.----
1'<1 t i. on tendencies
-.._-. -. -..'--
~""'--'
or ftlocies comnollnds
:3 Vl.TlI1ana s(~lf-con- conscious- conscious- di g't-irlC ti w. conscious- COlHiC10U9- conscious-
• SC1.OUS- . ness ness k:1.o~-Il edGe, ness ness ness .~ 7-,
ness jucJ{~men t,
I understan-

li ilil.maru- n,-liilc and psycho .. Imhvldu...

din~
name and name and name and mind and
.
pa forni, cor... phY'sicali- ality, form shape form, mind body
poreal ex- ty nanie and and body·
, - - - - -i.stence
".._---_. form
"5 sal9.ya-
•
. S:LX sen- SlX sonse Sl.X sense six senses sense six sense six sense,
tana 50S spheres functions and their organs spheres
._--_.---- ._-- _QQ~cts W "'.t:""
"6 .r.hassa contact aHarencss contact contact contact contact contact ....
7 vedo.na 'feci l.Ilg, f\~e1in~~ fe(~ling sensation feeling feeling fee11.ng
-B tanl1a
clllotion
.._-- .
craVl. l1 rr
-~ ...
CraV1l1IT
.
crav1ng longln[~ craving ·thlrst, craV:lng ~
• ,

- cravinr,- ~.
"9 upadana att'aclllo6nt -grasping g-raspl.ng strlvlng, graspl.ng grasp10g graspl.ng p.
§:
taking up 1-'-
lC bhava bccomin[,~ becoming cornine to existence becoIn1.ng becoffil.ng. becom1ng ,~
be conception •
IT ·]t'itJ. relnrth bl.rth birth biri:fi---- birth . 'bIrth bIrth
'.,..----;-r
L? Jara- all the old al'~'e. old aee, 0] d ag'e, old age, ol<rage, oIa age,
marana u
manifold dea th, 501'- death, 1a- death, mou- death, 1amen- death. death, 1a-
ills that ro,.f, grief, mentation, rninf~' lam- tation, suf- mentation,
flesh is 1 amen 1;a- g-rief, de- entation, ferinf!, sor- suffering,
heir to tion, sllf~ spair, sorro\i, row, despair sorrow,
ferin{~', de- ills, tri- dismay, de- despair
_ . jt~cti()n bulation ,~Eondency _. \".J-
o
H;

\J-
 135

dukkhanirodhagaQi.nirt~ya .pa'fipadaya afhl~~at;J. Ay~ vuccati

bhikkhave avijja. u
. (S: II. xii. 2. l5,p, 4)

"And what, 0 Monks, is ~gnorance? What, 0 Monks,

is known as the absence of realization of suffering,
the absence of realization of the arising of suffer-·
ing, the absence of the realization of the ·cessation
of suffering, and the absence of the realization of
the way that leads to the cessation of suffering,
thi~ is cal.l.ed ignorance."
(llr. Tr.)
Here the Buddha refers to the insurmountable difficulty"
confronted by the .individual whose c:onceptual. understanding

is not sufficiently forceful. to lead him into the Eightfold

Noble Path. 28 The mi.nima1 understanding. which he possesses
is of little help in motivating him to-subjugate his attach-

ment to life and its sense pleasure to higher. ideals. Therein

lies the relationship of avij"j"a. to ta1)hii, whose precise mean-

ing will be discussed later. For the present, however, tapha

may be considered in terms of physical attachment, the major

defilement that blinds or misleads the ordinary individual in

~ his search for an understanding of the Four Noble Truths. Av-

ijja is merely another appellation or synonym for tayha, the

factor that distorts thoughts and turns them into· sankharas,_

upadanas, or karnrnas. Paranormal mental powers, such as clair-

voyance and reminiscence (of past life or lives) are the na-
tural outcomes" of a mind which is free of avijja. In the·can-
onical texts, the undefiled mind is often compared to a lake

of undisturbed, crystal-clear water, water so pure that ob-

28Cf. note 19.

 jects that lie at the bottom are yisible. 29 Thus Buddhas and

Arahants are infallible and incorruptible, for they have

shed their attachment to worldly objects'and to thoughts

which cloud the perceptive and conceptive powers of the mind.

Although sankhara has been discussed in Chapter I I in

oonnection with the Five Aggregates, a word on its consistent

usage by the Buddha is in order. In the twelve-fold formula

of the pa iiccasamuppada doctrine the concept retains its or··

iginal mea~ing, an aspect tif the mind which has been distor-
i
ted by avijja or tal]ha.·The Madhupi;;.gika formula previously

quoted gives; emphasis 1;0 the ge.neraJ. substance of sankharasll

a combination of conceptions f:ormed from perceptions: Yam

.q.edeti tam sa.1tianati! ,ram sari'janati tam vitakketi, yam vit-

akketi tam paoa~ceti, said the apostle Mahakaccana, or, '.What

one perceives, one conceives; what one conceives, one logic-

,,
ally compares; what one logically compares, one turns into

mental kamma formations.· Upon hearing these words from his

monks, the Buddha praised his apostle in this manner:

.... e
..
Partcti t*o' bhikkhave Hahakaccano, mahapafii'{o bhik-
kh-ave Hahakacdino. Han -ce pi tumhe bhikkhave etam-attham
pa1:ipuccheyyatha~ aham-pi tam evarn-evam byakareyyam yatha
tam Haha:kaccanena byakatam, eso c' ev' etassa attho, evan-
ca nam dha:rethati. tt
(H. I. 2. 8. 18, p. 114)

29A. I. 9; III. 26, 396; D. '1. 74, 84; M. I. 276-77, 279;

II. 15-16, 22; III. 9J; Sn. 467.
 137
"Learned, monks, is Kaccana, the Gre.at, of great
wisdom is Kaccana the Great. For if' you, mortks, had
questioned me as to this meaning, I too would have
explained it, precisely as i't 'vas explained by Kacca-
na the Great. Indeed. th£s is the exaxt meaning of'
that, and thus should; you understand it. It '
(M. Tr. I, 'p. 147)
The definition of sankhara as f'ound in the Madhupil]gika-

sutta was also made the subject of three discourses (Nos. 38-
40) of the Buddha that appear in the Nidanasamyutta (Book on

Origination) of the samvuttanikaya:

"Yartca kho bhikkhave ceteti yan ca pakappeti yanca
,anuseti ••.,." 30
(s. II. xii. 38-40, pp. 65-67)
"What, mortks, one perceives, 'what one conceives-
(out of them), and what one ~ransforms into sankhar-
~ ,(out of' the~) ••• ft
(llr. Tr.)
Another passage points to the exact simil.,arity of' the

meaning of' the concept as used ~n the Five Aggregates and

the Dependent Origination:

, . "Katame c:a bhikkhave sankhara. Tayo me bhikkhave san-
khara kayasankharo vac'isankharo cit;tasahkharo. Ime vucca-
nti bhikkhave sankhara."
(5. II. ~ii. 2.14, p.,4)
"What, monks, are the merital kamma-formations?
There are three kinds of mental k~mma-formations,
'/-monks, to ~it, psycho-physical kamma-formations, psy-
~ho-vocal kam~-formations, and purely mental kamma-
formations. L~ese, monks, are called mental kamma-
formations."
(Vir. Tr.)
That the exact role of sankhara ~n the life cycle and

30Anuseti ~s the denominative verb derived from th~ noun

anusava, a synonym of sankhara. As an infinitive, the liter-
al meaning or the verb is fto form anusavas or sankharas.-

L
 1,8
rebirth process has been misinterpreted by our seven scholars
is not surprising. Their renderings for" the concept: imagina-
tion, habitual tendencies, activities, conceptions, aggre-,
gates, conative ideas, mental activi~:i es, and volitional ac-
tivi ties, Show no rel'ationships or distinctions, between saTtkh-

ara and related concepts. In the pal.i texts, for instance,

kayakamrna, vacikamma, and manok~ma31 also appear ,as kavasan-

I khara, 'vac1sahkhara, and c'i ttasa£lkhara respecti'vely. Kamma is

used synqnymously with sankhara. All sankharas are actions,

I but all actions are not sankharas. .Kamma not onl.y applies to
,

I •
good act10ns (
kusa1a , or pur..na
rJ,.) ) •
but to evil or bad act10ns

I (akusa1a or nana) as well, the, psycho-physical, psycho-vocal,

and mental actions whose ,mot~vations have been soiled by ~­
ijja or ta~a. The effects or reactions (vipaka) produced by

a specific sankhara, therefore, appear in the life of an in-

dividual either as a pleasant or unpl~asant change in his to-
., tal. persona1i ty. His future existence afi;er rebirth is also

affected by the changes which occur during his previous life.

For these reasons, saflkhara must be defined as mental karrJTIa-

formations, for all sankharas are mental in natUre (cetana 32

or cetasika).

3 1 A• I. 32, 65, 104, 106, 293-94; II. 69-70, l35-J6, 237-

38, 252, 261-62; III. 1J2, 288-89; D. III. 245, 279-80; M. I.
373, 415, 420; II. 27 ff.; III. 207.
j2 Cf. A. III. 415: Cetanaharn bhikkhave kammam vadami; ce-
tayi tva J.::a!:'1mam karo ti kayena vacaya manasa. • ~lonks, I pro-
I claim kamma'as ceta;}a; having thought, one does kamma through
body, speech and mind. t (l;r. Tr.)
, ~,

l.
 139
As we have "preViously pointed out, however, a fine dis-

tinction must be made between the destinies of ordinary men

and those who have attained enlightenment. All mental actions
are not sankharas, and it is in this area, perhaps, that
scholars have given undue credence to man's natural inclina-
. tion to prefer good over evil. Mental actions called kiriyas
,are known only to extraordinary men. Kiriyas remain long af-
ter the influence of sankhara and kamma has fled. Only ,the

perfect achieve this reward.

I
The third factor which affects the process of rebirth,

.vififiana,. also is used in the same context in the Dependent

Origination as in the Five Aggregates. Sufficient evidence

wa!S produced concerning its correct meaning as a specific
"
!erm,namely, passive consciousness,' or sub-consciousness; a
.---
.-

:finition was given by th~ Buddha in three discourses (Nos.

38-40) of the Nidanasarrrvutta of the, S3.mvuttanikava:

"YaI\ca kho bhikkhave ceteti yaIi ca pakappeti yaI\ca
anuseti. Aramma~am eta~ hoti vi~~a~assa ~hitiya. Aram-
matte sati patit'tha viiinanassa hoti ••• It
·(S. II. xii. 38-40, pp. 65-67)

"What. monks, one perceives!' what one conceives,!

and what one transforms into sankharas, this mental
object is for the existence of passive-conscious-
ness. The mental object being there, there comes to
p
140
be a resting place of passive consciousness ••• If /.

(Wr. Tr.)
The above translation shows how inadequate the word 'con-

sciousness· would be for vifU'iara. Inherent in the words of

the Buddha is an exposition of two kinds of passive conscious-

-----~-----------.-

~. The ~t, appati~thita-vinna~aJJ pertains only to a

Buddha or an Arahant::, for i t has no pati~tha, or resting

p1ace for a future ovum (namartina). Past memories and sarJ<h-

aras, now 1;urned to kiriyas, have been obli terated. The en-

1ightened cmes have passed beyond the tortures of' rebirth and

have attained eternal peace. The passive consciousness of the

/Qx., ,
less worthy, on the~th1r hand, goes forward. '[tlree term_s de-

fine its progress: ~tisandhi v~rlana', or the relinking of the

passive consciousness of a dead being to the fertilized ovum

in a mother's womb at the time of conception; vihnaJ;la,bhav-
Q,
anga, or bhavangavi~~;a~a, the state of passive consciousness
.
that eX1sts .
dur1ng.v ~h
e l"t'
1 e-span 0 f an 1ndO1V1°d ual; an d cuGJt:,o1-
0

vifi~a~a,the state of passive consciousness which appears at

V d)
the moment of death .. The latter is also called patitthita-
'viIiilaua, for past memories and sankharas of the pass1ve con-

sciousness continuum have furnished another new resting

place. The J.ife cycle continues in this manner until true

enlightenment is achieved •

.The Buddha analyzes vifif'laya 1n all its phases 1n the fol-

10wing passage from the Samvuttanik~va:

JJ n • 1110 105; Se I. 122~ II. 66, 10J; III~ 54.

p

141

"Katamanca bhikkhave vifi~a~a~. Chayi~e bhikkhave vi~­

t{anakaya~ Cakkhuvinhanal11 sotavinftaQaJTl ghanavif1f1anam jiv-
ha~i~~ar.a~ kayavi~~a~~~' manovifina~a~. Idap vuccati'bhik-
khave viiiriaI}a~."
(8. II. xii. 2. 13, p. 4)

"What, 0 monks, is passive consciousness? There

are, 0 monks~ six phases of passive consciousness:
passive consciousness activated through eye, passive'
consciousness activated through ear, passive con-
sciousness activated through nose, passive conscious-
ness activated through tongue, passive consciousness
acti va ted through body, and passive consci ousn"ess ac-
tivaked through the mental organs (heart and brain).
That, 0 monks, is called vififial)aj"
(Wr. Tr.)
While common interpretations of passive consciousness em-

phasize the state of the min4 in deep ~leep, o~ in a comatose

or epileptic state, there is an ~nterm~iate mental p1ane be-

tween passive and active cOnsciousness. This is the area of

dreams, which lies on the fringes of sleep and being awake.

bOY-'~' ::} (>2
,In deep meditation, the meditator consciously experiences

passive consciousness. In these states, only the sense of

mind
"'-------
is involved; i t 1. 5 only when passi VJ:! consciousnes s comes

into contact through the six senses with their respective

tion, or perceptual knowledge),' pr9.ggces direct or immediate

j
knol.;l edge.

D. NamarUpa

As previously stat~d 1n the discussion on runa 1n Chap-

ter II, nama, in the compound form namarupa pertains to ~-

. dana, san'ria, sarlkhara. and vif'inana p or perceptions, concep-

;

tions, mental k~mma-formations, and passive consciousness as

p

142
-
in the Five Aggregates. In the Dependent Origination, howev-
er, nama, as an independent member, of the compound, must' be

defined as passive consciousness, while rZipaloses its thrust

as the physical body of an'animate being, and becomes the

'fertilized' ovum. Thus the compound relates to ~he merging of

the passive consciousness of one being immediately after its'

,physical death ... with the fertilized ovum in a mother's womb

~~-

which has just been conceived. Other terms for the concept

are reconception, becoming, or relinking.

In a passage from the Samyuttanikaya, the Buddha defines

namarGpa in these. words:

"Kata.ilar\~a bhikkhave namaruparn. Vedana sanna cetana

phasso manasikaro. Idamvuccati nam~. Cattaro ca maha-
bhiita catl.lnnartca mahabhiitanaIJl upadaya rUpatpe Idam vuccati
riiPalF. Iti idan ca namarp idari ca riipatn_ Idam vuccati na-
rnariipaIJl· tt
(s~ II. X11. 2, pp. 3-4)

"What, 0 monks, is narnaru.pa'? [Passive conscious-

C';pe,§!~L_'!{i:tb
i:t;..s-d:~'±~J perceptions, conceptions,
'sankharas or kar.;;nas, sense impressions or memories •
CsccfiW --P-~~i_y_eo_.c_Qn.s_~i QU s n e~.~_.,.~!~.~~.f...,~~~.,,_ t~~}:E~E~§J:j, Dg~"
/~~~d.e.p.osij,..9J-Y:;. this is called nama. Four ~reat
elements (earth, -'. . ater, heat, and air), and the four
a~pects derived from them (COlour, odour, taste, and
nutritive essence), this is called runa. Thus this
nan~a and this runc;t' (in combination), this is called
n~maru:oa. It

(Wr. Tr.)
Here the Buddha has carefully arranged the words of his

concept to convey the meaning of namar~Da bo th in the IJi ve

Aggregates and the Dependent Origination. While cetah~- refers

v
to sankharas or kammas, phassa refers not to contact~ but to

memories q,s mental impressions. Hanasi.k~b:al'1.ogically enough,

p

10ses the flavor of its literal meaning, t.keepingor deposit-

\ ing in mind,' and becomes a synonym for ~ as the store-

house of vedanas, safinas, cetanas, and phassas. The Buddha

has· ~xpre3sed, in other words, the true fun"ction of nama and

rfipa as the act whereby,· at the exact moment of death, the

. (~~ifffia!1a of an individual, along with its accumulation of ag-

Pgregates, enters the fertilized ovum of another.

In thrE~e discourses (Nos. 38-40) of the Sarnyuttanikaya,

the Buddha enlarges upon the gradual and orderly process of

change that takes place during the life cycle of an individ-

ual. Perceptions first become conceptio~s, "then become kamma-

formations" which in turn lead to the growth of a depo.si tory

in the passive consciousness. The point of culmination is

"', ~\ Pb''''')\'
reached when passive consciousness enters the rebirth pro-

cess:

"Yaflca kho bhikkhave ceteti yai'i ca pakappeti yaIica

anuseti. Aramrna1}aIn eta.lJ1 hoti vin-na~assa ~hitiya. Aramma-
~e sati pati!~ha vi~na~assa hoti. Tasmi~ patifthite vi~­
~a!le viruJ-he ayatim punabbhavabhiriibbatti hoti •. Ayatim
punabbhavabhinibbattiya sati ayatim jaramara~a!TI sokapa-
ridevadukkhadomanassupayasa sambhavanti. Evam etassa ke-
valassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti."
. (S. II. xii. 38-40, pp. 65-~7)

"Honks, what one perceives, what one conceives,

and what one transforms into mental kamma-f'ormations,
this mental object (so formed) works for the persis-
tence of passive consciousness. Yhen that mental ob- \ v
ject is. there, the resting place for the passive con-
sciousness is formed. ~nen that pass~e conscious-
ness is established and gro'ffl, re~ion in the
form of namar1'ina takes Dlace in the future (·after the
death of the individual). Wben the future reconcep-
t~on occurs~. future ~iHty"~) R.J:ath~ sorrow, lamenta-
t10n, suffer1ng, despa1r and deJect10n take place.
i 0",,) 5&; Ii..\; ~

de!~ , 'h~4u:. '~-rJ

,.
t 144

Thu·s occurs the arising of' this who1e mass of suffer-

ing. ' f
(Wr •. Tr.)

The function of the combination of mind and body (nama-

FllE~' b
bhava. or punabhava) J'q. after the death of an individua~
• 1(

is exp1ained in stil1 greater detai1 in the Mahata~hasankha-

yasutta (Great Discourse on the Destruction of Craving) of'

the Majjhimanikaya:

nTiI}1}am kho pana khikkhave sannipata gabbhassavakkan-

ti hoti: Idha matapitaro ca sannipatita honti, mataca na
Utun1 hoti, gandhabbo ca na pa(~cupatthito hoti, n' eva
tava gabbhass'&vakkanti hoti. Idha matapitaro ca sannipa-
tita honti, mata ca utun1 hoti, gandhabbo ca na paccupa-
..
tthito hoti, n' eva tava gabbhass~vakkanti hoti. Yato ca
kho bhikkhave matapitaro ca sannipatita honti, mata ca
Utun1 hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupatthito hoti, evam tinnam
.
sannipa t-a gabbhass~v~kkanti hoti:;'
-~-

(M. I. 38, pp. 265-66)

"Honks, conception takes place on the conjunc-
tion of__thr:e-e--thi-ng-s.-... Suppose mother and father have
come toge ther [in intercourse J, but the moth~d} s_
__
~LL~2j:: ready [lor pregnancy], and (the pas ~e
_COns.c~.Dl!snes~J of a dead being ready to enter a fert-
i1ized ovum is not present, for so long, conception
does not take ~lace. Suppose mother and father have
corne together iin intercoursel. and the mother f's
body] is now r;ady [for nregnincy], but the pas;ive
consciousness separa~ed fro~ the body at the death
of a being [is] not ready to enter the fertilized
ovum; for so long, conception dOE~S not take place.
But@if, monks, coi t}l;~ take s pl§-c e bet",een the_par- )
~s, and ~~thebs (1 _ .
_1:.e.a.dy L to conceive],
•
and the
g a n dha boa LD a _~_Sl-V-B- ... CJ:)j}-,,'2.Q.lcQ_ld.~JJ.e.s.s}-_l-_-"?_ a 1 ~p-r_esent,
, I ..

then only concention - . takes

.olace in th-r-s manner on ,.
the conjunc tio~ of these three tr,lings."
(Wr. Tr.)

, 34Punabbhava (Skt. ounarbhava) literally means 'rebecom-

ing,' or treconception.'lhe Pali word for rebirth is puna-
ruppatti, a term never used in the Pali canonical texts.
p

The Buddhais use of gandhabba 35 (Skt. gantavya, or -rea-

dy to enter') as the equivalent ofvifffiana, or the passive

consciousness that enters the ovum, 'and of nama, the first

, '

e1ement of namarGpa is indicative of'his intention to equate

the latter with truL~iyi.ng__ emhl::yo. Aside from this, the Bud-
0\~p.."".'0\.
dha recognized the importance of stressing the fact that~

V ~o~tion, as a,mind-b~dy combination, can take place un-

less the passive consciousness of another being is available
J .,;,c:'"
to the fertilized ovum. Since the act of ~ is purely
physical, the parents of the newly conceived child could be
I
held'responsible only for its rtipa; a suitable explanation
of mind in its ear~iest form, passive consciousness, thus,

-----------
comd be found 1n outside forces not directly connected with
'
V
the embryo. These forces provided the passive mental state"
in which the embryo. devoid of the sense organs necessary to
produce an active mental state, must necessarily remain. The

embryo is_:tJ.:~ generate vedana, safiria:, or sankhara be-

cause its sense organs are not grown. ~ t~new born

-----
chi1d, although the product of its parents, whose genes may
o
"

35In his commentary, Buddhaghosa interprets ~andhabba as

tatTUuakasatta, or $a being who is coming into the womb .. ' H.
A., p. 253. :,"ijesel(ara suggests that p;a1'1dhabba means ia sam-
saric bein~ in the inter:nedia t~ sta te" ( bet,{een death and
birth).' o. H. de A .. Wijesekara, "Vedic Gandharva and Pali
Gandhabba," Ce-';.rlon Pniv'""rsitv R,evie", J, 1:1-10 (April.
1954). See also ;·i. Tr. 1.. 321. no;;e 6. In the Kara~1yametta-
sutta of the Khuddakaoatha, and in the Suttanipata, ~andhabba
is introduced as saillbhavesI, or -the seeker of co~ception.a -
Khp. 8 f Sn. 147.

l
p

146
or may not affec t i.ts mental development la ter, rep~e-s'eni;s- in
----- V
reality a combination of all the forces, good and bad. which

have had an affect on its previous existences. These consid-

erations were based first upon a universal moral law. i.e.

man's belief in the superiority of good over evil, and secon-

dly upon a continuous pattern of life on earth and in other

planes of existence as seen by the Buddha.

E. -Sal"ayatana
- L - _ _ __

Sataya'~ (Skt. ;;agayatana) l.S derived from the Pali ~

(six) and ~tvatana (fields, bases, organs, or faculties).J6

The concept represents the final stage qf the embryo (nama-

rupa) in which the 1'oetus or zygote emerges from the mother's

,
womb with six fully developed sense bases or fields. The most

meaningful interpretation of its usage in the Dependent Ori-

gination, therefore, is 'birth,,' In this sense i t l.S S}'"nony-

mous with j~ti, a concept which will be discussed presently.

Other Pali equivalents of salavatana and jati are uppatti,

- $ ...

"'/

abhinibbatti, nibbatti, nikkhanti (all meaning ·coming out'),

khandha-patubhava (appearance of aggregates), indriya-pa"!:i-

tibha (gaining of sense organs), and sa~jiti (birth together

wi th senses) '.
Saliyatana, as used in the "Dependent Origination, applies

not only to the six sense bases, but to the incident of birth,

3 6 The Pali sa~ayatanat anala~ous to the Sanskrit ~a9ayat­

~ is a compound consis~ing of cha+avatana. The Pali 'I'
is an augment~ while the Sa~skrit'd'-is a SUbstitute for the
. of ·sat.·
original ft' . . .
>
147
at which time the sense organs" commence to function. Birth is

the beginning of an individual's conscious relationships with

"himself and with the outside world. The six psycho-physical

sense organs through :which he gains aGquaintanceship with hi s

environment"and which convert passive consciousness to active

I

consciousness are, as mentioned above (1) the eye, or visual

organ (2) the ear, or auditory organ (3) the nose, or olfac-

tory organ (4) the tongue, or gustatory organ (5) the body,

or tactile organ, and (6) the heart and brain, recognized

". collectively as the mental organ.

The following analysis of safayatana appears 1n the Sam-

yuttanikaya of the Suttapitaka:

"Katarnaftca bhikkhavesalayatanam. Cakkhayatanam sota-

yatan~ ghanayatan~ jivhay~tana~ k~yayatanap mana;atan-
am. Idam vuccati bhikkhave salayatanarp."
. - ~ (S. II. xii. 2. 11, p. 3)

And what, brethren, ~s si-:cfold sense? The sense

of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, mind. This is called
sixfold sense."
(S. Tr. II, p. 4)

Thus namarupa represents the growing seed and sa:J-ayatana

the growing plant. As a seed grows in a fruit nourished by

the mother tree, so the embryo grows in a womb nourished by

its mother. As a seed manifests its potentials upon contact

with the external world, so does the zygote. The difference

between the inanimate plant and the animate being rests upon

the type of nourislli~ent that each receives. The former grows

on kabaliI\kara, i.e. material food (solid, liquid, air) only,

-J
while the latter is nourished by kabalinkar?-, J2l:lassa, manosan-
p ".'

148
cetana, and viTi'5ana,.aspects of mind which require the pre-.
sence of the sense organs. Like animate beings, plants live,

grow, bear fruit, and die, but lacking sense fac.ulties,·they

are unable to think or perceive.

F.Phassa

The 1i teral meaning of" phassa (S~t·. spar~a) is.., contact'

or 'touch.' In the context of the Dependent Origination, how-

'".- .
ever, i t assUmes the meaning of sensory impression or sensory

impingement, for i t refers to the contact prov~ded by the

sense organ, the sense object, and sense consciousness. The

manner in which 'phassa is oibtained by means of the six senses
is described in the following abridged passage, previously

quoted in full, from the MadhupiQdikasutta of the Majjhirna-

nikaya:
..... Cakkhu~-c' avuso paticca rup~ ca uppajjati cakkhu-
vi·nfianam,
."
tinnam
t •
sangati phasso ••• Sotan-c' avuso pat- •

icca sadde ca uppajjati sotavihna9a~ - pe - ghanan-c'

avuso pa~icca gandhe ca uppajjati ghanavinna~~ - jiv-
han-c' a"lluso pa~icca~ase ca ~ppajja ti jivhaviiUia1}al1l. '7'
kayaft-c' avuso paricca pho~1=habbe cauppajjati kayavin'-
na~a~ - manan-c' avuso paticca dhamrne ca uppajjati rnano-
viJifianarn, tinnam sangati phasso. tI
. , ~.. (M. I. 18, pp. 111-112)

"Because of the eye and visual forms, brethren,

there arises visual consciousness, the meetin! of
the three is sensory impression ••• Because of the
ear and sounds, brethren, there arises auditory
consciousness, the meetin~ of the three is sensory
impression - because of the nose and odours, breth-
ren, there arises olfactory consciousness, the
.. meeting of the three is sensory impression - be-
cause of the ton~~e and tastes. brethren, there ar-
ises gustatory consciousness, the meeting of the
three is sensory impression - because of the body
and touch, brethren, there arises tactile con-
p

sciotisness9 the meeting of the three is sensory im-

pression - Because of the mind and mental objects,
brethren, there arises mental perceptual conscious-
ness, the meeting of the three is sensory impression."
(Wr. Tr.)

The above citation shows that phassa is the means by

which active consciousness is obtained and provides the sen-

sory impressions through which an individual enjoys contact

and relationship with the external world. ~owever, its close

relationship to sa}ayatana or jati must be emphasized. The

individual's progress from birch to birth is explained 1n

full 1n the ~ahanidanasutta of the DIghanikaya, where nama-

rupa 15 followed by phassa, and sa:piya tana is omi tted, pro-

bably because i t 1S so. closely relate.d.

G. Vedana

This term has been previously discussed in connection

with the Five Aggregates and there defined as sensory experi-

ence. The only noticeable difference in its usage in the De-

pendent Origination 1ies in its grouping with sarS.£'ia, where i t

pertains to both perceptions and conceptions. An excellent

analysis of vedal}a, in the context of both bodies of teaching

is found 1n the Sarhvu.ttanikava. In the passage which follo,-ls,

vedan~ refers to sense experience, which ultimately develops

into sa~~~s derived from the SlX sensory impressions:

"Ka tama ca bhikkhave vedana. Chayime bhikl{have vedan-

~k~yi. Cakkhu-samphassaja vedan~. Sotasamphassaj~ vedan~.
Ghanasamphassaja vedana. Jivhasamphassaja vedana. Kaya-
samphassaja vedana. 1>1anosamphassaja vedana. Ayam vuccati
bhikkhave vedana. ct
p. J)
 1:50
"And what, brethren, is perception (that develops
into conceptions)? There are, brethren, these six
groups of perception: sense experience born of eye
contact, sense experience born of ear contact, sense
experience born of nose contact g sense experience
born of tongue contact, sense experience born of body
contact, sense experience !:lorn of mind contact. This,
brethren, is called vedana, i.e. perception or sense
eXperience (developing into conceptions)."
(Wr •. Tr.)

In the absence of a sense impression (.E,hassa), or a mee.t-:-

ing of sense-organ, sense-object, and sense consc~ousnessJ a

sense experience cannot occur. When such an experience does

take place, however, i t can be one that is pleasant (sukhave-

dana), painful (dukkhavedana), or neither painful nor pleas-
ant (adukkharnasukhavedana). Pleasant sensations are often the

result (vipaka) of earlier meritorious mental kamma-forma-

tions (atI'ta-kusala-saTIkhara), while p3.inful sensations are
derived from earlierdemeritorious kru"nma-formations (akusala-

sa~hara). Sensations which are neither pleasant nor unpleas-

ant, on the other hand, are mere actions (kiriya) which are

unable to produce an effect. Greed and ill-will, or hatred.

may affect the individual who experiences kusala and akusala-

sankharas. Both kusalas and akusalas as sankharas lead to il-

lusion. Greed (lobha), hatred (dosa), and delusion (rooha), in

turn, represent the facets of self-attachment (ta::;ha). The re-

lationship between vedana and ta~ha has been previously esta-

blished in context wi th the 1'1adhupi!).dika formula r however,

ta~.can affect the sense experiences and thoughts of an in-

dividua1 only when these experiences have reached the vedana

and sanna stages& There is sufficient evidence in Pali com-

p

1.51
mentaries to establish the use of' vedana both as perception
and concepti~n. Buddhaghosa's commentary on the D"1ghanikaya J7

points to the use of' the concept in the Dependent Origina-

tion in reference to all. f'our of the mental. aggregatelS, ve-

H.- Tal:tha

Tanha
. (Skt. tr~~a; Avestan. tar~na)
--,~--
1S perhaps the most

comp1ex of the twe1ve factors under discussion. Al though i t~1

1.iteral. meanings arel.isted in the dictionary of' the Pali

Text Society as drought and thirst, and its figurative mean-

ings as craving, hunger, excitement, greed, and the fever of

Fsatisfied l.onging,_its phil.osophical implication stresses
thirst for sel.f or greedy attachment to sel.f. As expl.ained

previousl.y, tar-ha and avijja are synonymous.

Tanha, with-its el.ements of deep greed (lobha), deep hat-

T

red (dosa), and dark i11.usion (moha), is the state of mind

that first soil.s perceptions and conceptions and then turns

them into sankharas, or mental kamma-formations. During the
:tife span of an individual., tanha spreads disaster. Its pre-

sence distorts right view' (sammaditthi) and right thought

(sammasankappa) concerning life; it induceS. the individual to

observe the world through selfish eyes and to act accordingly.

J7Buddhaghosa, Su.:n~f"1galavilasinl; or§ The Commentary of

the DTghanik3:~..c:- of" the Su eta pi !:alca. Ed. Heyyan tuduwe Dhamma-
ki tti Siri Devami tta ~-2aha thera. LPali in Sinhalese Script].
Simon Hevavitarne Bequest, vol. 4. (Colombo: The Tipitaka
Public~ti?n Press, 1918). (Hereafter cited as D. A.)
p

l.52

. In the doctrine of the Four Nobl.e Truths, tanha is in":'

f

troduced as the second truth (dukkhasamudaya-ariyasacca).

According to the Buddha, i t is the most damaging and danger-

ous of the twe1ve mental. factors. All the woes of the wor1d
and the miseries of an individual 1ife can be traced to its

pres~nce. Whether an individual merel.y controls it, or with

the assistance of mundane and supramundane jhanas 38 (Skt.

t hOnk'
to t:1 , -
dhyana, 'th°nk°
~ ~ng .) , °
.l..e. forms of ecstatic
stages in meditation, whether an extraordinary personage 1n-

hibits or attenuates it, its effect remains all-powerful un-

•
til. i t 1S totally eradicated. It is eradicated by the master
and the disciple Arahant who have experienced enlightenment

In the first sermon of the Samyuttanikaya, the Buddha

establishes the interdependency of ta~ha and the Second No-
\

ble Truth in these words:

"Idam kho pana bhikkhave dukkhasamudayam ariyasac-

caw- Yay~ taQha ponobbhavika nandi ragasahagata tatra
tatrabhinandin~. Seyyathidatp. Kamatat:lha bhavataI).ha vibh-

(s. V. Ivi. 2. 6, p. 421)

nThis, 0 monks, 1S the Aryan truth of the arising

of suffering. It is this craving that causes recon-
ception, that is endowed with lure and lust, and
that lingers longingly now here and now there, name-

,sn. T. Suzuki, Zen Buddhism: Selected ~ritin~s. Ed$ Wil-

liam Barrett. Doubleday Anchor Books. tGarden City, N. Y.:
Doubleday & Company"!, 1956), po vii. In Buddhism there are
four mundane jha:<as related to form and four related to form-
lessness. All eight are to be developed in the supramundane
state.
 l.53
lyp the craving for sensual. p1easures,. the craving
for name, fame, position, and status, and the crav-
ing for property and possessions."
(lir. Tr.)
Again, 1n the Anguttaranikaya, the Buddha introduced the

concept as dukkhasamudava-ariyasacca and explains it, in its

arising order as paticcasamuppadaz

N , •
"Kataman ca bhikkhave dukkhasamudaya~ ar1yasacc~?
AviJj~-paccaya. sarikhar&, sailkhara-paccaya vinnana!D,
vifiha~a-paccaycl namarupatp. namarupa-paccaya sa-!ayatan~,
sa~a.yatana-paccaya phasso, phassa-paccaya vedanft, vedana-
.A t a nh1>
paCCay4 .... ,,~ -'"
,a, taVha-paccaya ·'d.....
upadana~, upa ana-paccaya
/\

bhavo, bhava-paccaya jati, jati-paccaya jar~ara!la~ so-

kaparidevadukkhadomanassupay£'sa sam.bhavanti" Evam etassa
kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti. Ida~ vuccati
bhikkhave dukkhasamudayaT ariyasaccaqJ."
(A. I. , iii. 61. 11, p. 177)
"And what, monks. 1S the Ariyan truth of the ar-
ising of Ill?
Conditioned by ignorance the activities come to
ber conditioned by the activi~ies, consciousness:
conditioned by consciousnessn name-and-shape: condi-
tioned by name-and-shape, the sixfold sphere of
sense: conditioned by the sixfold sphere of sense,
contact: conditioned by contact, feeling: conditioned
by feeling. cravin~: conditioned by craving, grasp-
-irlg: conditioned by grasping, becoming: conditioned
by becoming. birth: conditioned by birth, old age and
death, sorrow, grief. woe, lamentation and despair
come to paSSe This is the arisir,g of the whol.e mass
of Ill. This monks, is called 'the Ariyan truth of
the arising of Ill."
(A. Tr. I, p. 160)
Thus in its order of arising, the Buddha's teaching on

the Dependent Origination commences with tanha and ends as a

mass of suff'eril'1g. Since vana, or ban,a (e the weaving of life

i ,-
and its suffering') J..5

meaning of nibbana, or the cessation of tanha,

'4
--
another appellation of' tanha, the f'\11l

becomes clear.

Other important analyses of tanha can be found in the

p

Saffiyuttanikaya,- the Suttanipata, and the Qhammapada:

"Katama ca bhikkhave ta1}ha. Chayime bhikkhave tapha-

kaya. Rupata~ha saddata~ha gandhata~~a rasata~a po~~ha-
bbata.1)ha dhammatal}ha. Aya..l'Jl vuccati bhikkhave ta~ha.··
(S. II~ xii. 2. 8, p.3)
"And what, brethren, is craving?
There are these six groups of craving: craving
for things seen, for things heard, for odours, fQr
tastes, for things tangible,for ideas. This·is
ca1l.ed craving .. ~
(s. Tr. II, p. 4)
"Ye tanham vag.<;fuenti te upadhiI]1 vaq.q.henti.·t
• (S. II. xii. 66. 22, p. 109)
"Those who let tanha grow, they let sankharas
!

grow."
(Wr. Tr.)
"Ta~aya niyati loko tanhaya parikissati
A . A
tanhaya· ekadham:nassa - sabbeva vasam anvagu ti.·t
; ( s . I. i. 7. 3 I p. 39)·
"The world 15 led by ta~ha and carried about by it.
All have gone under the sway of this one thing
call.ed ta!1ha.u
(Yr. Tr.)
"Yam kihCi dukkham sambhoti - sabbain t~apaccaya.tt
(Sn. p. 144)
"wnatever suffering ar1ses, all that 15 because
of tanha."
(Wr. Tr.)
tlTanhaya jaya ti soko '- taIl..i.'1.aya jaya ti bhayam
•
t~Lhaya vippamuttassa - na tthi soko kuto bhayam."
(Dhp_ p" 216)

"From tal,;lha arises grief, from taI).ha arises fear.

For him who is totally free from t;:tnha, there 15
neither grief nor fear."
(Wr. Tr.)
It may be convenient to interpret ta~ha as temptations

whieh produce a negative, detrimenta.l effext upon the mind of

p

155
man. In the 'great majority of cases, the eff'ect is permanent.

The literal meaning of' upadana. a compound consisting of'

'lpa and adana, appears in the dictionary of the Pali Text

Se><:iety as "that (material) substrat~ by means of' which 'an

active process is kept alive or going." In its general sense,

its English equivalents include fuel, supply, and provision,

while its applied meanings relate to grasping, drawing upon,

holding onl grip, and attachment. In the context of' the De-

pendent Origination. however, only fuel, supply, provision,

grasping, and grip are applicable. In th,is respect, up adana

assumes thE! mean,ing of sankhara, both in the Majjhimanikava

and Buddhaghosa's commentary on the work:

"ya vedanasu nandi tad upadanam."

(M. I. 38, p. 266-67)
"TaI)h~ in perceptions and conceptions 3.S upadana."
(Wr. Tr.)
" ••• Upadanassa saiikharakkhandhekadesabhavato. tt
(M.. A~, p. 299)

• • • Since unadana 1S included in the sankhara

aggrega t(~ ...
(Wr. Tr.)
In other sourc~sJ §sava, whose literal meaning is 'flow-

ing thoughts' is s-s:nonymous'with sankhara f and kamunadana J9

J9References to 1'::2:nu,-,adana, or mental kamma-.forma tions

arising from sense desires appear in D. II. 58; III. 230; M.
I. 51; S. II. J; IV. 258; Vbh. 375; Dhamma~a~gani. Ed. Eduard
Muller. Pali Text Society [Publications~[London: H. Frowde,
1885), pp. 212, 256. (Hereafter cited as Dhs.)
 : 156
o:rten' appears as kamasava. 40

Upadanasfal1 into four categories: kamupadana, or men-

tal kamma-formations arising from sense desires, ditthupada-

~. or mental kamma-formations arising .fronispecu1ation,. 51-
labbatupadana, or mental_ kamma-formations arising from a be-

1ief' in rites and rit\lals, and attavadupadana,or mental kam-

~-f'ormations arising from a be1ief in a permanent unchang-

.' ingsoul. This classification, which appears in several Pali

texts. 41 includes all thre~ forms of sankhara: kayasanl<.hara

(body and mind kamma-(ormations), vacIsankhara (sp~ech and

mind kamma-format{ons). and citta or manosankhara (mental

kamma-formations)·. Since sankharas deposited in the passive

c'onsciousness - take possession of .the embryo at the time of

the reconception process. (punabbhava), they are indistinguish-

J. Bhava

~The literal meaning of bhava. derived from the root bhu.

-to be,' or 'to become,' is 'becoming' or 'being.' Other pos-

sible meanings are reconception, state of existence. life,

world. cycle of' reconceptions. and births and deaths. In the

Dependent Origination, however, i t is related on1y to rebirth

{i.e. reconception} or pu:"nabbhava. As the starting point of'

40Exolanations of' kamasava, or mental kar.1ma-f.ormations

arising from sense desires appear iri D. II. 12t>J M. I. 7, 9;
s. v.. 72; Dhs. 245; P.S. I. 129; II. 46-47; Vine III~ 5.
4ln. II. 58; III. 2JOI M. I. 51, 66, s. II. 3' v. 59J
Dhso 12131 Ps. I. 129, 11.11. 46-47; Vbh. 375.
p,

157
the" next life-span of an individual, bhava can thus be con-

sidered the equivalent of' namarupa, the starting point of' a

person's present life-span. But bhava should not be confused

with jati or punarupoatti, which'is concerned with the'pro-:

cess of'" rebirth. The expressionbhavasankharam avossaji mu-

a,42 'The' Thinker [Buddha] gave up the renovation of recon-

ception,' il1ustrates the difference between bhava and san-

khara and the use of' the 1atter to describe any force that

leads to ,reconception.

In Buddhist thought, bhava also represents the thirty-

I
one planes of existence which make. up the universeg includ-

ing this world and the'worlds beyond it. They are: kamabhava..
. ;

(eleven planes of' sensual existent;e), rtipabhava (sixteen

planes of form of the rup'ibrahmas), ,and arupabhava (four

planes of existence in which formless Brahmas are born). The

theory, illustrated in detail in Table 15. 1S a feature of

Buddhist cosmology which finds sanction in the canonical

texts. 4 J Reconception as namarupa, or the mind-body combina-

tion, however, can take plac~ only in the first twenty-seven

"

planes; the last four are, reserved only for nama as passive

42D. II. 107.

4JA. I. 210, 213-14, 223-24; III. 287, 313, 3~6, 332~3Jf

444; IV. 104 t 239-41, 247-48, 252-57, 379-80, 401-402; v.
59-6" 3J1., cJJ4; D. II. 57; III. 216; H. II. 19J-94; III.
100-103; S. II. J; IV. 258; v. 409-10, 423-24, 356j see also
"Abhidhammattha-Sa.ngaha," ed .. T. W. Rhys Davids, Journal of
the Pali T~xt Society, 1882:21-23. (Hereafter cited as Abhs.)
 158

TABLE l.5

THE THIRTY-O~E PLANES OF EXISTENCE

Time Limi t
ARUPA- I ",,,,,- -
....,"'-
13l.. Nevasannanasannayatana 84,000 HaK.
·BHAVA
lor 4th Jh~na 30.
. Planes of
I

Formless I (Formless) :29.

Akihca.rt~aya tana
Vifina~ahcayatana
60,000 MoK.
40,000 NoK.
Brahmas L .
- -
128. Akasanancayatana
.~ ~-
20,000 H.K.
I 127•
1 •
26
Akanit~ha
Sudassi
SUDDHA-
VASA
16,000
8,000
N.K.
M.K.
Of 4th Jhana !25. Sudassa Pure 4,000 MoK.
RUPA- (Of Form) 24. Atappa Abodes 2,000 HoK.
BHAVA
Planes of 23. Aviha 1,000 H.K.
the 22. Asartnasatta 500 MoK.
Brahmas 21. Vehapphala 500 H.K.
of Form
Of )rd Jharia i2"O. Subhakinha
t
64 M.K.
(Of Form) 119 • Appama!}asubha 32 M.K.
18. Parittasubha 16 M.Ko
Of 2nd Jh~na 117. Abhassara 8 M.K.
(Of Form)jl.6. Appama~abha 4 M.K~
iJ5. Parittabha 2 M.K.
Of 15 t Jhana i14. Mahabrahma 1 ·A.K.
(Of Form) 11J.
Brahmapurohita 1/2 A.K.
L h.2. Brahmaparisajja 1/) A.K.
~l.. Paranimmitavasavatti 16,000 C.Y.
KAMA- Ca:masuga ti 110. ~irnmaI}ara ti" 8,000 c.y.
BHAVA 1~(Sensual- I1 9. Tusita 4,000 C.Ya
Planes 01: haDDY)
the Sen- I ... ~
I 8. Yama 2,000 C.Y.
ses 1 7. Tavatimsa
1 l.~OOO c.y.
~. catummaharajika 500 c.Y •
..-
(Hoderate) i 5. Hanussa (HuiTlan Beings) No Limit
~amadugati '1;e Asurayoni No Limit
(Sensual- J. Petayoni (Ghosts and No Limit
evil.) Goblins)
2. Tiracch~nayoni (Animals) No Limit
~. ~\iraya (Hells) No Limit

H. K. t-iahakappa
A. K. Asa~~~eyyakappa
c~ Y. Celestial Years
p
';--

159
consciousness. p1anes where the corporeal. state ceases to

exist.
Another use of' bhava.in the· Dependent Origination refers
\
to·£unction as cause (kammabhava) and function as ef'fect

(vipakabhava). References to this particul.arusage of the

former in the doctrine. appear on1y when the factor·causes

its successor and o£ the latter when the factor aff'ects the
one that precedes i.t. Thus avijja and sankhara, by reason of

their kamma nature, fa1l. into the (~ategory of' kammabhava,

whil.e bhava, jati, and jaramar~a refl.ect·the nature of' vi-
-
pakabhava.
-
The use of' bhava, in context with the Dependent Origina~

tion, is ci ted· in the Sarrrvuttanikaya:

"Katamo ca bhikkhave bhavo. Tayo me bhikkhave bhava.

lramabhavo rupabhavo arupabhavo. Ayam
, vucca ti bhikkhave
bhavo. tt
(s. II. xii. 2. 6. p. 3)
"What, monks, is bhava, or the reappearance of
passive consciousness'? There are, monks. three ~­
vasl (eleven) sensual planes, (sixteen) pl.anes of
form, and (four) planes in which formless Brahmas
are born. Tnis, mopJcs, is bhava {where the reappear-
ance of passive consciousness can take place) 0"
. . (Wr. Tr.)

--.,----....;...;;..--
Other references to bhava in the paticcasamuppada doc-

trine appear as samhhava (the occurrence of the combination

of" passive consciousness with a fertilized ovum), punabbhava

(reconception), gabbhavakkanti (the coming down of passive

consciousness into the ovum), namarupa (the combination of

passive consciousness and the ovum), and patisandhi (the re-

p

160

1inking or rejoining of passive consciousness with the ovum).

K. Jati

Jati , derived from the root jan, • to be born,' in its

1iteral meaning refers -to birth, or entering the world as a.

iiving being. In canonical .li terature, the concept appears

in the following context:
"Katama ca bhikkhave jati? Ya tes~ tes~ sattan~
tamhi tamhi sattanikaye lati safUati okkanti abhinibbat··
ti khandhanaIp patubhavo ayatanana.l!t pa~ilabho. Ay~ vuc-
catibhikkhave jati."
(s. II. xii. 2. 5. p. J)
"And what, monks, is birth? Th.at appearance of
such and such beings in such and such type of beings
as jati (birth as emergence from the womb), as sai!'-
j~ti (birth and its relationship with the ou~er
world), as okkanti (coming down into the world). as
abhinibbatti (birth appearing as a new being), as
khandhanam natubhavo (the appearance of the Five Ag-
gregates), as avatananam oarilabho (the gaining of
the six senses). This, monks, is called jati, or
birth."
(Wr .. Tr.)

A1though tran~lator5 have'usually selected 'becoming' as

the English equival.ent for bhava, and 'birth' for jati, a'
finer distinction must be drawn. ~{hile the former refers to

conception in the mother's womb. the latter denotes the ac-

tual birth, or coming out into the world, of a living being.

In reference to sa~ayatana, then, the two factors represent

the commencement of an individual's relationship with his

(

mother. and his later relationship with the W'orld and soci-

etye Other Pali synonyms for jati are sui;i (flowing out of'

the mothe~'s body), p~suti (delivery), upoatti, nibbatti,

and nikkhant~J all of which mean 'comin.g out.'

p

.L
-.
•. Jara-marana-soka-parideva-dukkha-domanassa-upayasa
-.

The first two e1ements of the above compound refer to

physical suffering. and the remainder to the suffering of the

.mind. These are common ailmentsJ no individual can escape

S-Uff'ering. In his. first sermon, The Buddha lists three types
of sufferings: associations with those who are unpleasant and
unhel.pfu1. separation from loved ones, and failure to'achieve
one's desires. Every individual being has shared a common
heritage of' suffering. due to his incl.ination to accumulate

avijja, sankhara, and vi~at:la.

The first three 1inks of' the Depende~t Origination refer

to the main causes of man's present life, the next six des-
. I

cribe how life comes into being and generates the old causes

until death, and the last three complete the circle. These

three 1inks relate to the effects that ~an can expect after

death. The last link: (i.e. decay. death, sorrow, etc.), how-
ever, is unique; i t emphasizes the persistent presence of'
suffering during his series of rebirths.

Specific definitions of the seven elements of the last

link in a life-span are as follows:

Jara relates to the physical changes that age, disease.

and accidents occasion. Aging and decay are reasonable Eng-

1ish equivalents for the concept.

Marav~ means death, the separation of passive conSC10US-

ness from the body, the breaking of the mind-body combina-

• ,..,..;"J_
tion, or the point at which vJ.nnaDa finds a resting place 1n
f
I
I
! "

a n.ew oVum.
Soka refers to the so~row, grief, or anguish that an in-
~ividual experiences at the loss of a beloved object.

Parideva in its "literal s~nse !!leans lamentation, but

here refers to a sorrowful mental situation that causes man
to weep and lament.
Dukkha relates to the mental suffering experienced
through physical or mental pain. This type of suffering 25

caused by man's fai!.ure to fu1.i'illhis personal needs the

yearning to possess and the yearning to reject.

Domanassa is a term Iordistress, dejectedness, me1an-

choly, and grief. It symbolizes the 'broken heart,' and re-

fleets a state of-mind which precludes joy and happiness."

U"Eavasa refers to turbulence, tribulation, or <iny condi-
"tion that causes the mind unrest and disturbance, its anton-

yms being peacefulness and mental composure, serenity, and

sinceri ty.
Misery ru~d suffering as the common heritage of mankind is

the subject of the Buddha's First Sermon. It is life's First

Noble Truth:
"IdaT kho pana bhikkhave dukkham ariyasacc~. Jati pi
dukkha jara pi dukkha vyadhi pi dukkha mara~am pi dukkhrup
sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa pi dukkha.. Appiyehi
sampayogo dukkho p:l.yehi vippayogo dukkho. Yam picch~ na
labhati tam pi dukkham. S~khittena pancupadanakkhandha
pi 44 dukkhiii." 7

(s. V. Ivi. 11, p. 421)

44p~~ doen~ not appear 1n th e Cey1 on e dOte

1 10n 0 f the wark •
r
"Now this, monks, is the Ariyan truth about Illl
Birth is Ill. decay is Ill, sickness is Ill,
death is Il1~ likewise sorrow and grief, woe, lamen-
tation and despair. To be conjoined with things
which we dislike: to be separated from things which
we like~ - that also is Ill. Not to get what one
wants, - that also is Ill. In a word,· this cody, this
fivefold mass which is based on grasping, - that is
Ill.
Now this, monks, J..S the Ariyantruth about the
arising of Ill."
(s.~. V, p. 357)
The task now remains to compare the Buddha's formula as

contained in the doctrine of paiiccasamuppada as i t appears

in the unabridged text of the Dependent Origination with a

standard translation of the text. The Pali text is as fol-

lows:
"Bhagava. etad avoca. Paticca.samuppadatp vo bhikkhave
desissami. T~ sunatha sadhuk~ manasikarotha bhasissam-
l:ti.
Evarn bhanteti kho te bhikkhu Bhagavato p~cassos~.
,\
Bhagava etad avoca. Katamo ca bhikkhave pa!iccasam-
uppado_ Avijjapaccaya bhikkhave sailkhara. Saflkharapacca-
ya virtn'fuJrup- Vir.nEu;apaCca!a namarUp~. Na.-narupapaccaya
sa,:piyatana;p. SaJ.ayatanapaccaya phasso. Phassapaccaya ve-
dana. Vedanapaccaya ta~ma. T~apaccaya upadan~. Upada-
napaccaya bhavo. Bhavapa'ccaya ja ti. Jatipaccaya. jara..'TIar-
anam
, . so}ca~parideva-dukkha-domanassupayasa sambhavanti.
Evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
Ayap vuccati bhikkhave samuppado.
Avijjaya tveva asesaviraganirodha sahkharanirodho.
Sankharanirodha vinna~anirodho. Vip~a~anirodha namarupa-
~, .
nirodho. NamarUnanirod."1a salaya tananirodho. S·alaya tana-
nirodha phassanirodho~ Phassanirodh~ vedan5nirodhoo Ve-
dananirodha ta~aniroill1o. Taphanirodha upadananirodhoc
Upadananirodha bhavanirodho. Bhavanirodha jatinirodho.
Jatinirodha jaraT.ara~a~ soka-parideva-dukkha-domanassup-
ayasa nirujjhanti. Evam etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandh-
assa nirodho hotiti.
r 164
Idam avoca Bhagavli. Attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
-bhasitam abhinandunti. ~."
-(Sa II. xii. 1. 2-5. pp. 1-2)

c. A. F. Rhys Davids translated the Dependent Origina-

tion in thi s manner:

..... The Exalted One said: - ' I wil.l teach you,

brethren, the causal -law. Listen to it, give your
minds thoroughly ~"'ld I will speak. "Even so, lord,'-
responded-those brethren. The Exalted One spake
this: -
What. brethren, is the causal law?
Conditioned by ignorance activities come to
pa!l:s I condi tioned by acti vi ties consciousness, con-
di 1:ioned by consciousn~ss name-and-shape, conditioned
by name-and-shape sense, conditioned by sense con-
tact, conditioned by contact feeling, conditioned by
feeling craving, conditioned by craving grasping,
conditioned by grasping becoming, conditioned by be-
coming birth 9 conditioned by birth old age-and-death,
grief, lamer.ting, suffering, , sorrow, despair come to
pass. Such ~s the uprising of this entire mass of
ill. This~ brethren, is calleq [causal] happeningQ
EUt from the utter fading away and ceasing of
ignorance [comes] ceasing of activities; from ceas-
ing of activities ceasing of consciousnessf from
ceasing of consciousness ceasing of name-and-shape,
from ceasing of name-and-shape ceasing of sense;
from ceasing of sense ceasing of contact; from ceas-
ing of contact ceasing of ~eeling; from ceasing of
feeling ceasing of craving; from ceasing of craving
ceasing of grasping; from ceasing of grasping ceas-
ing of becoming; from ceasing "of becoming ceasing of
birth; from ceasing of birth ceasing of old age-and-
dea th, t::;rief., lamenting, suffering, sorrow, despair
cease. Such is the ceasing of this entire mass of
il!..
It is the Exalted One who spake this. Pleased
in mind those brethren took delight in the saying of
the Exalted One.'"
(s. Tr. II, pp. 1-2)
A more accurate rendering of the Buddha's teaching on re-

birth, however, entails the use of other English equivalents

to express the true substance of the Dependent Origination:

"This the Buddha said, 'Monks, I will teach you

the Dependent Origination. Listen to it. Give your
p
165
whol.e attention to it. I will speak. t . 'Yes, Lord, t.
said the morJ'Cs, and they prepared to listen to the
Buddha. The Buddha thus spoke:
What, mor~s, is the Dependent Origination?
Monks, conditioned by ignorance of the Four No-
b1.e Truths, there ari:'les mental krunrna-form-
ationSf
Conditioned by mental. ~2.rnma-formations, there
arises passive consciousness;
Conditioned by passive consciousness, there ari-
ses the mind-body combination;
Conditioned by the mind-body combination, there
arises birth together with the six senses;
Conditioned by birth, there arise sense impres-
sions;
Conditioned by sense irr~ressions, there arise
perceptions and cor~eptionsJ
Conditioned by perceptions and conceptions, there
arises,attachment to self',
Conditioned by attachment to self', there arises
. the grasping ofsankharas,
Conditioned by the graspin~ of sankharas, there
arises the mind-bod.y combination (after
death) ;
Conditioned by the mind":body combination (after
death), there arises birth;
Conditioned by birth, decay and death, and men-
tal troubles such as sorrow, lamentation,
suffering, despair and dejection occur.
Thus the arising of this Hhole mass of suffering
takes place. ThiS, ffionkS, is called the arising (of
suffering) •
Yet conditioned by the cessation of ignorance,
[a condition] which is possible only through complete
detachment,. mental kamma-formations come to cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of· mental kamma-
fon-cations, passive consc;iousness comes to
cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of passive conscio-
usness, rebirth as a mind-body combination
comes to cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of the mind-body
combin~tion~ birth co~es to cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of birth, sense im-
presions come to cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of sense impres-
sions, perceptions and conceptions come to
cease;
Conditioned by the cessation of perceptions and
conceptions, attachment to self comes to
cease;
 166
Condi tioned by the cessation of' attachment -to
self, mental kamma-formations come to ceaseJ
Condi tioned by the cessation of mental k2..mma-
formations, [future] mind-body combination
comes to cease;
Conditioned by the cessation 2f [f'uture] mind-
body combination, [£utureJbirth comes to -
cease,
Conditioned by the cessation of [future] birth,
decay and death, sorrow, lamentation, suffer-
ing, despair and dejection come to· cease.
Thus the cessation of this whole mass of suffer-
ing takes place. Thus the Buddha spoke. Tnose monks
who were -pleased in mind took delight in the teach-
-ing of the Buddha."
(lir. Tr.)
And with these words, the Buddha gave to his disciples

and to the world, a new way of life.-Despite the sorrow, the

pi tfalls, and the delays that would beset man in his e.ffort:s
to understand himself and his fellow men, he had held out

the promise of' happiness and peace to those who were pre-
pared to follow the path he had charted.

Paticcasamuppada:
~. -- Its Treatment in Canonical Literature

The Buddha·s teaching on the doctrine of reconception ~n

Pa~itexts is diverse and often confusing to the layman who

expects consistency and thoroughness in the presentation of

a philosophical doctrine. 'In the first instance, the doctrine

is discussed in some texts only briefly. without benefit of

explanation of the twelve links or factors which form its

substance, as for ex~~p~et

" ••• Imasmim sati idatp hoti, imass' uppada idaT uppajja-
ti, imasmin asa.ti id3.l]l na hoti f imassa nirodha id~ll nirv-
-Jjfu ti .. ,,45 .
P
I
167
"This being, that is.By the ar1.sing of this that
arises. This not being, that is not. By·the ending
of' 'this, that comes to cease."
(x. Tr. V. p. 126)
or
"If' this is, that comes to be; ,from the arising ·of
thi~,. that arise.s; if this is not, that does not
come to be; from the stopping of this,. that is
stopped."
(M. Tr. II,. p. 229)
In this case i t is evident that the Buddha, in using the
pronouns. 'this' and 'that' did not intend to dwell upon the
specific :features of his doctrine; his objects were to state
a simple relationship between cause and effect and to reveal
the flexibility of' the order of. l'inksin' the chain of causa-
tiona He made i t possible f.or his follQwers to commence. with
any link in the series and proceed forward or backward in

any direction while remaining within the limits of the .twelve

f'actors.
In other instances, however, the Buddha enunciated the

details of the doctrine in varying degrees. w~ile some pas-

sages occur in direct order, beginning with avijja and end~

ilg wi th jara-rnaI a1)a.- soka-pari d eva-dukkha-domanas sa-unaya sa,

others are in reverse order. In some texts, moreover, a sign-

ificant reduction in the number of factors appears. In four
citations of the Sarnyuttanikava,46 for instance, avijja 1S

omitted. Two passages in the Dighanikaya 47 and three 1.n the

46 S • II. l4~16. 66.

47n. II. 3i-33.
p

168
sa~yuttanikaya4~ omit both avijjaand sankhara. The formul.a
as presented in the Mah~nidanasutta of the D1Rhanikaya 49
1eaves outavijja, sankhara, and salayatana, while another

discourse of the Samyuttanikava50 omits avijja, san.l{hjra, and

• ,...--.J-
______
v~nna1J.a. -== Still other references to the doctrine include
1

eight,51 six,5 2 five,53 four, 54 and two 55 factors. In the

First. Sermon of' the Buddha, finally, ta;ma is the onl.y fac-

tor used to represent pa~iccasamuppada as an equivalent.of

the Se~ond Noble Truth, dukkhasamudava, or the cause of the

arising of suffering. 55

These variations have given rise to much speculation con-

eerning the original form in which the Buddha presented his

doctrine. T. "W. Rhys Davids,57 C. A. F. Rhys Davids,58 and

48 5 • II. 13-14, 91.

49D. II. 55-56.

50s. II. 90-91.
51S. II. 24, J7. 72-73, 75 ..
5 2 8. II. 108-112 ..
53S. II. 52-53, 72, 84-90, 92-93.
54 S • II. 65, 67.
55S. II. 38, 42.
56 5 • v. 421.
57pTS Diet., p. 1.6, s.v. "paticcasamuppada.'1
p
. 5° have suggested that the ten :factorsPl:'esented
E.J. Thomas.:"

in the Mahapadanasutta 60 of the Digharrikaya predate all oth-

ers. Their claim, however, is groundless. First of all, the

M.ahanidanasuti:;!!61 of the same text presents only nine :fac-

tors. Secondly, the three Pi 1:akas62 contaiI'l the formula in

its entire-ty (with twe1 ve factors) in more than fifty refer-

ences, whereas 1esser .forms occur upon eight occasions only.

In the third instance, shorter :forms occur neither in the

Vinaya or Abhidhamma Pi~akas. Fourthly in Mahayana Buddhism,

59Hist. Bud. Th.,. p • .58.·

60 n• II. 30-32.
61n. II. 55~56.
62 DhSe J4e; M. I. 49-52, 261, 264; II. 63-64J s. II. 1-
12, 17-18, 20, 2J, 25-26, 28, JI-J2, 42-46, 57, 60-65, 76-
79, 81-84, 95] 104-106, 113-16, 118, 126, 130-31J Ud.,l-2;
'Vbh. 135 ff. J Vine I. 1-2.
 . ,

the twelve-factor formula is contained in nine 'Works. 63 Other

cases in support of'the twe1ve-f'actortheory occur in the Vi-

nayaHahiva~ga (Vin. I. 1-2) and Udana (Ud. 1-2) a's a reali-

zation of' the Buddha immediatel.y f'ollCiwing his Enlightenment,

and in several passages of' the SamyUttanikava64 as a proc.lam-

ation of' the Buddha.

,;', '. 63Da~abhiimikasutra et BodhisattVabhumi .•• ~ Publi~s avec

introduction et:: no-ces par J. i{ahder. (Paris I., P. Guethner,
1926),48. 23 ff.; Nagarjuna. The D~'1arma-Samg'raha: An Ancient
Collection of Buddhist Technical Te'l:'Trls. Prepared ••• by Ken-
jiu h:asaHara and ed. i'. Hax huller a:nd H. Wenzel. Anecdota Ox-
oniensia~ Aryan Series, vol. 1, pt. 5. (Oxford, Clarendon
Press, 1885), p. 42; Ka9vapaparivarta: A Mahavanasutra of the
Ratnaku~a Class. Ed. in-the.original Sanskrit, in Tibetan and
in Chinese by A. von Stael.-Ho.lstein. ,(Shanghaiz Commerci·al
Press, 1926), pp. 61-62; ~ahavastu Abadanam: Le H2h~vastu! '
Texte' sanscri t. publie pour.la premi~re I'ois et accornpagne d t
introductions et d'un commentaire par E. Senart. 3vols.{Pa-
ris f Imprirnerie Nationale, 1882-97). II. 285. 8 f'f J 345. 13
ff.J III. 448. 12 ff. (Hereafter cited as Hhvu.); Hahavyut-
patti. A Tibetan index to the Hahavyutpatti, with its San-
skri t equivalents. Sakaki .ed. by Kyoo Nishio. (Kyoto: Isseido
Pub. Co., 1941.), 224.1-58; Sadhpund. 179. 4 ff.; Salistamba-
siitra. Bouddhisme, ~t-udes et materiaux, theorie des douze
causes (reconstituted). Ed. Louis.de La Val.1.~e Poussiry.
I,'

(Gand: E. Van Goethem',1913), 76. 13 ff.J Santideva, Siksha

Sa1l1l,lCCava: A Comnendium of Buddhist' DoctrinQ. Trans. from
the Sanskrit by Cecil Bendall and W.H. D~ Rouse. (London:
John Hurray f·or the Government of' India, 1922)9 219. 10 f f . ;
Suvarnanrabhasasutra: Su-r..~arnabhasotta~'!1asG.tra. Das Go1.dg1anz-
sutra. Ein Sanskrittext des Mahay~na~Buddhismus .~. Hrsg. von
·Johannes Nobel. (Leipzig: o. Harrassowitz, 1937), pp. 193-99
ff.

64 S • II. 1-2, 4-11, 25,42, 60-65.

L
 17l.
.The Buddha took i t as a matter ot course that. once the·

formula with its group of twelve factors was understood, all

lesser forms would fall into piace. The reverse, however,

was not true:, for as it·has been demonstrated, he intended

some factors to serve as equivalents of others. Only in the

entire formula, moreover, did the Buddha explain the process
of reconception and divide i t into stages of past, present,

'~:uJ.d :futUre. A glance at the complete text of' the Dependent

Origination reveals the utmost necessi ty of' viewing the doc-·

trine in terms of a past without beginning,65 a present lifE!·

span, and a :future· that has no end except in nibbfu:la. 66

Thus the Buddha·s .doctrine 0'£ reconception signifies the

final phase of his teaching on the concept of mind, abroad

concept which in essence deals with the law of cause and· ef-

fect and with man in his past, present, and future en'Viron-

ments. The Buddha saw the world as a place of beauty and of

goodne.ss. wherernan could live in happiness, honesty and

faithfulness, and if' he chos~, reach the summit o~ existence.
Horeoften, hm<fever, the master observed the '-forld in all

itlS misery, suffering, and..despair, and with his own eyes

saw man as a weak and powerless victim of his own desires and

longings, who succumbed to temptation, became attached to

self, and as a consequence, wandered from one existence to

651n the sense that the beginning of the world and man is
inconceivable.

66C. f'. . note :39.

 . '. -~ ."

I 172·
I another, seeking~ probing, att.empting to·find an answer to
I the meaning of i t a11.
Except in. his thoughts on rUpa and jati, the Suddha ex-
pressed little concern for the physical life· of man; the
body, to him, served merely as the s·torehouse of the six
senses and their menta1 attributes. Any experience that man
might suffer, therefore was a ftlatter of mind --the mental
.. .

images that he had iiccumulated from past to present exis-

tences. the forces that determined 'the.nature of: future exis-
tences. The Buddha realized all!o, that man, in order to con-.
trol his destiny, must fUlly understand· the workin~ of his

mind, its powers of: perception and conception, and the rele-·
vance of active and passive consciousness to those powers •
. In order to insure that his followers clearly understood

his teachings on mind, theref:ore, the Buddha first opened up

a world of specuJ.ation in regard to the meaning of citta and
mano, concepts which he. later expanded in.to the Five Aggre-
gates. His final teaching on the subject, the Dependent Ori-
gination, the details of: which appear on 'rable 16, gave to
those who were firmly rooted in their present environ~ents a
p
173
TABLE 16

DEPE!'llJENT ORIGINATION: PATICCASAHUPPADA F

1. AVIJJA III
Ignorance of the Four Noble Truths ~

j 2.
. -
SANKHA...1lA
-.-I
...:J
~lH
~
;; Horal and Immoral K.amma-formations til E-!
<e
~"t;
co C\1 ,..v_
ttl
t:l..
~ Q. J. VIXNA~A Ct-4
~ Q) Passive Consciousness o
;2~
I 4. NAHARUPA
ES~ Hind-Body Combination (Reconcep-

~ II~ ~ ~5
tion)
.~ til

<H
- ~
m· S4-AYATANA
o 0 Birth with Six Senses Q)
III Ct-4
til Q) -.-I
CJ :> ...:J
(1) • .-1 6. PHASSA
s:: z~
~~
Sense Impressions +'
('j
O-P Q) I~
~ til ::8
wC>
~
t:: til
7. VEDANA H
Q)

c;S <li Perceptions and Conceptions 0...

H ~
tflp.. Q) :>
-P
8. TA}rIA ..c
o ~
Q)
~
Attachment to Self, or Ignorance f.H
(;..f 0
~

Moral and Immoral Kamma-formationsj

10. BHAVA
Reconception (Mind-Body Combina-
tion)

11. JATI
Birth with Six Senses Q)
H
~
~
12. J ...BA- !'·L-\R.A~ A - S OI{.·\ - PAR I D EVA- DUKKHA- ~
DOr-L\.NASSA-UPAYASA . ~
Decay, Death, Sorrow, Lamenta-.
·
t lon, ~ +'~.
~U~lerlngJ
Dejection
D espalr,
. an d JI
~
0
 - ",'.;"

1.74
I 100k into the cycle 'of rebirths of the'past and of' the 'f'u-
I
I ture. 67
The words of the Buddha on citta and mano, his teaching

on the Five Aggregates,.and his words'ontheDependent Ori~

gination complement and suppiement one another. Repetition

has been used to good effect. The Buddha's concept o~ mind

represents his most significant contribution to maa~ind.

67The theory of: life as a recurring cycleoi' r~concep­

tions was also adopted by the Hindus. It forms the theme of'
the Bhag'a:vad~1ta. See Bh. Gita, chap_ 2,' .21-22. ,There is' an
under~y{ng d::l.f'1'erence, however, between the Hindu arid Bud-.
dhist schools of thought. The former dwells. heavily on the
soul, which is indestrUc.tible, and an unchanging active a-
gent, whereas the Buddhist vinnaI;1a is destroyed by the
achievemen.t of niobana. See also Sve. Up. III. l3; V. 8;
Br. Up_ I. 5. 23; Kath. lip. II. 1.12-13; Mai. Up. VI. 38.
See also the Buddha's rebuke to the monk Sati when the lat-
ter failed tc. distinguish between the two concepts of re-
conception as taught in Hinduism and his own religion, in
M. I. 258 and M. Tr. I. 313-14.
 CONCLUSION

In the preceding chapters. the writer has tried to show

thatl~~ding trart~iators o£ Buddhist scriptures interpreted

crucia1 passages,in which there ax'e words that express the

component parts o£ mind, inadequatE'1y, and contributed un-
witting1y to misrepresentations o£ the 'Buddhist doctrine.
The most important' four words pertaining to mind are ~-

-
d ana. ,.I ... - • - • elN • • •
sanna •. 3aJi.khara,. andv::LnnaIl.a ::Ln the context of the F3.ve

Aggregates. These terms are examined ,according to the deriva-

tion of each word, and also according to the.usage of each

word in their contexts. Particularly when the trans1ations

and dictionaries appeared doubtfu1, Pa1i commentaries were
a1so con~u1ted to get at the origina1 meaning of each term
in its particu1ar contextual passage. The: trans1ations of
th;~se terms by twenty-nine leading translators were col1ec-
ted and compared with the new meanings evolved by the writer.
The tables containing 1ists of pertinent English equival.ents
show that at times the, translators are in agreement. Even
where they disagree or di:ffer~ their translations are often

found not to be contradictory. Doubts about the new meaning

of a word are discardedonl.y when the new meaning agreed with

175
 1.76
at l.east one or more translators and with one entry of' the
meaning· in a dictionary. No new meaning has been introduced

arbitrarily. Active ·consciousness and passive consciousness

are terms coined by ~he writer, ~or he could not find better
equivalents to express the two main divisions of mind.
. .
.'l'hroughout the present work. perception strictly means 'all·
kinds o~ sensory experiences including emotions. ~eelings,

and sensations.' .Conception is used either to mean 'thought,

including intellectual, non-intellectual. and imaginative
thinking,' or 'mind-body combination o~ a fertilized ovum in
a mother's womb~' The fina~ appropriate meaning o~ conception
depends on the context. A search was made as.to "the usage of
the above'mentioned ~our words in the pre-Buddhistic Indian
1iterary works. namely, the ~gveda and the Upani§ads. It was

c1early seen that not one o~ the four terms had been used in
the same sense as they are used in the contexts of the Fi.ve
Aggregates and the Dependent Origination. All the four terms
were used in certain passages of the ~gveda and the Upani§ads,

but there they express entirel.y difl~erent meanings. Even }lon-

ier Williams' Sanskrit-En~lish Dictionary does not give spe-
cia]. Buddhist meanings for the four words. This circumstance
suggests that the determined meanings of those particular
words are entirel.y Buddhist in origin. and that they were not
used in the same sense prior to or contemporary with Buddhism.

The indications of the four words were then compared, in-

dividually as well as colle~tiveiy. with the current transla-

.---.....
.I
 ~77
. ; .

tions 'of the Pa~i words citta and mano, terms which were al-

so used in the I1gveda, Upani~ads, and Tipitaka. The transla-

tions showed that. each of the words can be divided into three

types of oeanings, primary, secondary, and general. In their

I primary meanings, citta and mana express two entirely differ-

ent concepts. In their secondary meanings, the two terms are

interchangeable and express the same concepts. In their gen-
eral meaning, both mean 'mind' in a Very broad sense. Their
occurrence:! in the J}gveda, earlier' Upani~ads.!l and the earlier

works of the Tipi1=aka were investigated. It was found that

the threefold usage of each word is common in all three types
of' coritexts.

Three important facts have come to light as significa':1t

results of the comparative study of the connotations of the

six words, cittag mano, vedana, sahna,sankhara,and vir~~a.

The first is that_in the pre-Buddhistic era of Indian

thought, the concept of mind was limited only to active con-

sciousnesso By mind, the thinkers of those days meant only

the' percepti ve an.d conceptive aspects of the word. 'They do

not seem to have had any knowledge of the passive aspect of
mind, except for the concept of an indestructible, everlast-

ing, uncha:lging soul, which,. hmo{ever, cannot be regarded as a

part of mind • .~ analysis of mind as consisting of four cam-

ponent parts appears for the first time in Indian philosophi-

cal thought only in the earlier works of the Tipil~ka.

The second is that the two SUbstitutes for £iltf!. and ~,

 178
.. ,~:,.:

. <IN-
name1Yt vedana -and sanna, respectively, were introduced by
the Buddha to express direct1y the two primary meanings of
citta and manc. This constitutes an innovative usage of two

tr~ditiona1 terms with speci~ic BUddhist connotations.

The third is a, significant growth of the concept of mind
in the time of early Buddhism. The concept of sartkhara was

~dded to the concept of active consciousness, and a new con-

c~pt, thac of vifirta~at which implies the passive aspect, of
mind, -,tas introduced as the fourth constituent part of' mind,.
The new additions, one pertaining to active consciousness ~ld

the other to passive consc~ousness, result in two broad divi-

sions of mind. They are now a part of modern psychology.
The ~Titer also attempts to analyze appropriate passages
of the Dependent Origination, since the four terms for mind
which appear in the Five Aggregates form part of that philo-
sophical formula. The Buddha described the Dependent Origina-
tion as something profound (gambh1ro), difficult to perceive
(duddaso), and not easy to ~derstand (duranubodho). Current

~glish translations of the formula, and the pertinent entries

.
in Pali and Sanskrit dictionaries were . observed critically.
These translations and entries help greatly in understanding
but do not provide ~timate clarity. The f'o~ula became clear
only when it was studied in the light of the meanings of' the
:four mental aggregates newly determined by the writer. A close

study of 'the Dependent Origination in all its details is made

in the third chapter. The ' translation of the complete formula
 179
of Dependent Origination by C.A. F. Rhys Davids. as a s~-

pIe of current Engl2Sh translations. is compared with the

"new inte~retation of the writer at the end of' the chapter.

Only in the iaterpretation can one note the usage ox ~evera1

pairs of terms with similar meanings but, different forms. . .

Those pairs are: avijja and tat;ilia (to mean the blindness
created by attachment to self), sankhara and upadana (in the
sense of' mental. kamma-formations grasping the life continu-
um) J na!J'1ari~ and bhava (as mi!ld-body combination of becom-

ing) J and !ialaya tana and ja ti (as appearing in sense organs

al.ready present at birth). Vedana in"theDependent Origina-

tion stands for both the traditional meanings of vedana and
. t .-

sahrta (in the context-of the Five Ag~egates). and signifies

both perception and conception. The pertinent passages in

the Dependent Origination when closely .examined confirm the

genuineness of the newly determined meanings of the terms of

the Five Aggregates.

The original meanings o£ citta and mano probably are

'perception t for citta and 'conception' for mana. Later both

words were appar{~nt~y used to mean 'mind' in the general
sense of the word. The desire to avoid semantic confusion and

to retain clarity in his teachings induced the Buddha, prob-

ably, to introduce two substitutes, vedana and sanha, in the
place of citta and mano.

While most of: the translations and interpretations ex-

tant and investiaged here did not take into consideration

P
1
180
the Buddha's ul.timate meanings and intent~ the authors cannot

be accused of having fal.sified essential parts of the doc-

trine. Not being aware of such subtle and precise distinc-

tions in the appl.ication of crucial terms in certain given

contexts, most Eastern as well as Western lexicograph~rs, . I

commentators~ and transl.ators expre!lSsed themselves in "terms

which were too genera!., too narrow, or too broad, and thus

coul.d not do justice to the context and intended meaning. Ap-

parently earlier imprecise translations later were si:m~.ly

copied without much deliberation and caused some serious

scholars in the West to cast doubt as to the Buddha's ration-

a1 contribution to philosophic thought.

A word about the tables in the foregoing chapters is in

order. Tables 1. and 2 1ist the meanings of the roots cit and

~ as they are given in five diction~ies and in Whitney's

The Roots, Verb-forms and Primary DeT''':.vatives of' the Sanskrit

~anguage. The t-wo lists show that all authori ties agree upon
the meaning 'perceive s for cit and 'think' for man. This
- --
leads to the conclusion that ci t"ta, deri vj~d from .£.i t, should

primarily mean 'menta1 perceptive faculty',' and m~, derived

from~, 'mental thinking or conceptive Jfacul ty. t The trans-

l.ations of ci tta and mano as they are ci ted in the DhalTl!nanada

are listed in tables J ,and 4" and as they are ci ted in the

suttaniQat~, in tables 5 and 6. The translators also are in

- favor of the primary meanings of the two words-as they have

appeared radically~ These tables, moreover, decide the gener-

r 181

a1 meaning for both words as 'mind.' Whatever other meanings

remain must be included in the category called 'secondary.'

Tables 7 through 11 in Chapter .J give the. translations

of rUpa, vedana, sanria. sarmharajl and vinnau.a as they are

translated by twenty-nine leading Pali scholars. They also

help to discern that the writer's new meanings are not arbi-
trary. Table 12 gives the canonical list of four. kinds of
foods that nourish each.analytical factor of a living b~ing,
. showir~g how the nourishments form the being of five aggre-

gates. Tabl.e 13 is a detail.ed,analysis of mind in all its

component functiong.beinglstrictly:~imited to the two con-

cepts of active and passive consciousness, and to the four

mental aggregates. Table 14, in Chapter 3, gives all trans-

l.atiorls 6f' each of the twel.ve factors of Dependent Origina-

·tion as they are interpreted by seven prominent translators.

It also helps one compare and contrast and evaluate the new

interpreta tiona of the wri ter'. Table 15 supplies the names

of thirty-one planes of existence as they are explained in

the works of the Tipitaka. T:'"ley are the places or worlds in

which the passive conscio,usness of an individual can mani-

fest itself from time to time after death. Descriptions of

each world are beyond the scope of the present work. The

last table, number 16$ shows how the twelve terms of the

Dependent Origination are divided into the past~ present.

and future of a living being.

In.th~ present investigation on the concept of mind in

early Buddhism, the crucial Buddhist·teaching has been the

p

182

Five Aggregates. Many concepts that relate to mind, as ex-

pressed in 'Works on modern psychology, can be explained in

relation to the mental factors of the Five Aggregates. For

instance, 'knowing· is the resultant factor either of vedana

or of sanna, or of both. 'Feeling'is included in ~dana.

-Thinking' is expressed by saIU=la. 'Subconsciousness' is in-

troduced by vixnana. The present study has clearly shown

that the six Pali terms, citta, mano, vedana, sahna, san-
khara. and virlna~a not only disclose what is.generally meant

by mind, but also the stages in the evolution of Indian

thought pertain·ing to mind.

The contents of the ·first three chapters of the present

work shed some light on the nature and functions of mind and

its component parts, and on several. other concepts that are

rel.ated to mind. Among these concepts are: the conception of

a being as a combination of body and mind; the birth of a

being as coming out of an egg or womb with fully growrt sense

organs; life as the process of a mental continuum of active

and passive consciousness; and death as the separation of

passive consciousness from the body. The theory of kamrna,
which depends upon the concept of sankhara, explains the

simi.Lc.ari ties and differences of life in its various forms.

According to the contents of the Dependent Origination,

mind comes to us at conception in the form of passive con-

sciousnesse It pervades the whole body even though we are un-

ab1e to experience i t consciously. As a passive force, i t

 183
functions continuously,throughout the life-span of' the in-

dividua1. When mind {passive consciousness} is separated from

tbe body at death, i t seeks and finds another fertilized ovum

ina mother's womb and continues the cycle of birthz and

deaths. The force that induces passive consciousness to seek
and find the suitable ovum to enter is explained in Buddhist
philosophy as sankharaor kamma. Passive consciousness be-
comes active only through the contact of sense organs and
sense objec!ts, and in that stage of mental action it is

caJ..l.ed act:lve consciousness. Like a wave or ripple on the

surface of water, the process of active consciousness starts

from passive consciousness, ends in passive consciousness,

and is 'deposited in passive consciousness. While passive

consciousness'ent~rs into a relationship with body and form,

the internal world of the individual, i.e. its active con-

sciousness, relates that life to the external world through

the senses.
-Sankh~ra or kamrna 15 the prol.onging factor of
passive consciousness. Sahkharas are formed in active con-
sciousness through tanha (attachment to self), and are de-

posi ted in the rreposi tory of passive consciousness. A sankh-

~ once formed and deposited in this repository will. remain

there until it reaches its fruition (vipaka). The purifica-

tion of mind starts with the inhibition and attenuation of

the sa~~haras present in the active consciousness. The men-

tal purification process of an individual reaches its climax

on1y in the cessation or eradication of avijj~ or tanha, the

p

184
·.
principal factors contained in the saTIkharas. This total men-
tal purification of' sankharas, which are never again soiled,

is called nibb"ana (cessation of'tat;tha), or Enlightenment

(bodhi). It works as the f'u.1lmental illumination on the Four

.Noble Truths. The individuals who realize nibbana are called

Buddhas or Arahants. Parinibhana (nibban.a without residue or

u1timate nibbana) is the death of a Buddha or an Arahant. It

is the end of life of the individual in any appearance.
The scope of' the present work b~r necessity is limited to

the study of the concept of mind as i t presents itself in

the earlier works of Buddhism~ and especially in the earlier

text~ of the Pali Suttapitaka. Nevertheless, an expansion of

speculation on mind and an attempt to elucidate or to explain

it in more detail are found in the works of the Abhidha~~a,

which are generally regarded to have been composed later than

the Vinaya or Sutta texts. Pali commer~taries such as Buddha-

ghosa's Visuddhimagga, Buddhadatta's Abhidhammavatara and Ru-
partipavibhaga, and Anuruddha's Abhidhammatthasangaha and Na-
marfipapariccheda shed much light on the later develop~ents

of the concept of mind, all of' which are beyond the scope of
the present work. In those developments, there is a series

of new technical terms. Some of the most important ones are:

bhavan~a (for vinnana); patisandhi citta (for bhavanga or

nama in na.'1larupa at conception), vlthi citta (a process of

#

active consciousness in ~edanas,

-
san..nas, "Ii th or wi thou t san-

!0-aras), cutici tta (for vif1f)ana at death), and the like.

p

185
These new term~, however, are not contrary or contradictory

to the terms investigated here in regard to the ear1y con-

cept o~ mind. The Abhidhamma views on mind and mental ~acul­

ties (citta and cetasika) . enriched and enlarged by new terms

and new explanations reconfirm and supplement the earlier

views as depicted in the texts of the Suttapitaka.
 BIBLIOGRAPHY
PRIMARY SOURCES

I. THE CANONICAL LITERATURE OF THERAVADA BUDDHISM

(1. Pali Texts of the Tipitaka; 2. Translations ofPali Texts

of the Tioitaka; J. Selections from Pali Texts of the Tinitaka;
--4. Commenta;:i..es on Fali Texts of',theTinitaka; 5. Treatises on
Pa1i Texts 0:: the Tini taka; 6. Transla tions of Treatises on
Pali Texts of the Tipi~aka)

1. Pa1i Texts of the T2pi~aka

Vinayapitaka

The Vinaya ?itakam: One of the Principal Buddhist Holy Scrip-

tures in the t:al; Lan.ZU3.2.'e. 2di ted by Hermann Oldenberg. 5
vols. London: Luzac & Co •• 1964.

Suttapitaka: Dtghanikaya

The Dig-ha ~.JiJ.cava. [Vols. 1-2 edi ted by T. \{. Rhys Davids and
J. 0stlin Carpenter; vol. J edited by J. Estlin Ca1~enterl.
·Pali Text Society [Publications], v~lsc 22, 52, 67. J voli.
1889-1910. Reprint. London: Luzac & Co., 1960-67.
Suttapitaka: ~ajjhimanik~ya

Th e ~' "h' - "., L -

.laJ,1_il8a-_'J.,:av~.,r
r 1
L.a. 1 e d'ley~.
t d b 'tT Tr enc k ner; vo 1 s. 2 - 3
edited by RQbert Chalmers; vol. ~, Index, edi!ed by Mrs.
Rhys DavidsJ. Pali Text Society LPublicationsJ, valSe 17.
39,45,47, 51, 99c 6 vols. in 4. Reprint, (4 vols.). Lon-
don: Luzac & Co., 1960-64.

Suttapitaka: Samyuttanikaya

The Sa~yutta-Kikaya of the Sutta-Pitaka. [Pt. 1: Sagatha-Vagga,

edi ted by L~on l"eer; pt. 2: Nictana-Vagga, edi ted by L~on

186
 187

Feer; pt. J: Khandha-Vagga, editedbyL~on Feer; pt. 4:

- . / . --
Sal.ayatana-Vagga. ed1 ted by Leon Feer; pt. 5.: Maha-Vagga
edited by L~on Feer; pt. 6: Indexes, by Mrs. Rhys Davids ~.
j
Pa1i_Text Society [Publications], vols. 8,19, 25, Jl, 42,
56. 6 vols. 188~-1904. Reprint. London: Luzac & Co., 1960-
70.
Samyuttanikava: Part II. CEdi ted by Amaraseeha Thera. Text in
P~li in Sinhalese script]. Colombo: H. H. B. Vijayatunga,
Vidyaratanakara Press, 1901.
,-
The Samyuttanikayo of the Sutta Pi1=aka: Part. II. [Revised and
edited by Bandaramu!le Amaras:a.a Haha Thero. Text in Pali
in Sinhalese scriptJ. Colombo:M. H. P. Wijayaratne Appuha-
my, Vidyaratanakara Press and Saddharma Praka~a Press, -
1926.
Suttapitaka: ATIguttaranikaya
t

The MP:UttaTa-Nikaya. [Pt. 1: Ekanipata, Dukanipata, and Tika-

nipata, edited by nichard Morris; pt. 2: Catukka-Nip~ta,
edited by Richard Norris; pt. 3: Paffcaka-Nipata and Chakka-
Nipata, edited by E. Hardy; pt. 4: Sattaka-Nipata, Atthaka-
Nipata, and Navaka-Ripata 7 edited by E. Hardy; pt. 5: Das-
aka-Nipata and Ek~dasaka-Nipatatt edited by E. Hardy; pt. 6;
Indexes, by ?-label Hunt, revised and edited by C. A. F. Rhys
Davids]. Pali Text Society [Publications], vols. 10, 20,
35, 44, 461' 66. 6 vols. 1885-1910. Reprint. London: Luzac
&: _Co., 1956-h7.

Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Khuddakapatha

The Khudc.aJ.:::a-patha, To?,"ether wi thIts Corr:mentary Paramatthajo-

tika. 'sdi ted by Helmer SJIli th from a cQlla tion by t-labe1
Hunt. Pali Text Society LPublicationsj, vol. 77. 1915. Re-
print. London: Luzac ~ Co., 1959.

Suttapi~aka: Khuddakanikaya: Dha~~apada

Dhammapada. Pali Text and translation with stories in brief

and notes, by ~;arada Thera. Colombo: Vijirarama, 1963.

The Dha'TImaoada. Wi th introductory essays, Pali text, English

translation, and notes, by S. Ra~~akrishnan. London: Ox-
ford Lniversity Press, 1950e

The DhamD3.0ada.With preface, Pali text and English transla-

tion by E. '1,l. Adikaram. Colombo: H. Do Gunasena & Co.,
1.954.
p
r

188

The Dhammanada, Being' a Co11ectionoI Hora1 Verses in pa1i.

Edited a second time with a literal Latin translation •••
for the use of Pali students, by V. Fausbr1l. London: Lu-
zac & Co., 1900.
Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Udana
•
Ud~riaIJl. Edited by Paul Steinthal. Pa1..i Text Society [Publica-
tions], vol. 12. London: H. Frowde,"1.885.

Suttapi ~aka: K.l-J.uddakanikaya: Iti ,,-u t taka

Iti-Vuttaka. Edited by Ernst Windischc Pali Text Society [Pub-

lications], vol. 26. 1889. Reprint. London: Geoffrey Cum-
berlege, Oxford University Press, 1948.

Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Suttanipata

Buddha' s Teachin~s. Bein?,' the Sutta-Ninata, or Discourse-Col-·

lection. Edited in the qriginal Pali text with an English
version facing it, by Lord Chalmers. Harvard Oriental Se-
ries, vol. 37. Ca:nbridge, Hass.: Harvard University Pressl
London: Humphrey !-1ilford, Oxford University Press, 1..9J2.

Sutta-Ninata. New ed. edited by Dines Anderson and Helmer

- Smith. Pali Text Society [Publications], vol. 72. 191J.
Reprint. London: Luzac & Co., 1965.

Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Thcragatha

.... ... "-
The Thera and Therl-Gathas. Edited by Hermann Oldenberg and
Richard Pischel. 2d ed., with appendices by K. R. Norman
and Ludwig Alsdorf. Pali Text Society [publications], vol.
5. London: Luzac & Co., 1966.

Sut. tani taka: Khuddakanikava: Jatal<a

l • _

The Jataka, To<::;"ether Hith its CommentarY, Beins; Tales of the

Anterio:::"' Births of Go':arn2. Buddha. edited by V. Fausb¢ll
and Dines Anderson. f'ali Text Society [Publications]. 7
vols. 1877. Reprint. London: Luz~c & Co., 1962-64.

Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Kiddesa

Niddesa. Edi ted by Louis de., La Valee Poussin and Edward Joseph
Thomas. Pali Text Society [Publicationsl, volSe 80, 83,
85. 2 vols. London: Luzac & Co.,1916-l§.
if
li -

189

Suttapi~aka: Khuddakanikaya: Pa~isambhidamagga

Patisambhid~ua~~a. 3dited by Arnold C. Taylor. Pali Text Soci-

ety LPublica<;ions], volSe 56, 61. 2 vols. London': H. Frm-l-
de, 1905-1907.

Abhidhammanitaka: Dhammasangani

Dhammasa~r::ani. Edited by Edward Huller; Pali Text Society

LPUblic~tionsJ, vol. 11. London: H. Frowde, 1885.
Abhidhammapita1ca: Vibhanga

The Vibhan~a, Bein~ the Second Book of the Abhidhamma Pitaka.

Edi te~ by C. A. F. Rhys Davi(i.s. Pali Text Society' LPub1ica-
i·
; tionsj, vol. SSe London: H. Frowde, 1904.

AbhicL"1ar.unapi taka: Ka thava tthu

Kathavatthu. Edi ted by Arnold C. Taylor •. P'ali Text Society

LPublicationsJ, volSe J4, J6. 2 vols. London: H. Frowde,
1894-97.-

2. Translations of Pali Texts of the Tipi~aka

Suttapitaka: Dl.c;hanikaya
J

Qialo~es of the Buddha (Dl~ha-Nikava). [Vol.

1 translated by
T.W. Hhys Davids; vol. 2, T. 11. and ~frs.
Davids; vol. ~hys
3, Hrs. Rhvs Davidsl. Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vols.
2-4. :3 vol~. 1889-1921. Reprint. London: Luzac & Co., 1969-
72.
Suttapitaka: Xajjhimanik~ya

Th e C 0 1 lee t lO~
J '
0.:..~ t'h
" e ,:-,1.
.. ' r'ld1
__ e L ,ava ) •
+'h
en~~,. '"' '.
:::>av].n~s,·a.'\l. ' .",. k--
( , . . ' hJ..r.1Q.-"1.

Translated rroDJ'the r'ali by I. 3. Eorner. Pali 'lext Socie-

ty Translation Series, nos. 29-31. J vols. 1954-59. Re-
print. London: Luzac & Co., 1970.

Th e 0 ,
.uOOK oJ... r -'t,.e
' 'h K - 1
l.J.ncre ~.
d ~av1.n;:;:::; (' s '
amy·u. ,~., -
t t a-.'iJ..reava ) • rL'v
,7 0 1 s. 1- 2
transla ted by :·Jrs.. Rhys .uavids, assi s ted by Suriyagoda 5u-
rnangala Thera; vols. 3-5 translated by F. L. ~.{oodward. Pali
Text Society Translation Series, vols. 7t 10, 1J, 14, 15.
5 valse 1917-30. Reprint. London: Luzac & COe, 1956-71.
p

1:90

Suttapi
- taka:
, Aiu;uttaranikaya

The Book of the Gradual Sav~ ng-s (AngLlttara-~Hkava). Translated

by F. L. .Jood",ard and B. :'01. Hare. Pali Text S.ociety Trans-
lation Series: nos. 22~ 24-27. 5 valSe 1932-J6. Reprint.
London: Luzac 6 Co., 1963-72.

Suttapi ~aka: I{huddakanik£iya: Khuddakapa~ha

I

The Hinor neadi-n~s (Khuddakanai.;:ha): the First Book of the Hi ....

nor Collec-r:ion (KI"1t:ddakanikava). Translated from the .t:>ali
by Bhik}chu l·,~ana;i1ol.i. Pali Text Society Transla tion Seri~s,
no. 8. London: Luzac & Co., 1960.
Suttapitaka: Khuddakanikaya: Dhammapada:Eng-lish

The Buddha's Path of Virtu~. A translation of

the Dhammapada
by F. L. cloodward .. iii th a foreword by Ponnarnbalam Aruna-
chalam. Hadras: Theosophical Publishing House" 1929.

The Buddha' s '~-lav of Virtue. t A Translation of the Dhamm.apada

••• by -;-1. D. C. \-'-agiswara and K. J. Saunders. The ~'lisdom
of the East Series. London: John Murray, 1912.

The D71amma,')ada ~ Translated from the Pali _ by P. Lal. New York:

Ferrar, Straus and Giroux, 1967.

The Dham:nanada: A Collection of Verses w' Bein~ One of the Can-

onical r::ooks or - the IJuddhi si~s o __CrZlnsla ted rrom Pali by F ..
MaX ~:tiller. 'The Sacred Books of the East, vol .. 10, pt6 1.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1881.

Dhariliilapadam: An AntholQP'Y of Saving-s of the BuddhQ.~ :Sdi ted and

translat;ed by A. P • .8uddhadatta i'iahathera" Colombo: Apoth-
ecaries Co., n.d.

Dham:naDadam: The ;;_~v of Li_fe Accordint;- to the Buddha. Edi ted

by 1{alagedera Somalokatissa. 2d ed. Colombo: H. D. Guna-
sena, 1969.

Hymns of the Fa-i th (Dhamm:::.nada) ~ : Bein<=; an Ancient Antholor;v

it • • Transla tee? fI'o~ tIle Pd.l_ i by ...\.1 b·ert 0. ~tlmunds« Chica-
go: Open Court Publishing Company; London: K. Paul, Trench,
Trllbner & Co., 1902.,

The ~·1inor :\ntholo2'ies of the Pal i Canon. Part I. Dhammapada:

Verses on DhaDma and Khuddaka0a ti---;a:-; The Text of the Hinor
Sayings. Re-edited and translated by C. A. F. Rhys Davids.
Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vol. 7. London: Humphrey
Milford, Oxford University Press, 19J1.
..
191 ...
Suttapi ~aka: Khuddakanikaya': Dhammapada: Hindi

Dhammanada. Hindi' anuvada, SalJ1skrtacchaya ••.•. [The Dhammapada.

Hindi translation with Sanskrit renderings. Edited by ~w~­
ji Upadhyay. 1st ed.] Allahabad: Indian Press, 1966.
sa tha Pal!. aura Hindianuvada. [The
Dha..~maTJada. Ka tb'aoI!' Ice
Dhammanada. Pali text and Hindi translation with stories.
Edited-and translated by Dharm Raksit. 3d ed.] Banaras:
KhelaFilala Sanka~a Prasada. 1968.
Dhammanada: Sr,madbhag-avad (Buddha) GJ:ta. [The Dhammapada: the
Song of Lord Buddha. Edited by Indra. 1st ed.] Delhi:
Rajapala,1956 •.

Suttapi~aka:' ¥~uddakanikaya: Dharnmapada: Russian

Dkharnmanada. [The Dhaw.!!lapada. Translated by V. N. Toporov J.

Bibliotheca Buddhica, 31. 1-!oscow, 1960.

Suttapitaka: Khuddakanik~ya: Udana

The Hinor Antholo~ies of the Pali,Canon.Part II: Udana: Ver-

ses of UpliI~t, and .Itivutta~a, as It was Said. Translated
by F. L. Woodward, with an introduction by C. A. F., Rhys
Davids. Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vol. 8. 1935. Re-
print. London: Geoffrey Curnberlege, Oxford University
Press, 1948.
Udaria. Das Euch der Feierlichen Worte des Erhabenen, eine Kan-
onische Scrift des Pali-Buddhismus, in Erstmaliger Deut-
scher Uebersetzung aus dem Urtext von Karl Seidenstucker.
Augsburg: T. Lampart, 1920.,

The Ud?na; or. Tne Solemn Utterances of the Buddha. Translated

f~orn the Pali by D. M.' Strong. London: Luzac & Cb., 1902.

suttapikaka: K~uddakanikaya: Itivuttaka

Sayin!{s 0 f Euddha: the I ti- Vu

ttaka, a Pal i 110rk of the Btiddhi st
Canon. Translated with an introduction and notes by Justin
Hartley Hoore. Columbia lJniversity Indo-Iranian Series.
r- vol. 5. Xew York: Columbia University Press, 1908.

Suttapitaka: h~uddakanikaya: Suttanipata

The Sutta-~inata: A Collection of Discourses, Being- One of the

Canonical !:jooks of the I3uddhisL;S. Translated from the Pali
by Hichael Viggo Fausbpllo The Sacred Books of the East, -
vol. 10, pt. 2. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1881.
 192 " , '

Woven Cadences of Earlv Buddhists (Suttanioata) • Translated b y .

Edward ~\liles Hare. The Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vol.
15. London: Geoffrey Cumberlege, Oxford University Press,
1947.
Suttapi~aka: Khuddakanikaya: Theragatha

Psalms of the Early Buddhists. Part I i Psalms of the Sisters;

Part II: Psalms of the. Brethren, translated by Hrs. P..hyS
Davids. 2.vols. Pali Text Society Translation Series, vols.·
1, 4. London: H. Frowde, .1909-13.

3. Selectioris from Pali Texts of the.Tipiijaka

Buddhism in Translations. Passag~s selected from the Buddhist

sacred tf:,xts and translated from the original Pali into
English tly Henry Clarke ;';arren. Harvard Oriental Series,
vol. 3. Cambridge, Hass.: Harvard University Press, 1947.
Some Savings of the Buddha, Accordin~ to the Pali Canon. Trans-
lated by F. L. ~oodward, with an introduction by Francis
Younghusband. The 'Jorld's Classic.s; 483. London: Oxford Un-
iversity Press, 1939. I .

The Word of the.Buddha: An Outline of the Teaching- of the Bud-

dha in the ;;ords of the Fali Canon. Compiled, translated
and explain~d by bhikkhu Nyanatiloka. Kandy: Buddhist Pub-
lication Society, 1959.

4. Commentaries on Pali Texts of the.Tipitaka

Vinayapit:aka

Bliddhaghosa, Samantaoasadika: Buddha"':"hosa's Corr:mentarv on the

Vinaya Pitaka. Edited by J. Takakusu and H. !\agai. Pali
Text Society LPublicationsl, vols. 96, 102, 109, 116, 126.
7 vols. London~ Oxford Universlty Press, 1924-27.

Suttapitaka

Buddhaghosa, Visuddhima~~a. Edited by Henry Clarke Warren. Re-

vi sed by Dharmananda Kosambi. Cambridge, ?>lass.: Harvard Un-
iversity Press, 1950.

Upatissa, The Path of Freedom rVimuttimaP:!5aJ. Translated into

Chinese (Gedatsu Do Han) by Tipi!aka Sanghapala of Funan.
Translated from the Chinese by N. R. N. Ehara, Soma Thera,
and Khemindra Thera .. Colombo: R. Donald D. iveerasuriya,
1961.
;:as

193

Suttapitaka: D"i"ghanikaya

Buddhaghosa, S'lunang-alavilasini; or f The Commentary of the DI-

ghanikaya of the ;;utta Pi"taka. 2dited by Heyyan-cuduwe
Dhammaki tti ::;iri Devar:1ic t=a ;·~ahathera. Simon Hevavi tame
Bequest, vol .. 4. [Pali Text in Sinhalese Script]. Colombo:
Tripitaka Publication Press, 1:918.

Suttapitaka: Hajjhimanikaya

Buddhaghosa, Papancasudanl; or, The Commentary on the i'1ajjhima-

nikaya of the Sutra .pi ;;aka. Edi t:ed by IJhammaki tt:i Siri
Dhammananda. Slmon HeHavitarne Beauest, vol. 44. 5 vols.
[Pali Text in Sinhalese Script]. Colombo: Tripitaka Publi-
cation Press, 1943.

5. Treatises on Pali Texts of the Tipitaka

Treatises in Pali

Anuruddha,. Abhidhar:1matthasan«:aha. Edited by Ariyaratne Reruka-

na. [Pali Text in Sinhalese Script]. Colombo: P. K. 'W. Si-
riwardhane, GranthadaraS"a flress, 1942.

Kaccayana,. The Netti-Pal<arana. Wi th extracts from Dhammapala t s

commentary. ~dited by s:
Hardy. Pali Text Society [Publica-
tions], vol. 50. 1902. Reprint. London: Luzac & Co., 1961.

Treat-ises in Sansicrit
r~bayasingha. ::Jvavabindu D1Dika. 1H th text, commentary, and Sin-
halese paraphrase. LSanskrit Text in Sinhalese Script]. Co-
lombo: Lankabhinava Vi£~uta Press, 1945.
·" -
D 1nnaga, -
Pra",aT"_a S2.r:1uccava. C"d l. t e d and restored into Sanskrit
with v~tti, tlka, and notes by H. R. Rangaswamy Iyengar.
Hysore University Publication .. l-iysore: Government Branch
Press, 1930.

Gotama, called Aksanada, The Nv'<1ya Sutras of Gotarna. Translated

by Sa ti ~a Chand~a VidY-Abhusana. 'ihe Sacred i300ks of the Hin-
dus, vol. 8. Allahabad: F<1Qini Office, 191J.

6. Translations of Treatises on Pali Texts of the Tipitaka

Anuruddha, CompendiulTl of Philoso'Ohv. BeinlS a transla tion now

made for the first time from the original Pali of the Abhi-
dhammattha-Sangaha, with introductory essay and notes by
Shwe Zan Aung. Revised and edited by Hrs" Rhys Davids. Pali
p.

194
·:,,+ext Society _Transla·tion Series, ·vol. 2. ···London:·-H. ~Frowde,
·i9l0.

II. THE CA~ONICAL LITERATURE OF MAHAYANA BUDDHISM

(1. Texts in Sanskrit; 2. Treatises in Sanskrit)

1. Texts· in Sanskrit
The Da~abhumikasutra et BodhisattvabhUmi ••• Publi~s avec in-
troduction et notes par J. Rahder. Paris: P. Guethner,
1926.
Lalita Vistara. Leben und Lehre des 9cikya-Buddha •. Text-ausgabe
mi t Varia.nten-, metren-und 1vorterverzeichnis .von E. S.
Lefmann. 2 vol·s. Ha1le.a. S.: BuchhancUung.des··1{aisenhaus-
es, 1902-1908.
The Lankavatara Sutra. A Mah;'yana text· translated for the
first time from the. original Sanskri t by Diasetz Tei taro
Suzuki. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1959.

The !-iahavastu. Translated from the Buddhist S~nskrit by J .. J •.

Jones. Sacred Books of the Buddhists, vols. 16, 18-19_ J
~bls_ London: Luzac & Co.~ 1949-52.

Mahavastu Abadanam. Le Hah~vastu. Texte sans'crit, publie pour

la premiere lois et accompagne d'introductions et d'un
commentaire par E. Senart. J vo1s. Paris: Imprimerie Na-
tiona1e, 1882-97.
Mahavyutnatti. A Tibetan index to the Hahavyutpatti, with its
Sanskrit equivalents. Sakaki edition by Kyoo Nishio. Kyo-
to: Isseido Publishing Company, 1941.
Saddharmapu~~arlka. Edited. by H. Kern and Bunyiu Nanjio. Bib-
.
liotheca
./ . .Buddhica,
. 10. ,St.
. Petersburg: Imprimerie de l'Ae-
edem1e 1mper1ale des sC1ences, 1912.
.. ,
Sa1istambasutra: Bouddhisme, Etudes et Hateriaux , Theorie des
Douze Caus;}s. (r{econstructed). Zdi tee par Louis de La Val-
16e Poussin. Gand: E. Van Goethern, 191J.

Suvarnaprabhasasutra~ Suvarnabhasottamasutra: Das Gold~lanz­

siitra. Bin Sanskri ttext· des i-lahayana-Buddhismus nach den
Handschriften und mit Hilfe der Tibetischen und Chinesisch-
"
en Ubertragungen. Hrsg. von Johannes Nobel. Leipzig: o.
Harrassowitz, 1937.
paa

19.5
", """.

2., Treatises in Sanskrit

..!l- ----'''7
~ Kasyapapari varta: A ~lahayanasutra of' the Ratnakuta Class., Edi-
,
~ ted in the original Sanskrit, Tibetan and in Chinese by
A. von Stael-Holstein.Shanghai: ,Commercial Press, 1926.
Nagar juna. The DharJ!la-Sam!';raha: 'An Ancient Collection of'Bud-
dhist Technical .r:;~·ns. Prepared ••• by Kenjiu Kasawara •••
':, and ••• edi ted by F. l-lax' ~1iiller and H. Wenzel. Ailecdota,
Oxo~iensia. Aryan Series, vol. 1, pt. 5. Oxford: Clarendon
Press. 1885.

,Santideva, Siksha Samuccava: A Co~nendium of Buddhist Doctrine

• •• Transla toed 'from the Sanskri t by Cecil Bendall and W. H.
D. Rouse. London: John }1urray for ,the Governmen,t of India,
1922.

lIT. THE CANONICAL LITERATURE ,'OF HINDUISM

(1. Texts in Sanskrit; 2. Translations of' Sanskrit Texts)

1. Texts in Sanskrit
Vedas. Jgveda
......•.
The Hvmns of th~, R'i~veda. in the Pada Text. Reprinted from the
Edi ti 0 Princ eo s , by F.' Hax Niill er. London: Trubner & Co., '
1897. - ,

~gveda-Samhita. With the, commentary of Sayanacharya. Edited by

S. N. Sontakka and othersG 5 vols. Poona: Vedic Research
Institute, 1933-51.
A ' ~
Rig-Veda-Sarnhita: the Sacred Hymns of the Brahrnat;ls. Together
with the cOrnme~"l1;ary of Sayanacarya. Edited by F. Hax r--1Ul1er.
1st ed. 4 vo1s. London: H. Fr01-lde, Oxford University Prees,
,18~O-92~

---------- 2d ed. Varanasi: The Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Of-

fice, 1966.
Vedas; Atharvaveda

Tne Kausika Surra of the At"harvaveda. 1{i th extracts from the

commentaries of Darlla and Ke~ava. Edited by Maurice B10om-
fiel~. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1890.
F
,:., -

l.96

,'Upani'lads

The Principal Upaniqads. Edi ted with introduction, text,'

translat~on and notes by Sarvapa11i nad~akrishnan. Rev.
ed. New Yorlc: Humani ties Press, 1.969. '

'The Bhagavadp;1ta._~.fi th an introductory essay", Sanskri t text,

English translation a.."1d notes, by S. Radhakrishnan. 2d ed.
London: George Allen and Unwin, 1949. ' ,

2. >:-Trans1ations of Sanskri t Texts

Vedas: ~~eda

The Hymns of the ~!SVeda. Translated lri th a popular commentary,

by Ralph if. H. GrJ..t"'fi the 2d ed. Henares: E. J. Lazarus and
Co., 1896.
Upani)'ads

The.Thirteen Principa1 Upani$ads. Translated from the Sanskrit

with an outline o£ the-philosophy of the Uparti~ads and an-
iiotated bibliography, by Robert Ern~st Hume. 2d ed., rev.,
with a list of recurrent and parallel passages by George
C. O. Haas. London: Humphrey Hilford., Oxford University
Press, 1931..

IV. PERIODICAL ARTICLES

"Abhidhammattha-Sa..";'gaha," edi ted by T. W. Rhys Davids, Journal

Of the Pali Text- Society (1882)= 21.-23.
Mazundar, B .. C., "Udanam," Journal of the Royal Asiatic Socie-
~ (January 1911): 197-200.

SECOND~~Y SOURCES
(I. Di9t;onaries and Encycloned~as; 2. Works on Euddhism; J.
Works on Ei s-r:ory and Cul ture; 4. h'orks on Language and Li tera-
ture; 5. Periodical Articles; 6. General Works)

1. Dictionaries and Encvclopedias

Cappeller, Carl, A Sanskrit-English Dictionarv. Based upon the
r 197
St. Petersbur.g Lexicon. London: Luzac & Co., 1891.

Childers, Robert Caesar, A Dictionarvof the Pali Language.

,London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1909.

Dowson, John, A Classical Dictionarv of Hindu 'Hytholo.c;v and

Beligion. 7thed. London: Kegan Paul, Trench" Triibner &:
Co., 1950.

Encvclopaedia of Rel-ro-ion and Ethics. Edited by James 'Hastings

wi th the assis,tance ol.~ John A.. Selbie •• ~ and other schol-
ars. 13 vols. New York: Char.les Scribner's Sons, 1924-27.

Grassmann, Hermann GLL"1.ther, Worterbuchzur.1 Rig-Veda. J unver-

anderte Aufl.l.riesbaden: O. Harrassowi tz, 1973.,

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony, A Practical Sanskrit Dictionary.

With transliteration, accentuation, and etymological anal-
ysis throughout. Reprint. London: Oxford University Press,
1.971..
Ma1alasekera, George peiris~ Dictionarv of Pali Proper Names.
Indian Texts Series. 2 vols. London: John Hurray, 1937-38.

Monier-~Jilliams,Honier, A Sanskrit-Enc;lish Dictionary. Ety-

mologically and philologically arranged with special re-
ference to ••• cognate Indo-European languages. Newed.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1960. '

PaJ.i Text Society, London, Pali-Eng-lish Dictionarv. Edited by

Thomas Willia. ns R..~ys Davids and liilliam Stede. Reprint.
London: Pali Text Society, 1959.

The Random House Dictionarv of the Eng-1ish LangLlag-e. Jess

Stein: editor in chief: Laurence Urdang: managing editor.
Unabridged ed. New York: Random House, 1967.

·Websterts Ke,~ International Dictionary of the En~lish Lang-

uagee i.[i11i am A.il.an Sei1son y edi tor in chief; Thomas A.
Knott, general edi 'tor; ,Paul '{. Carhart f managingedi tor.
A Merriam-Webster Publication. 2d ed., unabridged. Spring-
field, }1ass.: G. & C. Herriam Company, 1939.

2. Works on Buddhism

Adikara,ll, E. Ii., Early History· of Buddhism in Ceylon; or,

State of Budilllis~ in Ceylon as Hevealed bv the Pali Com-
mentaries of the 5th Century A. Do.Migoda, Ceylon: D. S.
Puswella, 1946.

Carus, P.aul, The Gospel of Buddha. Compiled from ancient re-

cords. Illustrated by O. Kopetzky. Chicago and London: Op-
 198

en Court Publishing, Company, 1915.

Grimm, Georg~. The~ctrine 'of' 'the Buddha: . the ·Re1ig:l.on of'
Reason and MeditatiDn. Edited by M. Keller-Grimm and Max
Hoppe. lTrans1ation of Die Lehre des Buddho, die Religion
der Vernu.Y1.ft und der Meditation]. 2d rev. ed. Berlin:
Akademie-Verlag .. .1958.
Guenther, Herbert, Philosophy and Psychology in Adhidhamma.
, Lucknewl. The Pioneer Press. 1957 •

:. "
., ·Jaya!!luriya,W • F., Th~· Psvchnlop;v and Philosophy of' Buddhism,
......-
.. : -. . Being an Introduction to the Abhidharnma. Colombo: Y.M •.
B. A. Press, 1963 •
. ,5<,

Jayat;1~e, Kulatissa Nanda, Early Buddhist Theory of Know-

:' -. . iedge. Lendonl George Allen d: Unwin, 1963.
'------- FaeE~ ts of Bu.ddhi s~ Thoi!ght: Six Es savs. The 'l(heelPu-
blications, nos. 162-64. Kanciys Buddhist Publications So-
ciety, 3.971.
Johansson, Rune Earl A.,
The Psychology of Nirvana t A Comnar-
ative Study of' t~e Natural Goal of Buddhism and the Aim
of Modern Philosonhv. Anchor Books, A 728. Garden
~estern
City, N. Y., Doub~eday & Company,' 1970.
Keith,. A. Berriedale~ Buddhist Philosonhv 1n India andCevlon.
. Oxford: At the C1arendon Press, 1923.
Monier-Wil1iw~3, Monier, Buddrtism. in Its Connexion with Bra-
hmanism and Hindui.sm. and in Its Cont::r'ast wi th Christian-
~. The Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Studies, vol. 45. 2d
edt Varanasi: The Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1971.

.
~anananda, Bhikkhl.l, Concept and Realitv in Earlv
. Buddhist
Thought: An Essav on 'Pananca-sarina-Sankha.' Kandy: Bud-
dhist Publication Society, 1971.
Narada Thera, A }!~?p2l of Budd~ism: A Textbook of Buddhism
for the S. S. C. 3d ed. Colombo: Associated Newspapers of
Ceylon, 1952.
01denberg, Hermarul, All~ dem Alten Indien: Die Aufsatz~ uber
den BuddhJs!nus. ~\l. ti29jsc~ Dichtunl) und' Geschicht~chrei­
bung. Berlin:-Gebruder Paetel, 1910.
Piyadassi Thera, The Buddha's Ancient Path. London: Rider and
Company, 1964.
.
------- The Psvcholo~cal Aspect of Buddhism. Fifth Sir Baron
Jayati1aka Hemorial Lecture. Colombo, 1972.
Rhys Davids, Caroline Augusta Foley. Buddhist Psycholof)v: An
Inguirv inter the Analysi s· and Theorv 01~ ~;ind in Pal i Li ter-
pz

ature. Quest Series. 2d ed. London: Luzac & Co., 1924.

Rhys Davids, . Thomas 1-!il1.iam, Buddhism: Being a Sketch of the,

Life and 7eC!chin~s of Gautal71a, the Buddha. ?~e\.; and rev.
ed. London: Socie~y for Promoting Christian Knowledge,
1903.

------- Buddhist India. 1st Indian ed. Calcutta: Susil Gupta

( Indi a), I 9 50 a

.~------ The Historv and Literature of Buddhism. 4th ed. Cal-

cutta: Susil G~pta (India), 1952.

Silva, Padmasiri de, Buddhist and Freudian Psychology. Colom-

bOl Lake House Investments, 1973.

Silva, s. P. de, A Scientific Rationalization of &Jddhi~m.'

Colombo: Metro Printers, 1969.

Stcherbatsky, Fedor Theodore, Buddhist Log-ic. 2 volSa Reprint.

New York: Dover Publications, 1962.

------- The Centra!. C0nception of Buddhism and the Henning of

the Word Dha'"l71a. ~th ed. -Delhi: Indological Book House,
1.970.

Suzuki,D. T., Zen Buddhism: Selected Writine;sa Edited by Wil-

liam Barrett. Doubleday Anchor Book~. Garden City, N. Y.:
Doubleday & Company, 1956.

Takah~su, Junjiro, ]he Essentials of Buddhist Philosophy. Edi-

ted by Wing-Tsit Chan and Charles A. Hoore.Jd ed. Honolu-
lu: Office App1ia.~ce Co., 1956.

Thomas, Edward Joseph,lO The Historv of Buddhist Thoue:ht. The

History of' Ciyi1ization: Pre-History and A."1tiquity. 2d ed.
New York: Barnes & Noble, 1951.

------- The Life of the Buddha as Lep,"end and Historv. History

. of cIvilization. Jd ed. New York: BarnE~s 6; i\oble, 1952.

2500 Years of Purldhi~~. Edited by P. V. Bapat; foreword by S.

Radhakrishnan. ~!e;.... Delhi: Publications Division, Hinistry
of Information and Broadcasting~ Government of India, 1956.
•• _ r-J_ • _ _ •
VaJ~ra."1ana~ Paravahera, 13uddhlst ::-1 e d1.. tatlon l.n Theory and Prac-
.:!ice: A General Exposi tion Aceordin£; to the PaJj. _Canon of
the Theravada Seheol. Colombo: ~. D. Gunasena & Cq., 1962.

Wa1pola Rahula, l{hatthe Buddha Tauc;ht. With a foreword by Paul

Demievil1e and a collection of illustrative texts transla-
ted from the original Pali. Gordon Fraser Gift Booksc 2d
 \ -
200

. and enl.. ed •.. Bedford: The Gordon Fraser' Gallery. 1967 ..

, . Works on History and Culture

·.Basham,· Arthur L1ewell.yn~ The Wonder That .Was India: A Survey

of the Culture of the Indiart SUb-Continent. Before t;he Corn--
ingot~ the £.Iu5lirris. By~rgreen ea. New York: Grove Press,
'1959.
The Indian Mind: Essentials of Indian Philosophy and Culture.
Charles A. Hoore, 'editor, with the assistance of Aldyth V.
Morris. Honolulu: East-West Center Press; University of
Hawaii, 1967.

. .
. 4. Works on Language and Literature
Bloomfield, Leonard, Language. Reprint. London: George A11en
&: Unwin, 1962.'
\
Geiger, Wilhe1:r.l, Pali Literature and LanP,'Uage. Authorized Eng-
1ish translation bv Balakrishna Ghosh. Calcutta: Universi-
ty of Calcutta,. 1943 •

.Law, Bimala Churn, History of Pali Literature. With. a foreword

by Wilhelm Geiger. 2 vols. London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
·Trubner & Co., 1933.
Whitney, Wi11iam Dwight, The Roots. Verb-Forms and Primary De-
rivatives of the Sanskrit Language .• A supplement to his
Sanskrit Grammar. Reprint ed. Del,tli: Motil.al. Banarsidass,
1963.
Winternitz, Horiz, A History of Indian Literature. rTranslated
from the original. German by S. Ketkar and Helen-Kahn]. 2
vols. Calcutta: University of Calcutta, 1959.

5. Periodical Articles
Anesaki, M., "Sutta-Ninata in Chinese," Journal of the Pali
Text Society 60 (1906-1907): 50-5l~
Hoernle, A. F. Rudolf~ "The Sutta Nipata in a Sanskrit Version
from Eastern '1'urkestan,"Journal of the Roval Asiatic Socie-
~ (October 19l6): 709-J2.

Wijesekara, O. H. de A., "Vedic Gandharva and Pali Gandhabba,"

Ceylon University Review, J, 1 (April 1954): 1-10.
p

.~ .
,"-- "7_

201
~~

Windisch,E.,.uNoteon -the Edition· of the Udana," Journal of

the Pali Text 30ci~ 24' (1.890):- 91-108.

6. General Works
Shakespeare, ~iil.lia"1l. T}1e COflmlete hl'orks of Will-t.am Shakes-
peare. The Cambridge edition text, as edi ted ,by Ihl1iam
A.1ctis ;-lright ••• Illustrated by Rock""ell Kent, with.a pre-
face by Christopher Morley. Philadelphia: The Blakiston
Company , 19~J 6 •

'.